Service Manual BSC-TRAU PDF

C
A
T
E
G
O
R
Y

3
3
3
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

D
E
S
C
R
I
P
T
I
O
N
C
A
T
E
G
O
R
Y

4
3
3
I
N
S
T
A
L
L
A
T
I
O
N

A
N
D
C
O
N
F
I
G
U
R
A
T
I
O
N
C
A
T
E
G
O
R
Y

5
3
3
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
I
N
F
O
R
M
A
T
I
O
N
I
N
D
E
X
C
A
T
E
G
O
R
Y

1
3
1

S
Y
S
T
E
M

I
N
F
O
R
M
A
T
I
O
N
29 Aug 1997
Service Manual: BSC/RXCDR
68P02901W38-O
GMR-04
GMR Page 1
Manual Revision
GMR-04
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W38-O
GSM-100-030
Motorola manual
affected
This Manual Revision is applicable only to the manual number and version listed below:
68P02901W38-O Service Manual
Service requests
This revision provides a fix to the following service requests:
N/A
Reason for
revision
This revision provides additional and updated information as follows:
Category 333, Chapter 2. Sections added for DSW2, GDP2 and DSWX modules.
Various categories. Detailed comments are added as necessary to indicate
requirements and constraints when using AMR hardware retrospectively in BSSC2
cabinets.
Action
Remove and replace pages in the Manual as follows:
Remove Insert
All pages between the clear acetate
front sheet and the blank backing
sheet, remove from binder.
All pages of the GMR between the
front sheet and the blank backing
sheet, insert into binder.
Destroy all obsolete pages. Do not destroy this page.
Insert this Manual Revision sheet in the front of the manual for future reference.
GSM-100-030
29 Aug 1997 GMR Page 2
GMR-04
68P02901W38-O
THISPAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFTBLANK
Cellular Infrastructure Group
SERVICE MANUAL
BSC/RXCDR
GMR-04
68P02901W38-O
GSM-100-030
68P02901W38-O
GSM-100-030
SERVICE MANUAL
BSC/RXCDR
GMR-04
SERVICE MANUAL
BSC/RXCDR
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W38-O
GMR-04
i
GSM-100-030
Service Manual
BSC/RXCDR
E Motorola 19932003
All Rights Reserved
Printed in the U.K.
GSM-100-030
29 Aug 1997 ii
GMR-04
68P02901W38-O
Copyrights, notices and trademarks
Copyrights
The Motorola products described in this document may include copyrighted Motorola computer
programs stored in semiconductor memories or other media. Laws in the United States and other
countries preserve for Motorola certain exclusive rights for copyright computer programs, including the
exclusive right to copy or reproduce in any form the copyright computer program. Accordingly, any
copyright Motorola computer programs contained in the Motorola products described in this document
may not be copied or reproduced in any manner without the express written permission of Motorola.
Furthermore, the purchase of Motorola products shall not be deemed to grant either directly or by
implication, estoppel or otherwise, any license under the copyrights, patents or patent applications of
Motorola, except for the rights that arise by operation of law in the sale of a product.
Restrictions
The software described in this document is the property of Motorola. It is furnished under a license
agreement and may be used and/or disclosed only in accordance with the terms of the agreement.
Software and documentation are copyright materials. Making unauthorized copies is prohibited by
law. No part of the software or documentation may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored
in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer language, in any form or by any
means, without prior written permission of Motorola.
Accuracy
While reasonable efforts have been made to assure the accuracy of this document, Motorola
assumes no liability resulting from any inaccuracies or omissions in this document, or from the use
of the information obtained herein. Motorola reserves the right to make changes to any products
described herein to improve reliability, function, or design, and reserves the right to revise this
document and to make changes from time to time in content hereof with no obligation to notify any
person of revisions or changes. Motorola does not assume any liability arising out of the application
or use of any product or circuit described herein; neither does it convey license under its patent
rights of others.
Trademarks
and MOTOROLA are registered trademarks of Motorola Inc.
M-Cell and Taskfinder are trademarks of Motorola Inc.
All other brands and corporate names are trademarks of their respective owners.
GSM-100-030
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W38-O
GMR-04
iii
Issue status of this manual 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General information 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
First aid in case of electric shock 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reporting safety issues 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Warnings and cautions 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General warnings 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Human exposure to radio frequency energy (PCS1900 only) 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Beryllium health and safety precautions 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General cautions 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Devices sensitive to static 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motorola GSM manual set 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GMR amendment 19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GMR amendment record 20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Category 131
System Information i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 1
Introduction i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cabinet types 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BSSC cabinet configuration 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration options 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Location 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Equipment 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cabinet description external 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
External view 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
External features 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cabinet description internal 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Internal view 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Internal units 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 2
Specification i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specification 21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Environment 21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions 21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Weights 21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power consumption 21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power requirements 22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Positive earth BSSC cabinets 22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Negative earth BSSC cabinets 22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Back-up power 22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overcurrent protection 22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GSM-100-030
29 Aug 1997 iv
GMR-04
68P02901W38-O
Category 333
Technical Description i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 1
General Information i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cabinet types 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BSSC2 cabinet configuration 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Location 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Equipment 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
External view 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Internal view 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Internal units 17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Base station unit shelf assembly 18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BSC numbering 18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BSU shelf 19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shelf module fit 110 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ventilation 112 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Backplane connectors 112 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote transcoder unit shelf assembly 113 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 113 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RXU numbering 113 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RXU shelf 114 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shelf module fit 115 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ventilation 117 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power distribution unit components 118 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 118 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 118 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input power 118 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Circuit breakers 118 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fan cooling system 119 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 119 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Location 119 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Requirements 119 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interconnect panel 120 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 120 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Panel layout 120 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connectors 121 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BSSC Cabinet labels 122 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 122 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BSSC labels 122 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Key to BSSC labels 123 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GSM-100-030
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W38-O
GMR-04
v
BSSC2 Cabinet labels 124 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 124 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Labelling diagrams 124 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Labelling tables 126 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BSSC2 cabinet cabling 127 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 127 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagram 1 128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagram 2 129 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagram 3 130 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagram 4 131 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BSSC differences 132 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 132 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Types of PDU 132 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PDB 132 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AIB 132 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAB 132 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BSSC cabinet cabling (PAB) 133 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 133 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagram 1 134 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagram 2 135 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BSSC cabinet cabling (PDB/AIB) 136 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 136 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagram 1 137 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 2
Digital modules i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
In this chapter 21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BSU and RXU shelf diagrams 22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BSU shelf 22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RXU shelf 23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Module front panels 25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Full-size modules 27 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 27 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The modules 27 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BTC 28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose 28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Requirements 28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BTC module 28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DSW2 29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose 29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Timeslot interchange 211 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Local highway 211 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote TDM highway 211 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Expansion TDM highways 212 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Three party conference 214 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Self-diagnostics 214 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Serial interface 215 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Slot position 215 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GSM-100-030
29 Aug 1997 vi
GMR-04
68P02901W38-O
GCLK 216 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose 216 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Requirements 216 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GCLK module 216 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brief description 217 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reference oscillator 217 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reference dividers 217 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reference encoders 217 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reference fail detect 217 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clock control/alarm logic 218 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Buffered test ports 218 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GCLK diagram 219 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GDP2 220 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose 220 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Requirements 220 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GDP2 module 221 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Architecture 222 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MCU subsystem 223 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DSP subsystem 223 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multiplexer 223 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E1 Line interface 223 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CRC-4 Error checking 224 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Digital crosspoint switch 224 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MCAP interface 224 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TDM interface 224 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GDP2 diagram 225 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GPROC 226 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose 226 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Requirements 226 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communication 226 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GPROC module 227 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Memory 227 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting and diagnostics 227 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Software 228 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BTS and BSC GPROC functions 228 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RXCDR GPROC functions 229 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flash EPROM daughter card 230 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GPROC diagram 231 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GPROC2 232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose 232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Requirements 232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GPROC2 module 233 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communication 233 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Memory 233 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Software 234 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BSC GPROC2 functions 234 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RXCDR GPROC2 functions 235 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GPROC2 diagram 236 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GSM-100-030
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W38-O
GMR-04
vii
KSW 237 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose 237 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Requirements 237 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KSW module 237 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Architecture 238 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Timing reference 238 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switchbound TDM interface structure 238 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Expansion switchbound highways 239 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Timeslot interchange (TSI) 239 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connection RAM control 239 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Three-party conference (TPC) memory 240 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fixed/dynamic pattern registers 240 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outbound selection MUX 240 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Highway monitor 240 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Watchdog timer 240 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interrupt logic 241 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Serial interface logic 241 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KSW switching 241 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KSW in a BSC 241 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KSW in a RXCDR 241 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KSW diagram 242 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interconnected KSWs 243 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MSI 244 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose 244 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Requirements 244 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MSI module 245 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General features 245 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transcoded environment 246 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Functional description 246 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MSI diagram 248 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MSI-2 249 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose 249 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Requirements 249 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MSI-2 module 250 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transcoded environment (E1) 251 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transcoded environment (T1/JT1) 251 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MSI-2 diagram 254 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
XCDR 255 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose 255 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Requirements 255 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
XCDR module 256 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Architecture 256 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Processor 257 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DSP 257 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Subrate multiplexer modes 257 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Line interface 258 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switching 258 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MCAP interface 258 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TDM interface 258 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
XCDR diagram 259 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GSM-100-030
29 Aug 1997 viii
GMR-04
68P02901W38-O
GDP 260 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose 260 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Requirements 261 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GDP module 261 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Architecture 262 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MCU subsystem 262 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DSP subsystem 262 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E1/T1 Line interface 263 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MCAP interface 264 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TDM interface 264 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GDP diagram 265 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NVM board description 266 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose of the NVM board 266 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mechanical design 266 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interrogating the NVM board 267 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Half-size modules 268 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 268 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The modules 268 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BBBX 269 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose 269 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Requirements 269 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BBBX module 269 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BBBX diagram 270 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CLKX 271 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose 271 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Requirements 271 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GCLK module 271 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CLKX diagram 272 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DSWX 273 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose 273 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Requirements 273 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DSWX module 274 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DSWX Block diagram 276 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KSWX 277 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose 277 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Requirements 277 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KSWX module 278 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KSWX diagram 279 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GSM-100-030
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W38-O
GMR-04
ix
LANX 280 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose 280 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Requirements 280 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LANX module 281 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Local LAN data switching 281 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Extended LAN data switching 282 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bus arbiter 283 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Redundant LAN 283 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shelf ID 283 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front panel 283 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LANX diagram 284 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PIX 285 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 285 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Requirements 285 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PIX module 285 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PIX diagram 286 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 3
Power, fans and interconnections i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
In this chapter 31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power supply modules 32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cabinet power requirements 32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DPSM 33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DPSM view 33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DPSM diagram 35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EPSM 36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EPSM view 36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EPSM diagram 38 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IPSM 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IPSM view 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IPSM diagram 311 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PDU 312 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 312 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input power 312 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DAB 313 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose 313 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Requirements 313 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DAB diagram 313 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuses and LEDs (BSSC2) 314 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switch settings (BSSC2) 315 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alarm functions 316 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Visual warnings 316 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communications 316 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GSM-100-030
29 Aug 1997 x
GMR-04
68P02901W38-O
PAB 317 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose 317 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagram 317 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BSSC cabinet 317 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuses and LEDs (BSSC) 318 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jumpers 319 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alarm functions 319 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Visual warnings 319 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input signals 320 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Serial bus 320 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reset 321 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Timing 321 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BSSC status inputs 321 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Signal routeing 321 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Signal timing 321 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PDB and AIB 322 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 322 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AIB description 322 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AIB view 322 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PDB description 323 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PDB diagram 323 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Circuit breakers 324 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose 324 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BSSC with PAB 324 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BSSC with PDB/AIB 324 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BSSC2 324 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 325 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power 325 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Location 326 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose 326 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BSSC 327 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BSSC2 328 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Type 43 interconnect board 329 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Location 329 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose 329 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
T43 diagram 329 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
T43 connectors 330 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Balanced line interconnect board 331 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Location 331 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose 331 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BIB diagram 331 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BIB connectors 332 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Category 433
Installation and Configuration i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 1
Site preparation i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Torque values 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
In this chapter 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GSM-100-030
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W38-O
GMR-04
xi
Tool kits for installing GSM cellular equipment 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tool kit one 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tool kit two 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Site requirements and considerations 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Structural requirements 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cabinet dimensions 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating environment 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storage environment 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagram 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Back up power 17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Handling optical fibres 18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Protection of fibres and connectors 18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning of fibres and connectors 18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fibre connection 18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Minimum bend radius 19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Visiting the site 110 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 110 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Before the visit 110 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Arriving at the site 110 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Leaving the site 111 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rubbish 111 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rural sites 111 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety on site 112 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 2
Installing the equipment i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
In this chapter 21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Before starting 21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cabinet types 21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Delivery 21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Packaging 22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lifting cabinets 22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Site earthing 22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transient/ lightning protection 23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Torque values 23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Optical fibres 23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unpacking the equipment 24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure 24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shipping crate 24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GSM-100-030
29 Aug 1997 xii
GMR-04
68P02901W38-O
Anchoring the cabinet 25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure 25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the cabinet air deflector 26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BSSC2 26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BSSC 26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagram 27 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preparing to connect dc power and earth cables 28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAB 29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DAB 29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BSSC2 interconnect panel 210 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Negative earth BSSC interconnect panel 211 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Positive earth BSSC interconnect panel 212 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting dc power cables between cabinets and external equipment 213 . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 213 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure 213 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting dc input power and earth cables to the cabinet 214 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 214 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power and earth cables 214 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power cables for ve earth cabinets 215 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power cables for +ve earth cabinets 215 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting dc input power and earth cables to the main power source 216 . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety 216 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure 216 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing power supply modules 217 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 217 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure 217 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing digital modules 218 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 218 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Factory installation 218 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing BBBX modules 219 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure 219 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BSU shelf 220 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RXU shelf 221 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the NVM board 222 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 222 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation options 222 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the NVM board in a BSC 222 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the NVM board in an RXCDR 223 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NVM board installation procedure 224 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the control signal cabling 225 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 225 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inter-cabinet fibre optic connections 225 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E1/T1 line connections 225 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
End user I/O device cabling 226 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PIX connector 226 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PIX connector details 227 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GSM-100-030
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W38-O
GMR-04
xiii
T43 to backplane connections 228 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 228 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MS0 to BSU 228 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MS1 to BSU 229 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MS2 to BSU 229 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MS3 to BSU 230 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MS0 to RXU 230 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MS1 to RXU 231 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MS2 to RXU 231 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MS3 to RXU 232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BIB to backplane connections 233 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 233 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MS0 to BSU 234 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MS1 to BSU 235 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MS2 to BSU 236 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MS3 to BSU 237 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MS0 to RXU 238 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MS1 to RXU 239 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MS2 to RXU 240 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MS3 to RXU 241 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 3
Decommissioning the equipment i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Prerequisite 31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Decommissioning a BSSC cabinet 32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Before starting 32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure 32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BSSC checklist 34 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Category 533
Maintenance Information i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 1
Introduction i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Audience 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose of the manual 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Prerequisites 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Structure 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Related documentation 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 2
General procedures i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General procedures 21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test and Repair equipment lists 22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Repair equipment list 22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test equipment list 23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GSM-100-030
29 Aug 1997 xiv
GMR-04
68P02901W38-O
General repair procedures 24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Site configuration 24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Man machine interface (MMI) 25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Definition 25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MMI uses 25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Locating faulty cabinets 26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose 26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Prerequisites 26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure 26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting a local maintenance terminal (LMT) 210 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 210 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Required tools and equipment 210 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Prerequisites 210 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting the LMT to a GPROC 210 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting up the MMI 211 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing the security level 211 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Identifying the faulty devices 213 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Prerequisites 213 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Equipment safety 213 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking the alarm status 213 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Resetting and reinitializing a site 215 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 215 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure 215 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 3
Maintenance Procedures i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance procedures 31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Prerequisites 31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air filter replacement 32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement procedure 32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air filter cleaning 32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning cabinet air filters 33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tools and equipment 33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning cabinet air filters 33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Performing a physical inspection 34 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General information 34 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety 34 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cable tray 34 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power System 35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cabling 36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Grounding 37 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Annual physical inspection checklist 38 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose of the annual physical inspection 38 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the checklist 38 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 4
Replacement procedures i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement procedures 41 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose 41 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description 41 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter structure 41 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GSM-100-030
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W38-O
GMR-04
xv
Introduction 42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing the air filter 42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interface board replacement 43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Illustrations 43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing an interface board 44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Redundant clock extender (CLKX) module replacement 45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Illustration 45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing CLKXA 45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing CLKXB 46 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Non-redundant CLKX replacement 47 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 47 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Illustration 47 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing the CLKX 47 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing a fan unit 48 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the fan 48 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the fan 48 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Redundant GCLK module replacement 49 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 49 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Illustration 49 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing a redundant GCLK 49 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Non-redundant GCLK replacement 411 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 411 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Prerequisite 411 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Illustration 411 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conditions 411 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing a single shelf configuration GCLK 412 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing a multi-shelf configuration GCLK 412 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibrating the GCLK 413 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 413 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test equipment 413 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Commands 413 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Process 414 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GCLK calibration record form 415 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GPROC/GPROC2 replacement 416 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 416 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Redundant GPROC considerations 416 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Nonredundant GPROC considerations 416 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Before going to the site 416 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Locating the faulty GPROC 417 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the GPROC 417 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the GPROC 418 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Illustration 418 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Redundant KSW/DSW2 replacement 419 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 419 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Prerequisites 419 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Illustration 419 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure 420 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GSM-100-030
29 Aug 1997 xvi
GMR-04
68P02901W38-O
Non-redundant KSW module replacement 421 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 421 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Prerequisites 421 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Illustration 421 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure 421 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Redundant KSWX module replacement 423 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 423 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Illustration 423 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LED indications 424 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing KSWX A and B 425 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Non-redundant KSWX module replacement 426 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 426 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Illustration and indications 426 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure 426 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Redundant LANX replacement 427 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 427 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Prerequisites 427 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing the LANX associated with the active LAN 427 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing the LANX associated with the standby LAN 428 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Non-redundant LANX replacement 429 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 429 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure 429 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MSI and MSI-2 replacement 430 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 430 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Non-redundant systems 430 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Redundant systems 430 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Illustration 430 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure 431 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
XCDR replacement 432 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 432 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Non-redundant Systems 432 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Redundant Systems 432 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Illustration 432 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure 433 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GDP/GDP2 replacement 434 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 434 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Illustration 435 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure 435 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NVM replacement 437 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 437 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnosing faults on the NVM board 437 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing the NVM board 437 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front panel controls and indicators 438 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PIX replacement 439 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 439 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Illustration 439 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing the PIX 439 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GSM-100-030
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W38-O
GMR-04
xvii
Power supply module replacement 440 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 440 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Applications 440 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Illustration 440 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing a non-redundant power supply module 441 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing a redundant power supply module 441 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 5
Miscellaneous repair i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Miscellaneous repair procedures 51 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 51 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Obtaining replacement authorization 51 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing and replacing a circuit breaker 52 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 52 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Indications 52 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing a circuit breaker 52 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing a circuit breaker 53 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing a bus terminator card (BTC) 54 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 54 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Non-redundant KSWs 54 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conditions 54 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure 1 55 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure 2 56 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure 3 56 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure 4 58 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Redundant KSWs 58 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure 5 58 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing the alarm board (DAB/PAB) 510 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 510 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Background 510 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Precautions 510 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the board 511 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing a new board 512 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement of PDB and AIB boards 513 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 513 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Background 513 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Precautions 513 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PDB removal 514 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PDB installation 515 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AIB removal 515 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AIB installation 516 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing the BSU digital cage 517 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 517 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Prerequisites 517 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the cage 519 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the cage 521 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fan replacement procedure 523 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose 523 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure 1 523 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure 2 524 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GSM-100-030
29 Aug 1997 xviii
GMR-04
68P02901W38-O
Index I1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GSM-100-030 Issue status of this manual
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W38-O
GMR-04
1
Issue status of this manual
Introduction
The following shows the issue status of this manual since it was first released.
Version
information
The following lists the versions of this manual in order of manual issue:
Manual
issue
Date of issue Remarks
O 29 Aug 1997 Original issue
Resolution of
Service Requests
The following Service Requests are now resolved in this manual:
Service
Request
GMR
Number
Remarks
N/A
GSM-100-030 General information
29 Aug 1997 2
GMR-04
68P02901W38-O
General information
Important notice
If this manual was obtained when you attended a Motorola training course, it will not be
updated or amended by Motorola. It is intended for TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY. If it
was supplied under normal operational circumstances, to support a major software
release, then corrections will be supplied automatically by Motorola in the form of
General Manual Revisions (GMRs).
Purpose
Motorola Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) manuals are intended to
instruct and assist personnel in the operation, installation and maintenance of the
Motorola GSM equipment and ancillary devices. It is recommended that all personnel
engaged in such activities be properly trained by Motorola.
Failure to comply with Motorolas operation, installation and maintenance
instructions may, in exceptional circumstances, lead to serious injury or death.
WARNING
These manuals are not intended to replace the system and equipment training offered by
Motorola, although they can be used to supplement and enhance the knowledge gained
through such training.
About this
manual
The manual contains information about the base station system control (BSSC) cabinet
and remote transcoder (RXCDR). This issue includes details of hardware modules
introduced for use in the later BSC2/RXCDR2 cabinet, but which may also be used in the
BSSC/RXCDR cabinet.
GSM-100-030 General information
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W38-O
GMR-04
3
Cross references
Throughout this manual, cross references are made to the chapter numbers and section
names. The section name cross references are printed bold in text.
This manual is divided into uniquely identified and numbered chapters that, in turn, are
divided into sections. Sections are not numbered, but are individually named at the top of
each page, and are listed in the table of contents.
Text conventions
The following conventions are used in the Motorola GSM manuals to represent keyboard
input text, screen output text and special key sequences.
Input
Characters typed in at the keyboard are shown like this.
Output
Messages, prompts, file listings, directories, utilities, and environmental
variables that appear on the screen are shown like this.
Special key sequences
Special key sequences are represented as follows:
CTRLc Press the Control and c keys at the same time.
ALTf Press the Alt and f keys at the same time.
| Press the pipe symbol key.
CR or RETURN Press the Return (Enter) key. The Return key is identi-
fied with the symbol on both the X terminal and the
SPARCstation keyboards. The SPARCstation keyboard
Return key is also identified with the word Return.
GSM-100-030 First aid in case of electric shock
29 Aug 1997 4
GMR-04
68P02901W38-O
First aid in case of electric shock
Warning
Do not touch the victim with your bare hands until the electric circuit is
broken.
Switch off. If this is not possible, protect yourself with dry insulating
material and pull or push the victim clear of the conductor.
WARNING
Artificial
respiration
In the event of an electric shock it may be necessary to carry out artificial respiration.
Send for medical assistance immediately.
Burns treatment
If the patient is also suffering from burns, then, without hindrance to artificial respiration,
carry out the following:
1. Do not attempt to remove clothing adhering to the burn.
2. If help is available, or as soon as artificial respiration is no longer required, cover
the wound with a dry dressing.
3. Do not apply oil or grease in any form.
GSM-100-030 Reporting safety issues
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W38-O
GMR-04
5
Reporting safety issues
Introduction
Whenever a safety issue arises, carry out the following procedure in all instances.
Ensure that all site personnel are familiar with this procedure.
Procedure
Whenever a safety issue arises:
1. Make the equipment concerned safe, for example, by removing power.
2. Make no further attempt to tamper with the equipment.
3. Report the problem directly to GSM Customer Network Resolution Centre
+44 (0)1793 565444 (telephone) and follow up with a written report by fax
+44 (0)1793 430987 (fax).
4. Collect evidence from the equipment under the guidance of the Customer Network
Resolution Centre.
GSM-100-030 Warnings and cautions
29 Aug 1997 6
GMR-04
68P02901W38-O
Warnings and cautions
Introduction
The following describes how warnings and cautions are used in this manual and in all
manuals of the Motorola GSM manual set.
Warnings
Definition
A warning is used to alert the reader to possible hazards that could cause loss of life,
physical injury, or ill health. This includes hazards introduced during maintenance, for
example, the use of adhesives and solvents, as well as those inherent in the equipment.
Example and format
Do not look directly into fibre optic cables or optical data in/out connectors.
Laser radiation can come from either the data in/out connectors or
unterminated fibre optic cables connected to data in/out connectors.
WARNING
Cautions
Definition
A caution means that there is a possibility of damage to systems, or individual items of
equipment within a system. However, this presents no danger to personnel.
Example and format
Do not use test equipment that is beyond its calibration due date when testing
Motorola base stations.
CAUTION
GSM-100-030 General warnings
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W38-O
GMR-04
7
General warnings
Introduction
Observe the following warnings during all phases of operation, installation and
maintenance of the equipment described in the Motorola GSM manuals. Failure to
comply with these warnings, or with specific warnings elsewhere in the Motorola GSM
manuals, violates safety standards of design, manufacture and intended use of the
equipment. Motorola assumes no liability for the customers failure to comply with these
requirements.
Warning labels
Personnel working with or operating Motorola equipment must comply with any warning
labels fitted to the equipment. Warning labels must not be removed, painted over or
obscured in any way.
Specific
warnings
Warnings particularly applicable to the equipment are positioned on the equipment and
within the text of this manual. These must be observed by all personnel at all times when
working with the equipment, as must any other warnings given in text, on the illustrations
and on the equipment.
High voltage
Certain Motorola equipment operates from a dangerous high voltage of 230 V ac single
phase or 415 V ac three phase supply which is potentially lethal. Therefore, the areas
where the ac supply power is present must not be approached until the warnings and
cautions in the text and on the equipment have been complied with.
To achieve isolation of the equipment from the ac supply, the ac input isolator must be
set to off and locked.
Within the United Kingdom (UK) regard must be paid to the requirements of the
Electricity at Work Regulations 1989. There may also be specific country legislation
which need to be complied with, depending on where the equipment is used.
RF radiation
High RF potentials and electromagnetic fields are present in the base station equipment
when in operation. Ensure that all transmitters are switched off when any antenna
connections have to be changed. Do not key transmitters connected to unterminated
cavities or feeders.
Refer to the following standards:
S ANSI IEEE C95.1-1991, IEEE Standard for Safety Levels with Respect to Human
Exposure to Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Fields, 3kHz to 300GHz.
S CENELEC 95 ENV 50166-2, Human Exposure to Electromagnetic Fields High
Frequency (10kHz to 300GHz).
Laser radiation
Do not look directly into fibre optic cables or optical data in/out connectors. Laser
radiation can come from either the data in/out connectors or unterminated fibre optic
cables connected to data in/out connectors.
GSM-100-030 General warnings
29 Aug 1997 8
GMR-04
68P02901W38-O
Lifting
equipment
When dismantling heavy assemblies, or removing or replacing equipment, the competent
responsible person must ensure that adequate lifting facilities are available. Where
provided, lifting frames must be used for these operations. When equipments have to be
manhandled, reference must be made to the Manual Handling of Loads Regulations
1992 (UK) or to the relevant manual handling of loads legislation for the country in which
the equipment is used.
Do not ...
... substitute parts or modify equipment.
Because of the danger of introducing additional hazards, do not install substitute parts or
perform any unauthorized modification of equipment. Contact Motorola if in doubt to
ensure that safety features are maintained.
Battery supplies
Do not wear earth straps when working with standby battery supplies.
Toxic material
Certain Motorola equipment incorporates components containing the highly toxic material
Beryllium or its oxide Beryllia or both. These materials are especially hazardous if:
S Beryllium materials are absorbed into the body tissues through the skin, mouth, or
a wound.
S The dust created by breakage of Beryllia is inhaled.
S Toxic fumes are inhaled from Beryllium or Beryllia involved in a fire.
See the Beryllium health and safety precautions section for further information.
GSM-100-030 Human exposure to radio frequency energy (PCS1900 only)
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W38-O
GMR-04
9
Human exposure to radio frequency energy (PCS1900 only)
Introduction
This equipment is designed to generate and radiate radio frequency (RF) energy. It
should be installed and maintained only by trained technicians. Licensees of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) using this equipment are responsible for insuring
that its installation and operation comply with FCC regulations designed to limit human
exposure to RF radiation in accordance with the American National Standards Institute
IEEE Standard C95.1-1991, IEEE Standard for Safety Levels with Respect to Human
Exposure to Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Fields, 3kHz to 300GHz.
Definitions
This standard establishes two sets of maximum permitted exposure limits, one for
controlled environments and another, that allows less exposure, for uncontrolled
environments. These terms are defined by the standard, as follows:
Uncontrolled environment
Uncontrolled environments are locations where there is the exposure of individuals who
have no knowledge or control of their exposure. The exposures may occur in living
quarters or workplaces where there are no expectations that the exposure levels may
exceed those shown for uncontrolled environments in the table of maximum permitted
exposure ceilings.
Controlled environment
Controlled environments are locations where there is exposure that may be incurred by
persons who are aware of the potential for exposure as a concomitant of employment, by
other cognizant persons, or as the incidental result of transient passage through areas
where analysis shows the exposure levels may be above those shown for uncontrolled
environments but do not exceed the values shown for controlled environments in the
table of maximum permitted exposure ceilings.
Maximum
permitted
exposures
The maximum permitted exposures prescribed by the standard are set in terms of
different parameters of effects, depending on the frequency generated by the equipment
in question. At the frequency range of this Personal Communication System equipment,
1930-1970MHz, the maximum permitted exposure levels are set in terms of power
density, whose definition and relationship to electric field and magnetic field strengths are
described by the standard as follows:
Power density (S)
Power per unit area normal to the direction of propagation, usually expressed in units of
watts per square metre (W/m
2
) or, for convenience, units such as milliwatts per square
centimetre (mW/cm
2
). For plane waves, power density, electric field strength (E) and
magnetic field strength (H) are related by the impedance of free space, 377 ohms. In
particular,
S +
E
2
377
+377 H
2
where E and H are expressed in units of V/m and A/m, respectively, and S in units of
W/m
2
. Although many survey instruments indicate power density units, the actual
quantities measured are E or E
2
or H or H
2
.
29 Aug 1997 10
GMR-04
68P02901W38-O
Maximum
permitted
exposure
ceilings
Within the frequency range, the maximum permitted exposure ceiling for uncontrolled
environments is a power density (mW/cm
2
) that equals f/1500, where f is the frequency
expressed in MHz, and measurements are averaged over a period of 30 minutes. The
maximum permitted exposure ceiling for controlled environments, also expressed in
mW/cm
2
, is f/300 where measurements are averaged over 6 minutes. Applying these
principles to the minimum and maximum frequencies for which this equipment is intended
to be used yields the following maximum permitted exposure levels:
Uncontrolled Environment Controlled Environment
1930MHz 1970MHz 1930MHz 1970MHz
Ceiling 1.287mW/cm
2
1.313mW/cm
2
6.433mW/cm
2
6.567mW/cm
2
If you plan to operate the equipment at more than one frequency, compliance should be
assured at the frequency which produces the lowest exposure ceiling (among the
frequencies at which operation will occur).
Licensees must be able to certify to the FCC that their facilities meet the above ceilings.
Some lower power PCS devices, 100 milliwatts or less, are excluded from demonstrating
compliance, but this equipment operates at power levels orders of magnitude higher, and
the exclusion is not applicable.
Whether a given installation meets the maximum permitted exposure ceilings depends, in
part, upon antenna type, antenna placement and the output power to which this
equipment is adjusted. The following example sets forth the distances from the antenna
to which access should be prevented in order to comply with the uncontrolled and
controlled environment exposure limits as set forth in the ANSI IEEE standards and
computed above.
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W38-O
GMR-04
11
Example
calculation
For a base station with the following characteristics, what is the minimum distance from
the antenna necessary to meet the requirements of an uncontrolled environment?
Transmit frequency: 1930 MHz
Base station cabinet output power, P: +39.0 dBm (8 watts)
Antenna feeder cable loss, CL: 2.0 dB
Antenna input power Pin: PCL = +39.02.0 = +37.0 dB (5watts)
Antenna gain, G: 16.4 dBi (43.65)
Using the following relationship:
G +
4pr
2
W
Pin
Where W is the maximum permissible power density in W/m
2
and r is the safe distance
from the antenna in metres, the desired distance can be calculated as follows:
r +
GPin
4pW
+
43.65 5
4p 12.87
+1.16m
where W = 12.87 W/m
2
was obtained from table listed above and converting from
mW/cm
2
to W/m
2
.
The above result applies only in the direction of maximum radiation of the
antenna. Actual installations may employ antennas that have defined radiation
patterns and gains that differ from the example set forth above. The distances
calculated can vary depending on the actual antenna pattern and gain.
NOTE
Power density
measurements
While installation calculations such as the above are useful and essential in planning and
design, validation that the operating facility using this equipment actually complies will
require making power density measurements. For information on measuring RF fields for
determining compliance with ANSI IEEE C95.1-1991, see IEEE Recommended Practice
for the Measure of Potentially Hazardous Electromagnetic Fields - RF and Microwave,
IEEE Std C95.3-1991. Copies of IEEE C95.1-1991 and IEEE C95.3-1991 may be
purchased from the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc., Attn:
Publication Sales, 445 Hoes Lane, P.O. Box 1331, Piscattaway, NJ 08855-1331,
(800) 678-IEEE or from ANSI, (212) 642-4900. Persons responsible for installation of this
equipment are urged to consult these standards in determining whether a given
installation complies with the applicable limits.
Other equipment
Whether a given installation meets ANSI standards for human exposure to radio
frequency radiation may depend not only on this equipment but also on whether the
environments being assessed are being affected by radio frequency fields from other
equipment, the effects of which may add to the level of exposure. Accordingly, the overall
exposure may be affected by radio frequency generating facilities that exist at the time
the licensees equipment is being installed or even by equipment installed later.
Therefore, the effects of any such facilities must be considered in site selection and in
determining whether a particular installation meets the FCC requirements.
GSM-100-030 Beryllium health and safety precautions
29 Aug 1997 12
GMR-04
68P02901W38-O
Beryllium health and safety precautions
Introduction
Beryllium (Be), is a hard silver/white metal. It is stable in air, but burns brilliantly in
Oxygen.
With the exception of the naturally occurring Beryl ore (Beryllium Silicate), all Beryllium
compounds and Beryllium metal are potentially highly toxic.
Health issues
Beryllium Oxide is used within some components as an electrical insulator. Captive within
the component it presents no health risk whatsoever. However, if the component should
be broken open and the Beryllium Oxide, which is in the form of dust, released, there
exists the potential for harm.
Inhalation
Inhalation of Beryllium Oxide can lead to a condition known as Berylliosis, the symptoms
of Berylliosis are similar to Pneumonia and may be identified by all or any of the
following:
Mild poisoning causes fever, shortness of breath, and a cough that produces
yellow/green sputum, or occasionally bloodstained sputum. Inflammation of the mucous
membranes of the nose, throat, and chest with discomfort, possibly pain, and difficulty
with swallowing and breathing.
Severe poisoning causes chest pain and wheezing which may progress to severe
shortness of breath due to congestion of the lungs. Incubation period for lung symptoms
is 2-20 days.
Exposure to moderately high concentrations of Beryllium in air may produce a very
serious condition of the lungs. The injured person may become blue, feverish with rapid
breathing and raised pulse rate. Recovery is usual but may take several months. There
have been deaths in the acute stage.
Chronic response. This condition is more truly a general one although the lungs are
mainly affected. There may be lesions in the kidneys and the skin. Certain features
support the view that the condition is allergic. There is no relationship between the
degree of exposure and the severity of response and there is usually a time lag of up to
10 years between exposure and the onset of the illness. Both sexes are equally
susceptible. The onset of the illness is insidious but only a small number of exposed
persons develop this reaction.
First aid
Seek immediate medical assistance. The casualty should be removed immediately from
the exposure area and placed in a fresh air environment with breathing supported with
Oxygen where required. Any contaminated clothing should be removed. The casualty
should be kept warm and at rest until medical aid arrives.
GSM-100-030 Beryllium health and safety precautions
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W38-O
GMR-04
13
Skin contact
Possible irritation and redness at the contact area. Persistent itching and blister
formations can occur which usually resolve on removal from exposure.
First aid
Wash area thoroughly with soap and water. If skin is broken seek immediate medical
assistance.
Eye contact
May cause severe irritation, redness and swelling of eyelid(s) and inflammation of the
mucous membranes of the eyes.
First aid
Flush eyes with running water for at least 15 minutes. Seek medical assistance as soon
as possible.
Handling
procedures
Removal of components from printed circuit boards (PCBs) is to take place only at
Motorola approved repair centres.
The removal station will be equipped with extraction equipment and all other protective
equipment necessary for the safe removal of components containing Beryllium Oxide.
If during removal a component is accidently opened, the Beryllium Oxide dust is to be
wetted into a paste and put into a container with a spatula or similar tool. The spatula/tool
used to collect the paste is also to be placed in the container. The container is then to be
sealed and labelled. A suitable respirator is to be worn at all times during this operation.
Components which are successfully removed are to be placed in a separate bag, sealed
and labelled.
Disposal
methods
Beryllium Oxide or components containing Beryllium Oxide are to be treated as
hazardous waste. All components must be removed where possible from boards and put
into sealed bags labelled Beryllium Oxide components. These bags must be given to the
safety and environmental adviser for disposal.
Under no circumstances are boards or components containing Beryllium Oxide to be put
into the general waste skips or incinerated.
Product life cycle
implications
Motorola GSM and analogue equipment includes components containing Beryllium Oxide
(identified in text as appropriate and indicated by warning labels on the equipment).
These components require specific disposal measures as indicated in the preceding
(Disposal methods) paragraph. Motorola will arrange for the disposal of all such
hazardous waste as part of its Total Customer Satisfaction philosophy and will arrange
for the most environmentally friendly disposal available at that time.
GSM-100-030 General cautions
29 Aug 1997 14
GMR-04
68P02901W38-O
General cautions
Introduction
Observe the following cautions during operation, installation and maintenance of the
equipment described in the Motorola GSM manuals. Failure to comply with these
cautions or with specific cautions elsewhere in the Motorola GSM manuals may result in
damage to the equipment. Motorola assumes no liability for the customers failure to
comply with these requirements.
Caution labels
Personnel working with or operating Motorola equipment must comply with any caution
labels fitted to the equipment. Caution labels must not be removed, painted over or
obscured in any way.
Specific cautions
Cautions particularly applicable to the equipment are positioned within the text of this
manual. These must be observed by all personnel at all times when working with the
equipment, as must any other cautions given in text, on the illustrations and on the
equipment.
Fibre optics
The bending radius of all fibre optic cables must not be less than 30 mm.
Static discharge
Motorola equipment contains CMOS devices that are vulnerable to static discharge.
Although the damage caused by static discharge may not be immediately apparent,
CMOS devices may be damaged in the long term due to static discharge caused by
mishandling. Wear an approved earth strap when adjusting or handling digital boards.
See Devices sensitive to static for further information.
GSM-100-030 Devices sensitive to static
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W38-O
GMR-04
15
Devices sensitive to static
Introduction
Certain metal oxide semiconductor (MOS) devices embody in their design a thin layer of
insulation that is susceptible to damage from electrostatic charge. Such a charge applied
to the leads of the device could cause irreparable damage.
These charges can be built up on nylon overalls, by friction, by pushing the hands into
high insulation packing material or by use of unearthed soldering irons.
MOS devices are normally despatched from the manufacturers with the leads shorted
together, for example, by metal foil eyelets, wire strapping, or by inserting the leads into
conductive plastic foam. Provided the leads are shorted it is safe to handle the device.
Special handling
techniques
In the event of one of these devices having to be replaced observe the following
precautions when handling the replacement:
S Always wear an earth strap which must be connected to the electrostatic point
(ESP) on the equipment.
S Leave the short circuit on the leads until the last moment. It may be necessary to
replace the conductive foam by a piece of wire to enable the device to be fitted.
S Do not wear outer clothing made of nylon or similar man made material. A cotton
overall is preferable.
S If possible work on an earthed metal surface. Wipe insulated plastic work surfaces
with an anti-static cloth before starting the operation.
S All metal tools should be used and when not in use they should be placed on an
earthed surface.
S Take care when removing components connected to electrostatic sensitive
devices. These components may be providing protection to the device.
When mounted onto printed circuit boards (PCBs), MOS devices are normally less
susceptible to electrostatic damage. However PCBs should be handled with care,
preferably by their edges and not by their tracks and pins, they should be transferred
directly from their packing to the equipment (or the other way around) and never left
exposed on the workbench.
GSM-100-030 Motorola GSM manual set
29 Aug 1997 16
GMR-04
68P02901W38-O
Motorola GSM manual set
Introduction
The following manuals provide the information needed to operate, install and maintain the
Motorola GSM and GSM Packet Radio Service (GPRS) equipment.
Generic GSM
manuals
The following are the generic manuals in the GSM manual set, these manuals are
release dependent:
Classification
number Name Order number
GSM-100-101 System Information: General 68P02901W01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GSM-100-201 Operating Information: GSM System Operation 68P02901W14 . . .
GSM-100-202 Operating Information: OMC-R System
Administration 68P02901W19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GSM-100-311 Technical Description: OMC-R in a GSM System 68P02901W31 . .
GSM-100-313 Technical Description: OMC-R Database Schema 68P02901W34 .
GSM-100-320 Technical Description: BSS Implementation 68P02901W36 . . . . . . .
GSM-100-321 Technical Description: BSS Command Reference 68P02901W23 .
GSM-100-403 Installation & Configuration: GSM System
Configuration 68P02901W17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GSM-100-423 Installation & Configuration: BSS Optimization 68P02901W43 . . . .
GSM-100-413 Installation & Configuration: OMC-R Clean Install 68P02901W47 . .
GSM-100-501 Maintenance Information: Alarm Handling at
the OMC-R 68P02901W26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GSM-100-520 Maintenance Information: BSS Timers 68P02901W58 . . . . . . . . . . .
GSM-100-521 Maintenance Information: Device State Transitions 68P02901W57
GSM-100-523 Maintenance Information: BSS Field
Troubleshooting 68P02901W51 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GSM-100-503 Maintenance Information: GSM Statistics
Application 68P02901W56 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GSM-100-721 Software Release Notes: BSS/RXCDR 68P02901W72 . . . . . . . . . .
GSM-100-712 Software Release Notes: OMC-R System 68P02901W74 . . . . . . . .
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W38-O
GMR-04
17
Related GSM
manuals
The following are related Motorola GSM manuals:
Classification
GSM-001-103 System Information: BSS Equipment Planning 68P02900W21 . . . .
GSM-002-103 System Information: DataGen 68P02900W22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GSM-002-703 Software Release Notes: DataGen 68P02900W76 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GSM-005-103 System Information: GSM Advance Operational
Impact 68P02900W25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GSM-008-103 System Information: Network Health Analyst 68P02900W36 . . . . . .
GSM-008-703 Software Release Notes: Network Health Analyst 68P02900W77 .
GSM-TOOLS-001 System Information: Cell Optimization (COP) 68P02900W90 . . . . .
GSM-TOOLS-002 System Information: Motorola Analysis and
Reporting System (MARS) 68P02900W94 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GSM-TOOLS-701 Software Release Notes: Cell Optimization (COP) 68P02900W69 .
GSM-TOOLS-702 Software Release Notes: Motorola Analysis and
Reporting System (MARS) 68P02900W68 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GSM-006-202 Operating Information: OMC-R System
Administration (OSI) 68P02901W10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GSM-006-413 Installation & Configuration: OSI Clean Install 68P02901W39 . . . . .
GSM-006-712 Software Release Notes: OMC-R OSI System 68P02901W70 . . . .
Generic GPRS
manuals
The following are the generic manuals in the GPRS manual set, these manuals are
release dependent:
Classification
GPRS-300-101 System Information: GPRS Overview 68P02903W01 . . . . . . . . . . . .
GPRS-300-202 Operating Information: OMC-G System
Administration 68P02903W03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GPRS-300-222 Operating Information: GSN System Administration 68P02903W37
GPRS-300-311 Technical Description: OMC-G in a GPRS System 68P02903W29 .
GPRS-300-313 Technical Description: OMC-G Database Schema 68P02903W46 .
GPRS-300-321 Technical Description: GSN Command Reference 68P02903W18 .
GPRS-300-423 Installation & Configuration: GSN Clean Install 68P02903W47 . . . .
GPRS-300-413 Installation & Configuration: OMC-G Clean Install 68P02903W04 .
GPRS-300-501 Maintenance Information: Alarm Handling at
the OMC-G 68P02903W19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GPRS-300-503 Maintenance Information: GSN Statistics
Application 68P02903W20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GPRS-300-722 Software Release Notes: GSN System 68P02903W76 . . . . . . . . . .
GPRS-300-712 Software Release Notes: OMC-G System 68P02903W70 . . . . . . . .
Related GPRS
manuals
The following are related Motorola GPRS manuals:
GPRS-001-103 System Information: GPRS Equipment Planning 68P02903W02 . .
GPRS-005-103 System Information: GSN Advance Operational
Impact 68P02903W38 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
29 Aug 1997 18
GMR-04
68P02901W38-O
BSS service
manuals
The following are the Motorola Base Station service manuals, these manuals are not
release dependent. The internal organization and makeup of service manual sets may
vary, they may consist of from one to four separate manuals, but they can all be ordered
using the overall catalogue number shown below:
Classification
GSM-100-020 Service Manual: BTS 68P02901W37 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GSM-100-030 Service Manual: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W38 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GSM-105-020 Service Manual: M-Cell2 68P02901W75 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GSM-106-020 Service Manual: M-Cell6 68P02901W85 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GSM-201-020 Service Manual: M-Cellcity and M-Cellcity+ 68P02901W95 . . . . . . .
GSM-202-020 Service Manual: M-Cellaccess 68P02901W65 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GSM-203-020 Service Manual: Horizonmicro 68P02902W36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GSM-206-020 Service Manual: Horizoncompact 68P02902W15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GSM-205-020 Service Manual: Horizonmacro Indoor 68P02902W06 . . . . . . . . . . .
GSM-204-020 Service Manual: Horizonmacro Outdoor 68P02902W12 . . . . . . . . . .
GSM-207-020 Service Manual: Horizonoffice 68P02902W46 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GSM-209-020 Service Manual: Horizonmicro2 Horizoncompact2 68P02902W61 .
GSM-208-020 Service Manual: Horizonmacro 12 Carrier Outdoor 68P02902W66
GSM-101-SERIES ExCell4 Documentation Set 68P02900W50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GSM-103-SERIES ExCell6 Documentation Set 68P02900W70 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GSM-102-SERIES TopCell Documentation Set (GSM900) 68P02901W80 . . . . . . . . . . .
GSM-104-SERIES TopCell Documentation Set (DCS1800) 68P02902W80 . . . . . . . . . .
GSM-200-SERIES M-Cellmicro Documentation Set 68P02901W90 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GPRS service
manuals
The following are the Motorola GPRS service manuals, these manuals include the
Packet Control Unit (PCU) service manual which becomes part of the BSS for GPRS:
Classification
GPRS-301-020 Service Manual:GPRS Support Nodes (GSN) 68P02903W05 . . . . .
GPRS-302-020 Service Manual: Packet Control Unit (PCU) 68P02903W10 . . . . . . .
Classification
number
The classification number is used to identify the type and level of a manual. For example,
manuals with the classification number GSM-100-2xx contain operating information.
Order number
The Motorola 68P order (catalogue) number is used to order manuals.
Ordering
manuals
All orders for Motorola manuals must be placed with your Motorola Local Office or
Representative. Manuals are ordered using the order (catalogue) number. Remember,
specify the manual issue required by quoting the correct suffix letter.
GSM-100-030 GMR amendment
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W38-O
GMR-04
19
GMR amendment
Introduction to
GMRs
Changes to a manual that occur after the printing date are incorporated into the manual
using General Manual Revisions (GMRs). GMRs are issued to correct Motorola manuals
as and when required. A GMR has the same identity as the target manual. Each GMR is
identified by a number in a sequence that starts at 01 for each manual at each issue.
GMRs are issued in the form of loose leaf pages, with a pink instruction sheet on the
front.
GMR procedure
When a GMR is received, check on the GMR amendment record page of this manual
that previous GMRs, if any, have been incorporated. If not, contact your administrator or
Motorola Local Office to obtain the missing GMRs. Remove and replace pages in this
manual, as detailed on the GMR pink instruction sheet.
GSM-100-030 GMR amendment record
29 Aug 1997 20
GMR-04
68P02901W38-O
GMR amendment record
Instructions
When a GMR is inserted in this manual, the amendment record below must be filled in to
record the insertion. Retain the pink instruction sheet that accompanies each GMR and
insert it in a suitable place in this manual for future reference.
Amendment
record
Record the insertion of GMRs in this manual in the following table:
GMR number Incorporated by (signature) Date
01 Incorporated 17 Dec 1997
02 Incorporated 10 Aug 2001
03 Incorporated 31 Aug 2002
04 Incorporated (this GMR) 29 Aug 2003
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
C
H
A
P
T
E
R

2
S
P
E
C
I
F
I
C
A
T
I
O
N
C
H
A
P
T
E
R

1

I
N
T
R
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
N
29 Aug 1997
System Information: BSC/RXCDR
68P02901W06-O
GMR-04
i
Category 131
System Information
GSM-100-131
29 Aug 1997
ii
GMR-04
68P02901W06-O
GSM-100-131
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W06-O
GMR-04
iii
Category 131
System Information i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 1
Introduction i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cabinet types 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Location 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Equipment 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
External view 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Internal view 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Internal units 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 2
Specification i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specification 21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Environment 21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions 21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Weights 21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Back-up power 22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GSM-100-131
29 Aug 1997
iv
GMR-04
68P02901W06-O
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W06-O
GMR-04
i
Chapter 1
Introduction
GSM-100-131
29 Aug 1997
ii
GMR-04
68P02901W06-O
GSM-100-131
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W06-O
GMR-04
iii
Chapter 1
Introduction i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cabinet types 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Location 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Equipment 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
External view 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Internal view 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Internal units 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GSM-100-131
29 Aug 1997
iv
GMR-04
68P02901W06-O
GSM-100-131 Overview
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W06-O
GMR-04
11
Overview
Introduction
This chapter is a mechanical and electrical description of the base station system control
(BSSC) cabinet.
A BSSC cabinet can be configured as:
S A base station controller (BSC) containing digital hardware modules configured to
control the radio subsystem.
S A remote transcoder (RXCDR) containing digital hardware modules configured to
provide an interface between the BSC and mobile switching centre (MSC).
S A combination of the BSC and RXCDR functions.
The difference between the BSC and RXCDR configurations is in the complement of
digital modules on the backplane.
The information in this chapter applies to all three of the above configurations and, unless
otherwise indicated, to GSM, GSM850, extended GSM (EGSM), DCS1800 and
PCS1900 systems.
Cabinet types
The earlier BSSC cabinet is the same as the BSSC2 except in its handling of power
distribution and alarms. The differences are described in the BSSC differences section
of this chapter.
The BSSC and BSSC2 cabinets can be powered by a positive earth (48 V or 60 V) or
negative earth (+27 V) supply. The only difference in the cabinets is the inclusion of fan
power converters in the 48/60 V versions of the BSSC to derive +27 V power for the
cooling fans.
Where the BSSC and BSSC2 are the same, only the BSSC is mentioned.
NOTE
GSM-100-131 BSSC cabinet configuration
29 Aug 1997
12
GMR-04
68P02901W06-O
BSSC cabinet configuration
Configuration
options
BSC configuration
The BSSC cabinet configured as a BSC contains at least one base station unit (BSU)
shelf assembly. This assembly is in the lower portion of the cabinet; the upper portion of
the cabinet can contain a second BSU configured either as a separate BSC or as an
expansion of the BSU on the lower shelf.
Transcoding can be performed at the BSC. In this case, the upper portion of the cabinet
contains a separate transcoder unit (RXU) shelf assembly instead of a second BSU.
The top shelf contains the power distribution unit (PDU) which consists of a distribution
alarm board and a dc circuit breaker panel.
RXCDR configuration
The BSSC2 cabinet configured as an RXCDR contains at least one RXU shelf assembly,
located in the lower portion of the cabinet. A second RXU can be located in the upper
portion of the cabinet. The top shelf contains the PDU, which consists of a distribution
BSU and RXU shelves
Each shelf in a cabinet can be configured as a separate network element.
The BSU and RXU shelf assemblies consist of:
S A backplane.
S Two vertical slot module shelves.
S A three compartment shelf.
The lower portion of the two vertical slot shelves holds 26 full size digital modules in slots
numbered L0 to L28. The upper portion of the shelf holds 28 half size digital modules in
slots numbered U0 to U28.
There are three compartments at the bottom of the BSU/RXU shelf assembly, with
slide-in mountings for power supply modules. The left compartment is for an optional
redundant power supply module.
Location
The BSC can be located at the same site as the radio (collocated). They can also share
the same cabinet. Alternatively, the BSC at one site can control several radio subsystems
at remote sites.
The transcoding function of the BSS can be located either:
S With the BSC.
S Remotely between the BSC and the MSC.
Locating the transcoding function between the BSC and the MSC is the most common
option and is referred to as the RXCDR.
Equipment
The exact digital hardware module equipment in the cabinet depends on the BSS
application. Chapter 2 of this manual contains descriptions of the digital hardware
modules used in the BSSC cabinet.
GSM-100-131 Cabinet description external
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W06-O
GMR-04
13
Cabinet description external
Introduction
This section describes the external appearance of a typical BSSC cabinet.
External view
Figure 1-1 shows an external view of a typical BSSC cabinet:
INTERCONNECT PANEL
INTAKE AIR VENTS
INTAKE AIR VENTS
EXHAUST AIR VENTS
EXHAUST AIR VENTS
DOOR HINGES
Figure 1-1 BSSC cabinet (external view)
29 Aug 1997
14
GMR-04
68P02901W06-O
Dimensions
The cabinet has the following dimensions:
Height 2100mm excluding lifting eyelets
Width 711 mm excluding isolation strips
Depth 416 mm excluding isolation strip
External features
The cabinet door is hinged on the left side of the cabinet, and has four air vents with
grilles:
S Intake vents have air filters.
S Exhaust vents have exhaust fans fitted behind the vents.
All connections to the cabinet are at the interconnect panel, which is on top of the
cabinet. This panel also has feed-through tubes for routeing fibre optic inter-cabinet
cables in and out of the cabinet. All cabinets are RF/EMI shielded.
GSM-100-131 Cabinet description internal
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W06-O
GMR-04
15
Cabinet description internal
Introduction
This section describes the internal appearance of a typical BSSC cabinet.
Internal view
Figure 1-2 shows an internal view of a typical BSSC cabinet:
FANS
POWER SUPPLY
MODULES
POWER SUPPLY
MODULES
POWER
DISTRIBUTION UNIT
(PDU)
HALF-SIZE DIGITAL
BOARD SHELF
HALF-SIZE DIGITAL
BOARD SHELF
FULL-SIZE DIGITAL
BOARD SHELF
FULL-SIZE DIGITAL
BOARD SHELF
EXTERIOR DOORS REMOVED TO SHOW DETAIL
Figure 1-2 BSSC cabinet (internal view)
29 Aug 1997
16
GMR-04
68P02901W06-O
Internal units
As shown in Figure 1-2, the BSSC can contain two card cages, each with one full-size
and one half-size digital board shelf. A card cage can contain either a BSU or an RXU.
All cabinets contain a power distribution unit PDU and a fan cooling system.
Card cages are equipped according to the required function of the cabinet, as shown in
the Table 1-1:
Table 1-1 Cabinet type cage equippage
Cabinet type BSU RXU PDU Fans
BSC Lower card cage
p p
RXCDR Lower card cage
p p
Combined
BSC and
RXCDR
Lower card cage Upper card cage p p
The upper card cage of a BSC or RXCDR can be used to increase capacity by fitting a
second BSU or RXU as appropriate.
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W06-O
GMR-04
i
Chapter 2
Specification
GSM-100-131
29 Aug 1997
ii
GMR-04
68P02901W06-O
GSM-100-131
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W06-O
GMR-04
iii
Chapter 2
Specification i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specification 21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Environment 21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions 21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Weights 21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Back-up power 22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GSM-100-131
29 Aug 1997
iv
GMR-04
68P02901W06-O
GSM-100-131 Specification
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W06-O
GMR-04
21
Specification
Overview
The BSSC cabinet specifications, including frequency band characteristics are tabulated
in this chapter.
Environment
The environmental limits are shown in Table 2-1.
Table 2-1 Environmental limits
Environment Temperature Humidity
Operating 5 _C to +45 _C 5% to 95% non-condensing
Storage 45 _C to +70 _C 8% to 100% non-condensing
Dimensions
The dimensions are shown in Table 2-2.
Table 2-2 Dimensions
Height Width Depth
BSSC 2100 mm 711 mm 416 mm
Weights
The weight figures are shown in Table 2-3.
Table 2-3 Weights
Weight Weight
BSSC 136 kg (unequipped) 230 kg (with two BSU cages)
Power
consumption
Maximum power consumption figures are theoretical values derived under
extreme conditions and are affected by variables such as temperature,
component tolerances, transmission power and supply voltage. Although these
figures must be considered when planning site power requirements, typical
measured consumption values will be lower.
NOTE
Table 2-4 shows the nominal and maximum power consumption figures for the cabinet.
Table 2-4 BSSC cabinet power consumption
Ambient temperature Nominal power
consumption
Maximum power
consumption
0 to +50 C 1500 W 2400 W
GSM-100-131 Power requirements
29 Aug 1997
22
GMR-04
68P02901W06-O
Power requirements
Introduction
BSSC cabinets can operate from either positive or negative earth supplies (determined
by customer request and configured during initial build) at various voltages.
Positive earth
BSSC cabinets
Positive earth BSSC cabinets operate from a 48 V or 60 V dc supply. The maximum
power requirements are:
S (48 V) = 50 A.
S (60 V) = 40 A.
Negative earth
BSSC cabinets
Negative earth BSSC cabinets operate from a nominal +27 V dc (+3 V, 5 V dc) supply.
The maximum power requirement is:
S (+27 V) = 90 A.
Back-up power
BSSC cabinets can be connected to an external battery to provide a dc input power
back-up for dynamic random access memory (DRAM) devices.
The DRAM backup maximum power requirement for each cabinet is:
S 4 A (maximum) at +27 V dc.
An adequate means of routeing cables from the power source to the
equipment, for example a cable trough, must be provided (BS 7671 Reference
Method 11).
NOTE
Overcurrent
protection
The cabinet overcurrent protection device can be:
S a fuse conforming to BS88 (IEC 51-3).
S a main circuit breaker conforming to BS EN 60898 (IEC 898).
The device must be of the following rating:
S +27 V cabinets: 100 A.
S 48 V cabinets: 63 A.
C
H
A
P
T
E
R

2
D
I
G
I
T
A
L

M
O
D
U
L
E
S
C
H
A
P
T
E
R

3
P
O
W
E
R
/
F
A
N
/
C
O
N
N
E
C
T
I
O
N
S
C
H
A
P
T
E
R

1

G
E
N
E
R
A
L

I
N
F
O
R
M
A
T
I
O
N
29 Aug 1997
Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR
68P02901W07-O
GMR-04
i
Category 333
Technical Description
GSM-100-333
29 Aug 1997
ii
GMR-04
68P02901W07-O
GSM-100-333
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W07-O
GMR-04
iii
Category 333
Technical Description i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 1
Overview 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cabinet types 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Location 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Equipment 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
External view 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Internal view 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Internal units 17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BSC numbering 18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BSU shelf 19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shelf module fit 110 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ventilation 112 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 113 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RXU numbering 113 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RXU shelf 114 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shelf module fit 115 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ventilation 117 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 118 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 118 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input power 118 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 119 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Location 119 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Requirements 119 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 120 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Panel layout 120 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connectors 121 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 122 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BSSC labels 122 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GSM-100-333
29 Aug 1997
iv
GMR-04
68P02901W07-O
Overview 124 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 127 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagram 1 128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagram 2 129 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagram 3 130 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagram 4 131 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 132 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Types of PDU 132 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PDB 132 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AIB 132 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAB 132 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 133 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagram 1 134 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagram 2 135 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 136 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagram 1 137 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 2
Overview 21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
In this chapter 21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BSU shelf 22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RXU shelf 23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 27 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The modules 27 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BTC 28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose 28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Requirements 28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BTC module 28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DSW2 29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose 29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Local highway 211 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Slot position 215 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GSM-100-333
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W07-O
GMR-04
v
GCLK 216 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose 216 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Requirements 216 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GCLK module 216 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GCLK diagram 219 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GDP2 220 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose 220 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Requirements 220 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GDP2 module 221 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Architecture 222 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MCU subsystem 223 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DSP subsystem 223 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multiplexer 223 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E1 Line interface 223 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MCAP interface 224 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TDM interface 224 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GDP2 diagram 225 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GPROC 226 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose 226 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Requirements 226 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communication 226 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GPROC module 227 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Memory 227 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Software 228 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GPROC diagram 231 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GPROC2 232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose 232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Requirements 232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GPROC2 module 233 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communication 233 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Memory 233 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Software 234 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GPROC2 diagram 236 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GSM-100-333
29 Aug 1997
vi
GMR-04
68P02901W07-O
KSW 237 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose 237 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Requirements 237 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KSW module 237 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Architecture 238 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Highway monitor 240 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Watchdog timer 240 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interrupt logic 241 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KSW switching 241 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KSW in a BSC 241 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KSW in a RXCDR 241 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KSW diagram 242 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MSI 244 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose 244 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Requirements 244 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MSI module 245 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MSI diagram 248 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MSI-2 249 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose 249 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Requirements 249 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MSI-2 module 250 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MSI-2 diagram 254 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
XCDR 255 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose 255 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Requirements 255 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
XCDR module 256 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Architecture 256 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Processor 257 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DSP 257 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Line interface 258 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switching 258 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MCAP interface 258 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TDM interface 258 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
XCDR diagram 259 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GSM-100-333
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W07-O
GMR-04
vii
GDP 260 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose 260 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Requirements 261 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GDP module 261 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Architecture 262 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MCU subsystem 262 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DSP subsystem 262 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MCAP interface 264 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TDM interface 264 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GDP diagram 265 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 268 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The modules 268 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BBBX 269 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose 269 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Requirements 269 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BBBX module 269 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BBBX diagram 270 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CLKX 271 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose 271 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Requirements 271 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GCLK module 271 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CLKX diagram 272 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DSWX 273 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose 273 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Requirements 273 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DSWX module 274 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KSWX 277 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose 277 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Requirements 277 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KSWX module 278 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KSWX diagram 279 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GSM-100-333
29 Aug 1997
viii
GMR-04
68P02901W07-O
LANX 280 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose 280 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Requirements 280 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LANX module 281 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bus arbiter 283 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Redundant LAN 283 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shelf ID 283 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front panel 283 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LANX diagram 284 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PIX 285 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 285 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Requirements 285 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PIX module 285 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PIX diagram 286 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 3
Overview 31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
In this chapter 31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DPSM 33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DPSM view 33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DPSM diagram 35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EPSM 36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EPSM view 36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EPSM diagram 38 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IPSM 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IPSM view 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IPSM diagram 311 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PDU 312 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 312 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input power 312 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DAB 313 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose 313 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Requirements 313 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DAB diagram 313 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alarm functions 316 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Visual warnings 316 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communications 316 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GSM-100-333
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W07-O
GMR-04
ix
PAB 317 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose 317 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagram 317 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BSSC cabinet 317 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jumpers 319 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alarm functions 319 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Visual warnings 319 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input signals 320 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Serial bus 320 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reset 321 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Timing 321 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Signal routeing 321 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Signal timing 321 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PDB and AIB 322 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 322 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AIB description 322 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AIB view 322 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PDB description 323 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PDB diagram 323 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose 324 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BSSC with PAB 324 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BSSC with PDB/AIB 324 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BSSC2 324 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 325 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power 325 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Location 326 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose 326 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BSSC 327 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BSSC2 328 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Location 329 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose 329 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
T43 diagram 329 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
T43 connectors 330 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Location 331 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose 331 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BIB diagram 331 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BIB connectors 332 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GSM-100-333
29 Aug 1997
x
GMR-04
68P02901W07-O
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W07-O
GMR-04
i
Chapter 1
General Information
GSM-100-333
29 Aug 1997
ii
GMR-04
68P02901W07-O
GSM-100-333
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W07-O
GMR-04
iii
Chapter 1
Overview 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cabinet types 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Location 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Equipment 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
External view 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Internal view 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Internal units 17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BSC numbering 18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BSU shelf 19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shelf module fit 110 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ventilation 112 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 113 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RXU numbering 113 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RXU shelf 114 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shelf module fit 115 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ventilation 117 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 118 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 118 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input power 118 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 119 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Location 119 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Requirements 119 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 120 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Panel layout 120 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connectors 121 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 122 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BSSC labels 122 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 124 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GSM-100-333
29 Aug 1997
iv
GMR-04
68P02901W07-O
Overview 127 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagram 1 128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagram 2 129 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagram 3 130 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagram 4 131 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 132 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Types of PDU 132 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PDB 132 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AIB 132 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAB 132 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 133 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagram 1 134 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagram 2 135 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 136 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagram 1 137 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W07-O
GMR-04
11
Overview
Introduction
This chapter is a mechanical and electrical description of the base station system control
(BSSC) cabinet.
A BSSC cabinet can be configured as:
S A base station controller (BSC) containing digital hardware modules configured to
control the radio subsystem.
S A remote transcoder (RXCDR) containing digital hardware modules configured to
provide an interface between the BSC and mobile switching centre (MSC).
S A combination of the BSC and RXCDR functions.
The difference between the BSC and RXCDR configurations is in the complement of
digital modules on the backplane.
The information in this chapter applies to all three of the above configurations and, unless
otherwise indicated, to GSM, extended GSM (EGSM), DCS1800 and PCS1900 systems.
The BSSC and BSSC2 cabinet are similar, the BSSC2 cabinet is described.
Where there are differences these are described in the text.
NOTE
Cabinet types
The earlier BSSC cabinet is the same as the BSSC2 except in its handling of power
distribution and alarms. The differences are described in the BSSC differences section
of this chapter.
The BSSC and BSSC2 cabinets can be powered by a positive earth (48 V or 60 V) or
negative earth (+27 V) supply (this is requested by the customer and configured during
initial installation). The only difference in the cabinets is the inclusion of fan power
converters in the 48/60 V versions of the BSSC to derive +27 V power for the cooling
fans.
GSM-100-333 BSSC2 cabinet configuration
29 Aug 1997
12
GMR-04
68P02901W07-O
BSSC2 cabinet configuration
Configuration
options
BSC configuration
The BSSC2 cabinet configured as a BSC contains at least one base station unit (BSU)
shelf assembly. This assembly is in the lower portion of the cabinet; the upper portion of
the cabinet can contain a second BSU configured either as a separate BSC or as an
expansion of the BSU on the lower shelf.
Transcoding can be performed at the BSC. In this case, the upper portion of the cabinet
contains a separate transcoder unit (RXU) shelf assembly instead of a second BSU.
The top shelf contains the power distribution unit (PDU) which consists of a distribution
RXCDR configuration
The BSSC2 cabinet configured as an RXCDR contains at least one RXU shelf assembly,
located in the lower portion of the cabinet. A second RXU can be located in the upper
portion of the cabinet. The top shelf contains the PDU, which consists of a distribution
BSU and RXU shelves
Each shelf in a cabinet can be configured as a separate network element.
The BSU and RXU shelf assemblies consist of:
S A backplane.
S Two vertical slot module shelves.
S A three compartment shelf.
The lower portion of the two vertical slot shelves holds 26 full size digital modules in slots
numbered L0 to L28. The upper portion of the shelf holds 28 half size digital modules in
slots numbered U0 to U28.
There are three compartments at the bottom of the BSU/RXU shelf assembly, with
slide-in mountings for power supply modules. The left compartment is for an optional
redundant power supply module.
Location
The BSC can be located at the same site as the radio (collocated). They can also share
the same cabinet. Alternatively, the BSC at one site can control several radio subsystems
at remote sites.
The transcoding function of the BSS can be located either:
S With the BSC.
S Remotely between the BSC and the MSC.
Locating the transcoding function between the BSC and the MSC is the most common
option and is referred to as the RXCDR.
Equipment
The exact digital hardware module equipment in the cabinet depends on the BSS
application. Chapter 2 of this manual contains descriptions of the digital hardware
modules used in the BSSC2 cabinet.
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W07-O
GMR-04
13
Cabinet description external
Introduction
This section describes the external appearance of the BSSC2 cabinet.
External view
Figure 1-1 shows an external view of the BSSC2 cabinet:
INTERCONNECT PANEL
INTAKE AIR VENTS
INTAKE AIR VENTS
EXHAUST AIR VENTS
EXHAUST AIR VENTS
DOOR HINGES
Figure 1-1 BSSC2 cabinet - external view
29 Aug 1997
14
GMR-04
68P02901W07-O
External features
The cabinet door is hinged on the left side of the cabinet, and has four air vents with
grilles:
S Intake vents have air filters.
S Exhaust vents have exhaust fans fitted behind the vents.
All connections to the cabinet are at the interconnect panel, which is on top of the
cabinet. This panel also has feed-through tubes for routeing fibre optic inter-cabinet
cables in and out of the cabinet. All cabinets are RF/EMI shielded.
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W07-O
GMR-04
15
Cabinet description internal
Introduction
This section describes the internal appearance of the BSSC2 cabinet.
29 Aug 1997
16
GMR-04
68P02901W07-O
Internal view
Figure 1-2 shows an internal view of the BSSC2 cabinet:
FANS
POWER SUPPLY
MODULES
POWER SUPPLY
MODULES
POWER
DISTRIBUTION UNIT
(PDU)
HALF-SIZE DIGITAL
BOARD SHELF
HALF-SIZE DIGITAL
BOARD SHELF
FULL-SIZE DIGITAL
BOARD SHELF
FULL-SIZE DIGITAL
BOARD SHELF
EXTERIOR DOORS REMOVED TO SHOW DETAIL
Figure 1-2 BSSC2 cabinet - internal view
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W07-O
GMR-04
17
Internal units
As shown in the internal view on the previous page, the BSSC2 can contain two card
cages, each with one full-size and one half-size digital board shelf. A card cage can
contain either a BSU or an RXU. All cabinets contain a power distribution unit PDU and a
fan cooling system.
Card cages are equipped according to the required function of the cabinet, as shown in
the Table 1-1:
Table 1-1 Cabinet type cage equippage
Cabinet type BSU RXU PDU Fans
BSC Lower card cage
p p
RXCDR Lower card cage
p p
Combined
BSC and
RXCDR
Lower card cage Upper card cage p p
The upper card cage of a BSC or RXCDR can be used to increase capacity by fitting a
second BSU or RXU as appropriate.
GSM-100-333 Base station unit shelf assembly
29 Aug 1997
18
GMR-04
68P02901W07-O
Base station unit shelf assembly
Overview
A base station unit (BSU) shelf assembly consists of:
S A backplane.
S Two vertical-slot module shelves containing the required digital modules:
The upper shelf holds half size digital modules.
The lower shelf holds full size digital modules.
S A three-compartment shelf for the power supply modules.
Every cabinet must be fitted with the following digital cards:
S Two bus termination cards (BTC).
S One local area network extender (LANX) module.
All other digital modules are optional, and their inclusion depends upon the cabinet
configuration.
BSC numbering
In a BSC, BSUs are numbered from 0 forward using the sixteen position
(0 to F hex) rotary switch on the LANX module. This rotary switch sets the BSU LAN
address.
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W07-O
GMR-04
19
BSU shelf
Figure 1-3 shows a base station unit shelf:
AI0
AI1
AI2
MS0
MS1
MS2
MS3
KS1
GK0
KS0
DR5
DR4
DR3
DR2
DR1
DR0
PART OF BSU BACKPLANE
FULL SIZE
MODULES
HALF SIZE
MODULES
BLANKING
PLATE
DPSM, IPSM, OR EPSM
Figure 1-3 BSU shelf
29 Aug 1997
110
GMR-04
68P02901W07-O
Shelf module fit
Table 1-2 shows the module positions in a fully-equipped BSU shelf assembly:
If AMR hardware modules are installed, in Table 1-2, where appropriate:
Read KSW as DSW2
Read XCDR as GDP2
Read GPROC as GPROC3
NOTE
Table 1-2 BSU shelf module positions
Slot Half size modules Slot Full size modules
U0 KSWX
L
L0 BTC
U1 KSWX
L
L1 KSW
U2 KSWX
R
or CLKX L2
U3 KSWX
R
or CLKX L3 GCLK (note 1)
U4 KSWX
R
or CLKX L4
U5 KSWX
R
or CLKX L5 GCLK (note 1)
U6 KSWX
R
or CLKX L6 MSI or XCDR (note 2)
U7 KSWX
R
or CLKX L7 MSI or XCDR (note 2)
U8 KSWX
E
L8 MSI or XCDR (note 2)
U9 KSWX
E
L9 MSI or XCDR (note 2)
U10 Not used in this cabinet L10 MSI or XCDR (note 2)
U16 PIX or BBBX L16 MSI or XCDR (note 2)
U17 PIX or BBBX L17 MSI or XCDR (note 2)
U18 PIX or BBBX L18 GPROC
U19 LANX L19 GPROC
U20 LANX L20 GPROC
U21 KSWX
E
L21 GPROC
U22 KSWX
E
L22 GPROC
U23 KSWX
E
L23 GPROC
U24 KSWX
R
L24 GPROC
U25 KSWX
R
L25 GPROC
U26 KSWX
R
L26 Spare
U27 KSWX
R
L27 KSW
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W07-O
GMR-04
111
U28 KSWX
R
L28 BTC
Notes: 1. GCLK modules take up two slots: L2 and L3, or L4 and L5.
2. Maximum six XCDR modules in any MSI slot positions.
3. GDP modules will use XCDR slot positions.
29 Aug 1997
112
GMR-04
68P02901W07-O
Ventilation
Blanking plates are inserted in all unused full size and power supply module slots to
assist with the correct airflow and ventilation.
Backplane
connectors
Table 1-3 shows the function of each connector fitted at the top of the BSU backplane:
Table 1-3 BSU backplane connectors
Connector Function
AI0 Serial bus primary (lower BSU only), to DAB
AI1 Serial bus redundant (lower BSU only), to DAB
AI2 +5 V DRAM power, from BBBX
KS0 TTY test connector, to KSW/DSW2 in slot L27
KS1 TTY test connector, to KSW/DSW2 in slot L1
GK0 GPS receiver connector, to interconnect panel on top of
cabinet
MS0 MSI connector, to interconnect panel T43/BIB on top of
cabinet
cabinet
cabinet
cabinet
DR0 Not used
DR1 Not used
DR2 Not used
DR3 Not used
DR4 Not used
DR5 Not used
GSM-100-333 Remote transcoder unit shelf assembly
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W07-O
GMR-04
113
Remote transcoder unit shelf assembly
Overview
A remote transcoder unit (RXU) shelf assembly consists of:
S A backplane.
S Two vertical-slot module shelves containing the required digital modules:
The upper shelf holds half size digital modules.
The lower shelf holds full size digital modules.
S A three-compartment shelf for the power supply modules.
Every cabinet must be fitted with:
S Two bus termination cards (BTC).
S One local area network extender (LANX) module.
All other digital modules are optional, and their inclusion depends upon the cabinet
configuration.
RXU numbering
In a RXCDR, RXUs are numbered 0 or 1 using the sixteen position (0 to F hex) rotary
switch on the LANX module. This rotary switch sets the RXU LAN address.
29 Aug 1997
114
GMR-04
68P02901W07-O
RXU shelf
Figure 1-4 shows a remote transcoder unit shelf:
FULL SIZE
MODULES
HALF SIZE
MODULES
AI0
AI1
AI2
MS0
KS0
PART OF RXU BACKPLANE
MS1
MS2
MS3
KS1
BLANKING PLATE
DPSM, IPSM OR EPSM
Figure 1-4 RXU shelf
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W07-O
GMR-04
115
Shelf module fit
Table 1-4 shows the module positions in a fully-equipped RXU shelf assembly:
If AMR hardware modules are fitted retrospectively in BSSC installations, for
the purpose of Table 1-2:
For KSWX, read DSWX as relevant.
For KSW, read DSW2 as relevant.
For GDP, read GDP2 as relevant
NOTE
Table 1-4 BSU shelf module positions
Parameter Valid Input Default Default
U0 KSWX
L
L0 BTC
U1 KSWX
L
L1 KSW
U2 KSWX
R
or CLKX L2
U3 KSWX
R
or CLKX L3
GCLK
*
U4 KSWX
R
or CLKX L4
U5 KSWX
R
or CLKX L5
GCLK
*
U6 KSWX
R
or CLKX L6 XCDR, GDP or MSI
U7 KSWX
E
or CLKX L7 XCDR, GDP or MSI
U8 KSWX
E
L8 XCDR, GDP or MSI
U9 KSWX
E
L9 XCDR, GDP or MSI
U10 Not used in this cabinet L10 XCDR, GDP or MSI
U11 Not used in this cabinet L11 XCDR, GDP
U16 PIX or BBBX L16 XCDR, GDP
U19 LANX L19 XCDR, GDP
U20 LANX L20 XCDR, GDP
U21 KSWX
E
L21 XCDR, GDP
U22 KSWX
E
L22 XCDR, GDP
U23 KSWX
E
L23 XCDR, GDP
U24 KSWX
R
L24 XCDR, GDP or NVM
U25 KSWX
R
L25 GPROC
U26 KSWX
R
L26 GPROC
U27 KSWX
R
L27 KSW
29 Aug 1997
116
GMR-04
68P02901W07-O
Parameter Default Default Valid Input
U28 KSWX
R
L28 BTC
*
GCLK boards take up two slots: L2 and L3, or L4 and L5
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W07-O
GMR-04
117
Ventilation
Blanking plates are inserted in all unused full size and power supply module slots to
assist with the correct airflow and ventilation.
Backplane
connectors
Table 1-5 shows the function of each connector fitted at the top of the RXU backplane:
Table 1-5 RXU backplane connectors
Connector Function
AI0 Serial bus primary (lower RXU shelf only), to DAB
AI1 Serial bus redundant (lower RXU shelf only), to DAB
AI2 +5 V DRAM power, from BBBX
KS0 TTY test connector, to KSW in slot L27
KS1 TTY test connector, to KSW in slot L1
cabinet
cabinet
cabinet
cabinet
GSM-100-333 Power distribution unit components
29 Aug 1997
118
GMR-04
68P02901W07-O
Power distribution unit components
Introduction
This section describes the cabinet dc power distribution arrangements.
Overview
The power distribution unit (PDU) is located on the top shelf of the cabinet and:
S Distributes dc power throughout the cabinet.
S Provides an alarm interface.
It consists of:
S A distribution alarm board (DAB).
S A circuit breaker panel containing seven dc circuit breakers.
Input power
DC input power is applied at the interconnection panel on top of the cabinet and is routed
to:
S The VIN bus bar.
S The earth (GND) bus bar in the PDU.
A second bus bar obtains +27 V power from:
S The integrated power supply modules (IPSMs) in the lower BSU in positive earth
(48/60 V) cabinets.
S The VIN and GND busbars, via busbar links, in negative earth (+27 V) cabinets.
Circuit breakers
The seven circuit breakers distribute power to units within the cabinet.
S CB1 (30 A) provides +27 V to the DAB.
S CB5 to CB10 (60 A) provide:
48/60 V to the IPSMs in a positive earth cabinet.
+27 V to the EPSMs in a negative earth cabinet.
GSM-100-333 Fan cooling system
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W07-O
GMR-04
119
Fan cooling system
Overview
Each fan tray assembly contains three exhaust fans. Cabinet baffling divides the cabinet
cooling system into upper and lower cabinet cooling sub-systems.
The cooling system, in conjunction with the correct use of shelf airflow deflectors,
provides adequate cooling for all cabinet equipment.
Each fan has a fan stall sensor which is connected to alarm circuits in the DAB through
connector PC5.
Location
The fan cooling system is mounted directly below each BSU/RXU shelf assembly.
Requirements
Power for the fans is derived from the +27 V busbar and is routed to the +27 V terminal
on the DAB, then from connector PC9 on the DAB to the fans.
GSM-100-333 Interconnect panel
29 Aug 1997
120
GMR-04
68P02901W07-O
Interconnect panel
Overview
The interconnect panel is mounted on the top of the cabinet and provides connections
for:
S DC input power.
S E1/T1 line interconnect modules.
S Customer defined alarm equipment input/output.
S +27 V battery backup input for DRAM.
The Interconnect panel has feed-through tubes for routeing fibre optic inter-cabinet
cables into and out of the cabinet.
The E1/T1 line interconnection modules are:
S Type 43 (T43) interconnect boards.
S Balanced line interconnect boards (BIB).
Panel layout
Figure 1-5 shows the interconnect panel:
PIX 1
PIX 0
GKO
BATTERY
BACKUP
EARTH STUD
V IN
48/60 V dc
or
+27 V dc
0 V
FIBRE OPTIC CABLES
FEED THROUGH TUBE
Figure 1-5 Interconnect panel
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W07-O
GMR-04
121
Connectors
Table 1-6 shows the interconnect panel connector functions:
Table 1-6 |Interconnect panel connectors
Connector Function Internal destination External destination
+27 V
Battery
Back-up
DRAM back-up
battery
PAB connector PC4 and
BBBX connector PC2
+27 V back-up battery
MS0 to MS3 Multiple serial
interface ports (up to
six E1/T1 circuits at
h t i
MS0 to MS3 connectors
on lower BSU/RXU
backplane
E1/T1 circuits source or
termination equipment
(via a T43 or BIB)
MS4 to MS7
each connector; six
Tx and six Rx
circuits)
on upper BSU/RXU
backplane
PIX0 and
PIX1
Customer alarm
input/output ports
Front edge connector of
PIX modules
Customer alarm
equipment
GSM-100-333 BSSC Cabinet labels
29 Aug 1997
122
GMR-04
68P02901W07-O
BSSC Cabinet labels
Introduction
This section details the warning, advisory and other labels on the BSSC cabinet.
BSSC labels
Figure 1-6 shows the position of labels on the BSSC cabinet:
Motorola
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
FRONT OF DOOR
Figure 1-6 BSSC cabinet labels
GSM-100-333 BSSC Cabinet labels
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W07-O
GMR-04
123
Key to BSSC
labels
Table 1-7 details the labels on the BSSC cabinet:
Table 1-7 BSSC cabinet labels
Key Description Part Number Comments
1 Safety glasses 5402275W01
2 Fuse map 5402347W01
3 Circuit breaker 5402349W03
5402349W04
4 CE mark 5402470W01
5 Safety EN60 950 5402489W01
6 T43 connection 5402401W01
7 Rating label 5402284W03
5402284W04
8 Danger energy hazard 5402192W01
9 Earth label 5402098W01
10 Serial number N/A Factory marked
11 Warning live terminals 5409954E01
12 Panel must be in place 5409816E01
13 Warning possible laser radiation 5402274W01
14 Caution isolate 5402374W01
15 Warning disconnect fuse N/A Part of fan
16 Panel must be in place 5409816E01
17 Warning live terminals 5409954E01 -48/-60V cabinets
only
18 ESD 5409951E01
19 Halfsize module laser hazard 5402281W01
22 ESD and card map 5402305W01
24 Open door handle 5402471W01
GSM-100-333 BSSC2 Cabinet labels
29 Aug 1997
124
GMR-04
68P02901W07-O
BSSC2 Cabinet labels
Overview
The following diagrams and tables show the location of the warning, advisory and
specific labels applied to the BSSC2 equipment cabinet. Refer to the labelling table for
the key to the numbers on the diagrams.
Labelling
diagrams
Figure 1-7 and Figure 1-8 show the location of labels on the BSSC2 cabinet.
Table 1-8 and Table 1-9 give details of the information displayed on the indicated label.
Door front
1
Figure 1-7 BSSC2 cabinet labels - door front
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W07-O
GMR-04
125
Internal labelling
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
21
20
19
Figure 1-8 BSSC2 cabinet labels
29 Aug 1997
126
GMR-04
68P02901W07-O
Labelling tables
Table 1-8 explains the label on the door front diagram:
Table 1-8 BSSC2 cabinet door front label details
Key Description Part number Comments
Table 1-9 explains the labels on the internal labelling diagram:
Table 1-9 BSSC2 cabinet internal labelling details
Key Description Part number Comments
1 Fuse map 5402347W01
2 Circuit breaker 5402349W03
5402349W04
3 CE mark 5402470W01
4 Safety EN60 950 5402489W01
5 T43 connection 5402401W01
6 Rating label 5402284W03
5402284W04
7 Danger energy hazard 5402192W01
8 Earth label 5402098W01
9 Serial number N/A
10 Warning live terminals 5409954E01
11 Warning possible laser 5402274W01
13 Warning live terminals 5409954E01 48/60 V
cabinet only
15 Half size module laser hazard 5402281W01
16 ESD 5409951E01
GSM-100-333 BSSC2 cabinet cabling
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W07-O
GMR-04
127
BSSC2 cabinet cabling
Overview
This section contains the following cabinet cabling diagrams for a BSSC2 with a DAB
type PDU:
Diagram 1
BSSC2 cabinet (48/60 V) dc power and alarm cabling diagram.
Diagram 2
BSSC2 cabinet (+27 V) dc power and alarm cabling diagram.
Diagram 3
BSSC2 cabinet digital cabling diagram.
Diagram 4
Example of BSU and RXU module to T43 or BIB connections.
29 Aug 1997
128
GMR-04
68P02901W07-O
Diagram 1
BSSC2 cabinet (48/60 V) dc power and alarm cabling diagram.
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W07-O
GMR-04
129
Diagram 2
BSSC2 cabinet (+27 V) dc power and alarm cabling.
29 Aug 1997
130
GMR-04
68P02901W07-O
Diagram 3
BSSC2 cabinet digital cabling diagram
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W07-O
GMR-04
131
Diagram 4
Example of BSU and RXU module to T43 or BIB connections.
GSM-100-333 BSSC differences
29 Aug 1997
132
GMR-04
68P02901W07-O
BSSC differences
Introduction
The BSSC cabinet is the same as the BSSC2 except in terms of its power distribution
and alarm handling arrangements. This section describes these differences; it must be
read with reference to the rest of this chapter.
This section does not apply to DCS1800 and PCS1900 systems.
NOTE
Types of PDU
The BSSC PDU is available in two forms that are functionally the same. These two types
comprise:
S A power distribution board (PDB), an alarm interface board (AIB) and a circuit
breaker panel.
S A power alarm board (PAB) and a circuit breaker panel.
The PAB combines the PDB and AIB functions.
The distribution alarm board (DAB), as used by the BSSC2, supersedes both of these
types.
PDB
The power distribution board distributes +27 V and +5 V to units in the cabinet via 25
fuses. The PDB is described in chapter 3.
AIB
The alarm interface board monitors alarm lines, passes individual alarms to the GPROC
and provides a signal for the cabinet alarm LED. The AIB is described in chapter 3.
PAB
The power alarm board distributes +27 V and +5 V to units in the cabinet via 30 fuses,
monitors alarm lines, passes individual alarms to the GPROC and provides a signal for
the cabinet alarm LED. The PAB is described in chapter 3.
Circuit breakers
Power from the VIN bus bar is distributed to power supplies within the cabinet via the
circuit breaker panel described in chapter 3.
GSM-100-333 BSSC cabinet cabling (PAB)
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W07-O
GMR-04
133
BSSC cabinet cabling (PAB)
Overview
This section contains the following cabinet cabling diagrams for a BSSC with PAB type
PDU:
Diagram 1
BSSC cabinet (48/60 V) dc power and alarm cabling.
Diagram 2
BSSC cabinet (+27 V) dc power and alarm cabling.
NOTE
29 Aug 1997
134
GMR-04
68P02901W07-O
Diagram 1
BSSC cabinet (48/60 V) dc power and alarm cabling.
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W07-O
GMR-04
135
Diagram 2
BSSC cabinet (+27 V) dc power and alarm cabling.
SURGE
CAPACITOR
VIN 0V
GK0
GSM-100-333 BSSC cabinet cabling (PDB/AIB)
29 Aug 1997
136
GMR-04
68P02901W07-O
BSSC cabinet cabling (PDB/AIB)
Overview
This section contains the cabinet cabling diagram for a BSSC with PDB/AIB type PDU:
Diagram 1
BSSC cabinet dc power and alarm cabling.
NOTE
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W07-O
GMR-04
137
Diagram 1
BSSC cabinet dc power and alarm cabling.
UPPER BSU BACKPLANE
(OPTIONAL)
LOWER BSU BA CKPLANE
CB4 (RED)
CB5 (RED)
CB3 (RED)
CB1 (RED)
CB2 (RED)
CB0 (RED)
GBB (BLK)
GBB (BLK)
GBB (BLK)
GBB (BLK)
GBB (BLK)
GBB (BLK)
SURGE
CAPACITOR
VIN 0V
GK0
PC1
PC2
PC9
+27V
PC3
PC6
PC4
GND
5
PS29
PS29
PS19
PS19
PS9
PS9
GDN BUS
BAR (GBB)
4
3
2
1
0
PCB
PDB
PC7
PC5
PC2
CIRCUIT
BREAKERS
P
C
5
P
C
6
P
C
8
P
S
2
8
P
S
1
8
C
B
5
C
B
4
C
B
3
C
B
2
C
B
1
C
B
0
P
S
8
P
S
2
8
P
S
1
8
P
S
8
P
C
1
P
C
7 PC3
AIB
CABINET
DOOR
LED
ig.196.rh
29 Aug 1997
138
GMR-04
68P02901W07-O
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W07-O
GMR-04
i
Chapter 2
Digital modules
GSM-100-333
29 Aug 1997
ii
GMR-04
68P02901W07-O
GSM-100-333
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W07-O
GMR-04
iii
Chapter 2
Overview 21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
In this chapter 21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BSU shelf 22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RXU shelf 23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 27 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The modules 27 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BTC 28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose 28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Requirements 28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BTC module 28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DSW2 29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose 29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Local highway 211 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Slot position 215 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GCLK 216 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose 216 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Requirements 216 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GCLK module 216 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GCLK diagram 219 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GDP2 220 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose 220 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Requirements 220 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GDP2 module 221 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Architecture 222 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MCU subsystem 223 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DSP subsystem 223 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multiplexer 223 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E1 Line interface 223 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MCAP interface 224 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TDM interface 224 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GDP2 diagram 225 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GSM-100-333
29 Aug 1997
iv
GMR-04
68P02901W07-O
GPROC 226 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose 226 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Requirements 226 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communication 226 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GPROC module 227 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Memory 227 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Software 228 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GPROC diagram 231 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GPROC2 232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose 232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Requirements 232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GPROC2 module 233 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communication 233 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Memory 233 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Software 234 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GPROC2 diagram 236 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KSW 237 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose 237 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Requirements 237 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KSW module 237 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Architecture 238 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Highway monitor 240 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Watchdog timer 240 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interrupt logic 241 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KSW switching 241 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KSW in a BSC 241 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KSW in a RXCDR 241 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KSW diagram 242 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MSI 244 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose 244 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Requirements 244 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MSI module 245 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MSI diagram 248 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GSM-100-333
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W07-O
GMR-04
v
MSI-2 249 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose 249 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Requirements 249 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MSI-2 module 250 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MSI-2 diagram 254 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
XCDR 255 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose 255 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Requirements 255 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
XCDR module 256 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Architecture 256 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Processor 257 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DSP 257 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Line interface 258 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switching 258 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MCAP interface 258 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TDM interface 258 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
XCDR diagram 259 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GDP 260 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose 260 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Requirements 261 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GDP module 261 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Architecture 262 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MCU subsystem 262 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DSP subsystem 262 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MCAP interface 264 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TDM interface 264 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GDP diagram 265 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 268 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The modules 268 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BBBX 269 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose 269 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Requirements 269 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BBBX module 269 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BBBX diagram 270 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GSM-100-333
29 Aug 1997
vi
GMR-04
68P02901W07-O
CLKX 271 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose 271 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Requirements 271 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GCLK module 271 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CLKX diagram 272 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DSWX 273 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose 273 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Requirements 273 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DSWX module 274 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KSWX 277 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose 277 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Requirements 277 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KSWX module 278 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KSWX diagram 279 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LANX 280 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose 280 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Requirements 280 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LANX module 281 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bus arbiter 283 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Redundant LAN 283 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shelf ID 283 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front panel 283 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LANX diagram 284 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PIX 285 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 285 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Requirements 285 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PIX module 285 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PIX diagram 286 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W07-O
GMR-04
21
Overview
Introduction
This chapter describes the digital modules used in BSS equipment cabinets (BSC and
RXCDR).
The digital modules fit into the base station unit (BSU) and remote transcoder unit (RXU)
shelves.
In this chapter
Do not fit digital modules in any equipment for which they are not suitable.
CAUTION
Some AMR hardware modules can be installed retrospectively in BSSC
installations (non-AMR). Technical details of these modules are included in this
chapter, but it important to note the performance constraints indicated for
non-BSSC3 installations.
NOTE
All information given is valid for GSM, EGSM, DCS1800 and PCS1900 systems unless
otherwise indicated.
GSM-100-333 BSU and RXU shelf diagrams
29 Aug 1997
22
GMR-04
68P02901W07-O
BSU and RXU shelf diagrams
Introduction
This section contains BSU and RXU shelf module assignments and associated
information. Subsequent sections in this chapter describe each module.
BSU shelf
Figure 2-1 shows the BSU shelf slot assignment and backplane connectors:

Figure 2-1 BSU shelf layout
BSU Module slots
S Slots are numbered from 0 to 28 from right to left.
S Half-size modules are fitted in the upper row.
S Full-size modules are fitted in the lower row.
S Master slots must be equipped first for initialization purposes:
Slot L5 GCLK.
Slot L20 GPROC.
Slot L16 MSI/2.
Slot L27 KSW.
S All unused slots must be fitted with a blanking plate.
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W07-O
GMR-04
23
BSU backplane connectors
S AI0 and AI1 are 10-pin headers.
S AI2 is a 4-pin power connector to the back up supply (BBBX).
S KS0 and KS1 are 20-pin headers and provide TTY access to serial ports for
KSW/DSW2 boards.
S DR0 to DR5 are 20-pin headers and provide TTY access to serial ports for
DRI/MSI boards.
S GK0 is a 9-pin D-type and provides a GCLK synchronization input.
S MS0 to MS3 are 37-pin D-types for connecting E1/T1 circuits.
RXU shelf
Figure 2-2 shows the RXU shelf slot assignment and backplane connectors:
Figure 2-2 RXU shelf layout
29 Aug 1997
24
GMR-04
68P02901W07-O
RXU module slots
S Slots are numbered from 0 to 28 from right to left.
S Half-size modules are fitted in the upper row.
S Full-size modules are fitted in the lower row.
S Master slots must be equipped first for initialization purposes.
Slot L5 GCLK.
Slot L25 GPROC.
Slot L10 MSI/2, XCDR, GDP / GDP2
Slot L27 KSW/DSW2.
S All unused slots must be fitted with a blanking plate.
Backplane connectors.
S AI0 and AI1 are 10-pin headers.
S AI2 is a 4-pin power connector to the back up supply (BBBX).
S KS0 and KS1 provide TTY access to serial ports for KSWs / DSW2s.
S MS0 to MS3 are 37-pin D-types for connecting E1/T1 lines.
GSM-100-333 Module front panels
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W07-O
GMR-04
25
Module front panels
Introduction
This section is a quick reference guide to the status indicators and switches on the front
panels of the digital modules in BSU and RXU shelves. Subsequent sections in this
chapter describe each module. The reset switch on a module will not return a Disabled or
Locked module to service. If the module was BU or EU before the module was reset
then it will return to an inservice state either Busy or Enabled. Once a module is locked
disabling the module will have no effect on the status of the module as displayed via
MMI, disabling a module results in isolating the module from the cage. Modules not listed
below have no status indicators or front panel switches.
Table 2-1 gives details of the status indicators found on module front panels, and what
given indications mean.
Table 2-1 Module front panel status indicators
Module Status indicators Front panel switches
GCLK Green LED on only =Master, no alarms
Red LED on only =Alarms, not Master
Both LEDs on =Master and alarms
Both LEDs off =Not Master, no alarms
(or no power)
(alarms: oscillator or PLL failure, ref. counter overflow)
Toggle switch (three position)
Up (momentary) =Reset board
Middle =Normal operation
Down =Disable board for extraction
Potentiometer =Adjustment for the VCXO**
GPROC Green LED on only =Processor running, no alarms
Red LED on only =Processor halted or in reset
Both LEDs on =Processor running, board is
disabled or other alarm
Both LEDs off =No power to board
Both LEDs flashing =Bootstrap reprogram in
progress
Up (momentary) =Reset board, download code
KSW/DSW2 Green LED on only =Processor running, no alarms
MSI Green LED on only =Processor running, no alarms
XCDR and
GDP
Green LED on only =Processor running, no alarms
KSWX/DSWX Green LED on =Master, no alarms
Green LED blinking =Slave, no alarms
Green LED off =TDM bus or Clock alarms
(or no power)
GSM-100-333 Module front panels
29 Aug 1997
26
GMR-04
68P02901W07-O
Module Front panel switches Status indicators
NVM Board status LEDs:
Green LED on only =Processor running, no alarms
Red LED on only =Alarms, board reset or board
awaiting initialization
Both LEDs off =Total power failure
Card status LEDs:
Green LED on only =PCMCIA card operational
Red LED on only =Fault on PCMCIA card
Both LEDs flashing =Software writing data to the
card
Both LEDs off =Card slot not in use
Card swap switch:
Operation not currently supported
Card eject:
Operation not currently supported
LANX None Rotary switch (16 position)
For setting shelf ID number
PIX Green LED on =No alarms
Green LED off =Customer alarm detected
None
GSM-100-333 Full-size modules
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W07-O
GMR-04
27
Full-size modules
Introduction
Full-size modules fit into slots in the lower card cage of a BSU or RXU shelf. The slots
are numbered, right to left, from L0 to L28.
The following sections describe the full-size modules that can be mounted in a BSU or
RXU.
The quantity fitted depends upon the specific configuration of the BSU or RXU.
The modules
The following full-sized modules are described:
S Bus terminator card (BTC).
S Digital radio interface extended memory (DRIM).
S Generic clock (GCLK).
S Generic processor (GPROC/2).
S Kiloport switch (KSW) Double Kiloport switch (DSW2)
S Multiple serial interface (MSI/2).
S Transcoder (XCDR).
S Generic DSP Processor (GDP and GDP2).
S Non Volatile Memory (NVM).
GSM-100-333 BTC
29 Aug 1997
28
GMR-04
68P02901W07-O
BTC
Purpose
The bus termination card (BTC) terminates the backplane to keep signals on a BSU or
RXU shelf at the proper TTL level.
The BTC terminates:
S Both MCAP buses.
S Both BSS serial buses.
S Both reference clocks.
S All TDM buses (Expansion, Remote and Local).
Requirements
Two BTC modules must be fitted in each BSU or RXU shelf, in slot L0 and slot L28, at all
times.
While a faulty BTC is being replaced, another BTC must be fitted in a KSW slot to
maintain the above requirement.
BTC module
Figure 2-3 shows a BTC module:
ig.199.rh
BACKPLANE CONNECTOR
Figure 2-3 BTC module
GSM-100-333 DSW2
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W07-O
GMR-04
29
DSW2
Purpose
The double kiloport switch 2 (DSW2) module is a time division multiplex (TDM), multiple
access digital switch designed to support a non-blocking switching fabric. The DSW2 is
compatible with legacy software, and can be used in place of the KSW in BSSC2
installations.
When installed retrospectively in BSSC installations, the DSW2 operates in a
KSW mode. In this situation the full DSW2 performance detailed in this section
will be constrained as indicated in the text.
NOTE
The DSW2:
S Performs timeslot interchange for the active TDM highway.
S Communicates with the controlling GPROC2 via the MCAP bus.
S At a BSC, routes logical channels dynamically, on a per-call basis.
S At an RXCDR provides fixed switching for traffic between the BSC and MSC.
S Supports 3-party conferencing (TPC).
S Provides a range of diagnostic features.
S Provides expanded capacity via multiple-DSW2 configurations.
The DSW2 is shown in Figure 2-4.
GSM-100-333 DSW2
29 Aug 1997
210
GMR-04
68P02901W07-O
Figure 2-4 DSW2 module
Backplane connector
Alarm (Red) LED.
Normally OFF
Active (Green) LED.
Normally ON
RESET/DISABLE switch
GSM-100-333 DSW2
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W07-O
GMR-04
211
Timeslot
interchange
The primary function of the DSW2 is to switch data from a given timeslot on the active
inbound (switchbound) ) TDM highway, to a given timeslot on the active outbound TDM
highway. DSW2 switching at the BSC is variable; physical channel mapping on the
A interface is performed for each call, and at every handover. DSW2 switching in an
RXU3 shelf is fixed; it provides one-to-one physical mapping between the traffic to and
from the BSC and the traffic to and from the MSC.
The DSW2 can be configured to use the following TDM highways, according to
requirements:
S Local TDM highway.
S Remote TDM highway.
S Three Expansion TDM highways.
These are described in the following sections.
Local highway
The Local TDM inbound highway uses the Local Highway 0 port on the DSW2. This port
is used for Highway 0 traffic within the same physical cage as the DSW2.
Remote TDM
highway
The Remote TDM inbound highway uses the Remote Highway 0 port on the DSW2. This
port is used to extend the switching functions of a local DSW2 to other cages. Since
there is no increase in the number of DSW2s, there is no expansion or increase in the
switching capacity. Each remote cage is linked to the primary cage by a fibre optic cable,
via DSW extender modules. In the primary cage a Remote DSW extender (DSWX
R
)
module interfaces the fibre optic to the Remote TDM Highway. At each remote cage a
Local DSWX module (DSWX
L
), provides a Local TDM Highway within the cage. An
example of a DSW2 extended to a second cage is shown in Figure 2-5.
GSM-100-333 DSW2
29 Aug 1997
212
GMR-04
68P02901W07-O
Figure 2-5 DSW2 extended connection
PRIMARY
BSU/RXU SHELF
REMOTE
BSU/RXU SHELF
Inbound local Outbound highway
TSI
DSWX
R
DSWX
L
DSW2
Fibre optic cables
Local TDM
highway
Expansion TDM
highways
Highways 1-3 are Expansion inbound TDM highways. These highways allow multiple
DSW2s located in different cages to be configured in parallel, via Expansion DSW
extender (DSWX
E
) modules. Because the number of DSW2s is increased, the available
switching capacity is expanded accordingly. The three highways enable up to four
DSW2s to be connected in this way, including the DSW2 in the primary cage. An
example of three DSW2s connected in parallel is shown in Figure 2-6.
GSM-100-333 DSW2
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W07-O
GMR-04
213
Figure 2-6 DSW2 expansion
BSU/RXU SHELF
BSU/RXU SHELF
Fibre

optic

cables
BSU/RXU SHELF
Each DSW2 routes inbound data
to the TSI section and to the
expansion outbound highway
Inbound local
2048 ports
Inbound local
2048 ports
Inbound local
2048 ports
TDM data is sent
to/from DSWX
E
to
DSWX
E
All expansion
inbound data is
sent (along with the
inbound local) to
the TSI for
switching to the
outbound highway
Outbound highway
2048 ports
Outbound highway
2048 ports
Outbound highway
2048 ports
Expansion
outbound highway
is sent to each
DSWX
E
Data from other
DSW2s is sent to
the TSI section
(2048 each)
DSWX
E
DSWX
E
DSWX
E
DSWX
E
DSWX
E
DSWX
E
TSI TSI
TSI TSI
TSI TSI
DSW2
DSW2
DSW2
GSM-100-333 DSW2
29 Aug 1997
214
GMR-04
68P02901W07-O
Outbound TDM highways
The RAM based Timeslot Assigner (TSA) generates output enables to select the inbound
data for each outbound timeslot. In this way the correct data to be sent outbound from
the DSW2 is captured by selectively enabling the outputs of all possible data sources.
The possible data sources encompass:
S Timeslot Interchange (TSI) data. This is the normal operating mode.
S Three-party Conference data.
S Fixed patterns for A-law and u-law idle channel codes.
S Dynamic and static patterns generated by the DSP for test purposes.
The DSW2 outbound highway interface itself comprises:
S Remote outbound highway. Used to extend the switching capacity to other cages,
via DSWX cards. Note that the switching capacity is extended, not expanded or
increased.
S Local outbound highway. Used for traffic within the same physical cage as the
DSW2. A 12-timeslot delay is introduced on this path to maintain timing alignment
with the remote outbound highway, which is subject to various TDM delays.
Double-rate TDM bus:The maximum outbound TDM highway bandwidth is 131.072
Mb/s, partitioned into 2048 timeslots. This double rate TDM bus can be used when the
DSW2 is configured in extended mode, which allows the capacity to be shared between
cages. Note that the backplane clock frequency is not changed. Supported channel
types include 64, 32, 16 and 8 kbit/s. The DSW2 therefore supports a maximum of 2048
64kbit/s channels, 4096 32 kbit/s channels, 8192 16kbit/s channels, or 16384 8 kbit/s
channels. One TDM frame can contain any combination of these channels.
Standard-rate TDM bus: The DSW2 also supports a KSW mode of operation, for which
the outbound highway is partitioned into 1024 timeslots to provide a standard rate TDM
bus. The potential bandwidth of the outbound highway is thus halved in this mode of
operation.
The usable switching capacity of each DSW2 depends on site hardware and software
configurations because certain modules require a number of ports for their own use. The
DSW2 is controlled by the local GPROC2 or GPROC3 via the MCAP bus.
Three party
conference
Three party conference mode is effected by decoding and summing the timeslots of two
A-law or two u-law PCM-encoded channels. The summed data is then
re-encoded/compressed, and selected as the data source for the active outbound
highway. A-law or u-law selection is not intended to change on a timeslot basis. The
DSW2 supports any number of three party conference calls, within its maximum channel
capacity.
Self-diagnostics
Timeslot interchange: Fixed/dynamic pattern generation is used in conjunction with
timeslot monitoring to provide extensive self-diagnostics for the timeslot interchange
section.
DSP: The DSP is monitored by a watchdog timer. The DSP writes to a memory-mapped
address that periodically resets the watchdog timer, ensuring that it does not time out. If
the DSP stops running, the watchdog timer times out and causes the red LED on the
front panel to illuminate. An interrupt is also generated and sent to the GPROC3 via the
MCAP bus. If a DSP fails, the TSI section of the DSW2 still switches data, but no new
path connections are implemented. This results in existing calls being held while the
system is reconfigured around the failed DSW2.
GSM-100-333 DSW2
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W07-O
GMR-04
215
Serial interface
The serial interface logic supports the TTY interface. This interface is connected to a
dedicated backplane connector port. This port is a buffered RS232 type. The TTY can be
used to control the DSW2, monitor DSW2 status, and support DSW2 diagnostics.
Slot position
The DSW2 is located in the following slots in a BSU or RXU3 shelf assembly:
S L1 for TDM highway B.
S L27 for TDM highway A.
GSM-100-333 GCLK
29 Aug 1997
216
GMR-04
68P02901W07-O
GCLK
Purpose
The generic clock (GCLK) module generates all the timing reference signals that the
BSU or RXU requires. The master TDM clock is normally synthesized from a 16.384
MHz 0.05 ppm stable reference (temperature stabilized crystal oscillator) and a
2.048 MHz or 1.544 MHz clock recovered from one of the E1 or T1 lines.
Requirements
The GCLK module fits in slots L3 and L5 in the BSU and RXU shelf assemblies. The
module is two slots wide and covers L2/L3 and L4/L5.
There must be a GCLK module in slot L5 of all BSU and RXU shelf assemblies.
A second GCLK module in slot L3 provides n + 1 redundancy.
Mutually redundant GCLKs must reside in the same BSU or RXU.
GCLK module
Figure 2-7 shows a GCLK module:
ALARM LED (RED)
ACTIVE LED (GREEN)
E1/T1 IN
16.384 MHz OUT
6.12S OUT
60mS OUT
125uS OUT
GROUND
FREQUENCY ADJUST
RESET/DISABLE SWITCH
UP (MOMENTARY) = RESET
MIDDLE = NORMAL OPERATION
DOWN = DISABLE
BACKPLANE
CONNECTOR
Figure 2-7 GCLK module
GSM-100-333 GCLK
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W07-O
GMR-04
217
Brief description
Refer to the functional block diagram at the end of this section.
The GCLK module generates all timing reference signals required by the BSS:
S 16.384 MHz TDM clock.
S 125 ms frame reference.
S 60 ms synchronization reference.
S 6.12 s superframe reference.
The GCLK is phase-locked to the recovered clock of a selected E1/T1 line from an MSI
or XCDR module. If the recovered clock signal is lost, and no long term average (LTA) is
available upon which to synchronize, then the GCLK free-runs, providing reference
stability better than 0.05 ppm. The module incorporates self-diagnostics to detect and
isolate board faults and to select a redundant board in the event of module failure.
When a redundant GCLK is present, the GCLKs operate in a master/slave configuration
with the slaved outputs synchronized to the master. If an error is detected, the clock
control circuit reverses the master/slave status of the two GCLKs. Fault status is
reported to the main processor via the MCAP bus.
Reference
oscillator
The reference oscillator uses a phase lock loop (PLL) and a frequency multiplier to
synthesize 16.384 MHz from a E1/T1 line. The PLL consists of:
S A digital phase detector.
S A loop filter.
S A voltage controlled crystal oscillator (VCXO).
S A divide by eight loop divider.
If a fault is detected on the signal from both E1/T1 lines, the oscillator either uses the LTA
(if available) or free runs with stability being maintained by the VCXO.
Reference
dividers
The 125 ms, 60 ms, and 6.12 s reference dividers consist of cascaded programmable
binary counters to divide the input signal to the correct output frequency. The reference
dividers are synchronized to the master clock. The output of each reference counter is
routed to a multiplexer, which is used to switch the reference output from the master or
the slave GCLK. The output of each reference counter is also routed to the reference
encoder.
Reference
encoders
The reference encoder encodes the reference signals together while maintaining phase
relationships. The encoded clock signals are routed via the backplane to a CLKX to be
transmitted to other shelves at the site, via fibre optic cables.
Reference fail
detect
The reference fail detect circuit monitors the signal on the two E1/T1 lines. Failures are
reported to the clock control/alarm logic. In the event of a reference failure, the GCLK
either uses the LTA (if available) or selects the secondary E1/T1 line reference. In either
case an alarm is reported to the controlling GPROC via the MCAP bus.
GSM-100-333 GCLK
29 Aug 1997
218
GMR-04
68P02901W07-O
Clock
control/alarm
logic
The clock control/alarm logic determines the GCLK master/slave status based on module
faults and GPROC commands, and reports the operational status to the GPROC.
Buffered test
ports
Buffered test ports are supplied on the front of the GCLK module for test and
measurement of the input reference signal and output clock and reference signals. The
test jacks are recessed.
GSM-100-333 GCLK
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W07-O
GMR-04
219
GCLK diagram
Figure 2-8 is a block diagram of the GCLK module:
Figure 2-8 GCLK block diagram
GSM-100-333 GDP2
29 Aug 1997
220
GMR-04
68P02901W07-O
GDP2
Purpose
The Generic DSP Processor 2 (GDP2) module is a transcoder board that supports
Adaptive Multi Rate (AMR) speech, as well as data transcoding and rate adaption. The
board supports 60 traffic channels, which can be dynamically switched between half rate,
full rate and enhanced full rate (EFR) speech. The board can also be used to replace the
GDP in an existing RXU backplane.
This section describes the full design performance for the GDP2. If the GDP2
is installed retrospectively in BSSC installations (which do not have AMR
speech capability), its performance will be constrained accordingly. In
particular, its AMR capabilities are not used and it supports a single E1 line
interface only.
NOTE
The GDP2 supports a redundant DSP block, which is transparently switched in the event
of a single DSP block failure. This significantly increases availability compared to the
original GDP board.
The GDP2 module can be used only with systems running GSR7 software or
later releases, as this contains the necessary software support to allow
operation. For a BSC the transcoder boards it connects to must all be GDP2,
not XCDR.
NOTE
The GDP2 module:
S Provides the transcoding interface to the MSC. The GDP2 module is located at
the RXCDR, or at a BSC where transcoding is integrated within the BSC.
S Interfaces two E1 serial lines to the internal cabinet TDM highway, which is in a
parallel format.
S Transcodes 64 kbit/s data from the E1 lines, into 16 kbit/s or 8 kbit/s data., and
vice versa.
Each GDP2 supports 60 compressed voice and data channels, using 8 + 1 DSPs.
These channels, and the synchronization and link control signalling channels, can be
placed in any of the 1024 channels on the TDM highway under control of the GPROC3.
Terminology
One wire pair (balanced or unbalanced) equals one E1 serial data stream.
Two E1 serial data streams (transmit and receive) equal one E1.
Requirements
The GDP2 module is fitted in:
S Slots L6 to L17 (but maximum 6 modules in total) in the BSU shelf assembly.
S Slots L6 to L24 (maximum 19 modules) in the RXU3 shelf assembly.
An MSI-2 or GDP2 must be located in at least one of the BSU locations below for BSC
initialization purposes.
S Shelf 0 slot 16 (Software communicates via either group A or group B).
S Shelf 0 slot 14 (Software communicates via group A).
S Shelf 1 (if second BSU in BSC) slot 16 (Software communicates via group A).
An RXU3 initialization uses slot 10 instead of slot 16, and slot 8 instead of slot 14.
GSM-100-333 GDP2
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W07-O
GMR-04
221
GDP2 module
Figure 2-9 shows a GDP2 module, with the front panel interface shown in Figure 2-10.
Figure 2-9 GDP2 module.
Alarm (Red) LED.
Normally OFF
Active ( Green) LED.
Normally ON
RESET/DISABLE
switch
Backplane
Connector
GSM-100-333 GDP2
29 Aug 1997
222
GMR-04
68P02901W07-O
Figure 2-10 Front panel interface
Reset
Disable
GDP2 Fail LED
GDP2 Operational LED
Ethernet (RJ45)
Brief description
Refer to the GDP2 block diagram at the end of this section.
The GDP2 module contains a digital signal processor (DSP) unit that performs:
S GSM-defined speech encoding.
S GSM-defined speech decoding.
S Submultiplexing functions.
The speech transcoder bi-directionally interfaces the 64 kbit/s E1 line in the land network
to the 13 kbit/s vocoder format used on the air interface.
Signalling channels pass through the transcoder transparently.
Architecture
The GDP2 module contains the following major systems:
S MCU subsystem.
S DSP subsystem.
S E1 Line interface.
S Digital crosspoint switch.
S MCAP interface.
S TDM interface.
GSM-100-333 GDP2
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W07-O
GMR-04
223
MCU subsystem
The main component of the processor system is the microcontroller unit (MCU), which
S Controls and interfaces the other major systems on the GDP2 module.
S Performs self-diagnostics and error monitoring.
Other components of the processor system are:
S A watchdog timer.
S 256 kbytes of RAM.
S 512 kbytes of Flash EPROM.
S 1 kbyte of dual port RAM for MCAP messaging.
S 1 kbyte of dual port RAM for TDM interface.
S A power monitor circuit.
The watchdog timer is periodically strobed by the MCU; an alarm is generated if it is not
strobed before a pre-set timeout.
DSP subsystem
The DSP subsystem consists of 8 identical blocks plus one redundant, each with:
S One 275 MHz DSP processor
S 256kB x 32 dedicated SDRAM for program and data storage.
S Two Enhanced Synchronous Serial Interfaces (ESSIs) for traffic.
S On-board phase-locked loops (PLL) to maintain a clock in the event that the
16.384 clock input is lost. The PLL is designed to be stable enough to remain
within range when the clock input is restored.
DSP firmware is downloadable. The MCU uses the host port to connect to the parallel
bus of all DSPs for control, monitoring and download purposes. All the ESSI signals to
the DSPs are buffered by tristate devices.
Multiplexer
There is a multiplexer within the serial data formatter. The multiplexer converts data from
the DSP subsystem ESSI format to the digital crosspoint switch, ST Bus Format. This
multiplexes four data streams from the switch into a single datastream for the DSPs.
Each DSP receives the same timeslot data . The software running on the DSP maps
which timeslot is to be transcoded by that DSP.
E1 Line interface
The line interface systems perform:
S Impedance matching.
S Secondary surge protection from high voltage transients (such as lightning strikes),
which may come down the E1 lines.
The impedance matching and isolation circuits consist of isolation transformers and
Zener diodes.
After impedance matching and isolation each E1 line receive signal is input into a line
interface unit/framer., which performs the clock recovery, data conversion, and framing.
The clock extraction section extracts the E1 clock to which all BSU/RXU3 shelves can be
synchronized. The framer performs frame decoding law CCITT recommendation G.704
for digital multiplex equipment. Traffic is then routed to the switching system.
The GDP2 provides a loopback from each line input to line output, for E1 link
troubleshooting.
GSM-100-333 GDP2
29 Aug 1997
224
GMR-04
68P02901W07-O
CRC-4 Error
checking
A GDP2 module configured for use with an E1 serial line supports CRC-4 error checking.
This is set by default to the on state 0. All associated switches (MSCs) must also have
CRC-4 error checking set to the on state, so allowing communication across the
A-interface
To check if the GDP2 board CRC-4 state is set, use the MMS_config_type CM
database command.
disp_element MMS_config_type <location>
Refer to Technical Description: BSS Command Reference (68P02901W23) for
information on the above CM database command.
To ensure the correct setting of CRC-4 error checking at the MSC, consult the vendor
supplied equipment manual.
Digital
crosspoint
switch
The switching system consists of a digital switch, which performs the following functions:.

S Transmission of E1 line data and TDM data streams.
S Connection between the processor section and the E1 line interface system.
MCAP interface
The MCAP interface system supports two redundant MCAP buses to the GDP2. The
GDP2 communicates with the GPROC3 in the same way as all other full-size modules.
TDM interface
The TDM interface system takes traffic data from the TDM bus and converts it from
parallel data to serial data. The serial data is then sent to the switching system.
GSM-100-333 GDP2
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W07-O
GMR-04
225
GDP2 diagram
Figure 2-11 shows a block diagram of the GDP2 module:
Figure 2-11 GDP2 block diagram
BACKPLANE
E1 Line
Interface
E1 Line
Interface
Digital Crosspoint
Switch
MCAP
Interface
ESSI
Test Port
Serial Data Formatters
ESSI
Test Port
ESSI
DSP
SubSystem
SCI Mix
MCU
SubSystem
TTY A
TTY B
ESSI
Traffic channel signalling & data 2048 kbit/s
Traffic channel data 8192 kbit/s
Data/Control
Host Bus
SCI
TDM
Interface
GSM-100-333 GPROC
29 Aug 1997
226
GMR-04
68P02901W07-O
GPROC
Purpose
The generic processor (GPROC) module provides the processing power to control a
BSC, RXCDR or BTS.
GPROCs in a BSU or RXU exchange control signalling via several links:
S A token ring local area network (LAN). The LAN can link processors in several
shelves via fibre optic cable.
S A Motorola cellular advanced processor (MCAP) bus, which extends the
processors address, data and control buses to peripheral modules in the same
shelf.
S A serial bus, which communicates alarm information between GPROCs and
half-size modules. This serial bus extends to the PDU.
S The active time division multiplex (TDM) highway.
GPROC modules can be used in a BSU or RXU shelf assembly running
software up to and including GSR3. GSR4 and later software releases require
the use of GPROC2 modules.
NOTE
Requirements
The GPROC module fits into:
S Slots L18 to L25 in a BSU shelf assembly.
S Slot L25 and slot L26 in an RXU shelf assembly.
Each BSU/RXU requires at least one GPROC.
A GPROC must be fitted in slot L20 of BSU 0, and slot L25 of RXU 0, for use in
initialization.
Communication
The GPROC communicates with other full-size modules via the MCAP bus, and with
half-size modules (and modules not on the module shelf) via the BSS serial bus. There
are two other serial ports which are not currently used.
The LAPD processor and the TDM interface controller communicate via a high-speed
private bus. The private bus arbiter is the interface between the MC68030 address/data
bus and the high-speed private bus.
The parallel port controls output signals to the front panel LEDs, and receives input
signals (via the register ports) from the backplane. These contain:
S Shelf ID.
S Slot ID.
S Backplane type.
S Backplane revision level.
GSM-100-333 GPROC
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W07-O
GMR-04
227
GPROC module
Figure 2-12 shows a GPROC module.
ig.202.rh
ALARM LED (RED)
ACTIVE LED (GREEN)
GREEN LED ON, RED LED =
PROCESSOR RUNNING, NO FAILURES
GREEN LED OFF, RED LED ON =
PROCESSOR HALTED, OR IN RESET
BOTH LEDS ON = PROCESSOR RUNNING,
MODULE IS DISABLED OR OTHER ALARM
DOWN = DISABLE
TTY CONNECTOR
(OPTICALLY ISOLATED TEST PORT)
BACKPLANE
CONNECTOR
Figure 2-12 GPROC module
Brief description
Refer to the functional block diagram at the end of this section.
The GPROC module contains:
S A Motorola MC68030 16-bit processor operating at 25 MHz.
S The LAN processor, which is the interface between the GPROC and the token ring
LAN.
S The COMM processor which, in conjunction with the TDM interface controller, is
the interface between the GPROC and the TDM highway.
Memory
The GPROC module is equipped with 16 Mbytes of DRAM. There is also 512 kbytes of
EPROM (expandable to 1 Mbyte). The EPROM contains the bootstrap code.
Troubleshooting
and diagnostics
A fully buffered TTY maintenance port is available on the front panel, to which a personal
computer (PC) can be connected. The TTY can be used for monitoring and controlling
software when performing maintenance or troubleshooting.
The maintenance port meets the requirements of the EIA RS232C and CCITT V.24
specifications.
The GPROC runs on-board self-diagnostics during initial power-up and on command
from the maintenance TTY.
GSM-100-333 GPROC
29 Aug 1997
228
GMR-04
68P02901W07-O
Software
Every GPROC is identical in terms of hardware; its function depends upon the software
loaded into it.
The processor functions for BTS and BSC applications are different from those for an
RXCDR application and are described separately in the following sections.
BTS and BSC
GPROC
functions
The GPROC performs the following processor functions:
S Fault Manager (FM).
S Configuration Manager (CM).
S Message Transfer Protocol (MTP).
S Signalling Connection Control Part (SCCP) State Machine (SSM).
S Radio Resource State Machine (RRSM).
S Cell Resource Machine (CRM).
S Switch Manager (SM).
S Connectionless Manager (CLM).
S Radio Subsystem (RSS).
S Operations and Maintenance System (OMS).
S Maintains a copy of the application code for collocated peripheral modules.
GPROC task groups and device types
The processor functions can be grouped into six task groups depending on the software
loaded into a given GPROC.
When a group of tasks is assigned to a GPROC, it is considered to be a unique GPROC
device type. The exception to this is the code storage facility processor (CSFP), which is
not considered to be a unique device type.
Table 2-2 shows the device types and task groups:
Table 2-2 GPROC device types
GPROC device BSC
task groups
BTS
task groups
BSC/BTS
interface
Type 0 N/A Base Transceiver
Processor (BTP)
Motorola
proprietary
Type1 Base Site Control
Processor (BSP)
Link Control
Processor (LCP)
Base Transceiver
Processor (BTP)
Digital Radio Host
Processor (DHP)
Motorola
proprietary
Type 2 Base Site Control
Processor (BSP)
Link Control
Processor (LCP)
Operations and
Maintenance
Processor (OMP)
Base Transceiver
Processor (BTP)
Digital Radio Host
Processor (DHP)
Radio System Link
Processor (RSLP)
Motorola
proprietary
NOTE
A code storage facility processor (CSFP) can also be equipped.
GSM-100-333 GPROC
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W07-O
GMR-04
229
RXCDR GPROC
functions
The RXCDR GPROC processor functions are similar to the BSC and BTS GPROCs and
comprise:
These processor functions:
S Maintain the switch database for the KSWs.
S Maintain a copy of the application code for collocated peripheral modules.
S Initialize the RXCDR network element.
S Maintain the configuration database.
S Communicate with other network elements via a 64 kbit/s LAPD serial data link.
S Communicate with the OMC via an X.25 link.
S Communicate with the local monitor via a man-machine interface (MMI).
S Communicate with collocated digital modules.
S Handle redundancy between duplicated modules.
S Control operational software downloads to digital highway modules such as MSIs,
KSWs, and XCDRs.
Fault manager
The RXCDR FM communicates with the BSS FM function via the optional transcoder
BSC link (XBL), a dedicated 64 kbit/s channel.
Switch manager
The SM:
S Makes connections between the terrestrial links on the A interface (MSC to BSS)
and the radio (traffic) channels on the air interface.
S Interacts with the call processing and fault management functions.
S Provides switching functionality for the BSS distributed within the BSC and BTS.
Configuration manager
The CM maintains and updates a configuration database which contains all parameters
and operational software currently in use.
Changes to the database are restricted to the highest level password protection, due to
the potential for down time caused by incorrect changes to the configuration database.
GSM-100-333 GPROC
29 Aug 1997
230
GMR-04
68P02901W07-O
Flash EPROM
daughter card
The flash EPROM (flash memory) feature allows GPROCs equipped to reprogram to the
latest bootstrap code automatically. This feature eliminates the need to visit every site to
manually replace EPROMs every time the bootstrap code changes.
Reprogramming is an automatic part of code downloading and requires no GSM network
operator interaction.
One flash EPROM GPROC daughter card is needed for each upgraded GPROC module.
Hardware
The flash EPROM contains four 256 kbyte flash EPROMs that contain the bootstrap
code for a total of 1 Mbyte of code space.
The upper 4 kbytes of this address space accesses control logic on the daughter card to
enable and disable the programming voltage. This portion of memory is therefore
unavailable for program storage.
The contents of the flash EPROM can be loaded in the field with the required software
load. The flash EPROM daughter card resides in the address range $0 to $FFFFF on the
GPROC.
Control circuits
The flash EPROM contains control circuits that the software uses to enable and disable
the application of the programming voltage to the flash EPROMs, to provide protection
from accidental writes.
The programming voltage is enabled by a write to a specific address and disabled by a
read to another specific address. The address range $FF000 to $FFFFF is unavailable
for program storage.
The control circuits on the card provide sufficient programming current to program all four
flash EPROMs simultaneously.
Software
The downloadable bootstrap flash EPROM works in all GPROC configurations.
The new bootstrap software is downloaded as a new code object and distributed to all
GPROCs using the current code object download and distribution scheme.
The RAM code programs the new bootstrap code into place. Having transitioned from
ROM to RAM code, the software must determine if the new bootstrap code object is the
same as that currently programmed into EPROM. If it is not, and if the GPROC has been
reworked to use flash EPROMs, the GPROC updates its flash EPROM to the code
contained in the new bootstrap code object.
Programming
All four flash EPROMs are programmed simultaneously. This minimizes the total
reprogramming time of the flash EPROMs, to reduce the possibility of resetting the card
in the middle of the reprogramming cycle and thus rendering the bootstrap (and the
GPROC) useless.
On startup, the ROM code provides the memory management unit write protection over
the flash EPROM area. This helps guard against accidental writes to the bootstrap code.
When the bootstrap reprogramming cycle is in progress, both the red and green LEDs on
the GPROCs front panel flash in unison. This is a visual sign to an onsite technician that
the reprogramming cycle is in progress.
An MMI command is available to verify that the bootstrap programming has been
successful. If the technician operates from the OMC, the GPROC(s) are monitored with
printed messages via the rlogin capability from the OMC.
GSM-100-333 GPROC
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W07-O
GMR-04
231
GPROC diagram
Figure 2-13 shows a block diagram of the GPROC module:
Figure 2-13 GPROC block diagram
GSM-100-333 GPROC2
29 Aug 1997
232
GMR-04
68P02901W07-O
GPROC2
Purpose
The GPROC2 generic processor module provides the processing power to control a BSC
or RXCDR.
A GPROC2 cannot be used with software version less than GSR2 and must
be used for software version GSR4 and above.
NOTE
A GPROC2 in a BSU or RXU exchange control signalling in several ways:
S A token ring local area network (LAN). The LAN can link processors in several
shelves via fibre optic cable.
S A Motorola cellular advanced processor (MCAP) bus, which extends the processor
address, data and control buses to peripheral modules in the same shelf.
S A serial bus, which communicates alarm information between GPROC2s and
half-size modules. This serial bus extends to the power distribution unit.
S The active time division multiplex (TDM) highway.
Requirements
The GPROC2 module fits into:
S Slots L18 to L25 in a BSU shelf assembly.
S Slot L25 and slot L26 in an RXU shelf assembly.
Each BSU/RXU requires at least one GPROC2.
A GPROC2 must be fitted in slot L20 or L24 in a BSC.
Brief description
The GPROC2 module contains:
S A Motorola MC68040 32-bit processor operating at 33 MHz.
S The LAN processors which are the interface between the GPROC2 and the token
ring LAN.
S The COMM processor which in conjunction with the TDM interface controller is the
interface between the GPROC2 and the TDM highway.
GSM-100-333 GPROC2
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W07-O
GMR-04
233
GPROC2 module
Figure 2-14 shows a GPROC2 module.
ig.202.rh
ALARM LED (RED)
ACTIVE LED (GREEN)
GREEN LED ON, RED LED =
PROCESSOR RUNNING, NO FAILURES
GREEN LED OFF, RED LED ON =
PROCESSOR HALTED, OR IN RESET
BOTH LEDS ON = PROCESSOR RUNNING,
MODULE IS DISABLED OR OTHER ALARM
DOWN = DISABLE
TTY CONNECTOR
(OPTICALLY ISOLATED TEST PORT)
BACKPLANE
CONNECTOR
Figure 2-14 GPROC2 module
Communication
The GPROC2 communicates with other full-size modules via the MCAP bus, and with
half-size modules (and modules not on the module shelf) via the BSS serial bus.
The LAPD processor and the TDM interface controller communicate via a high-speed
private bus. The private bus arbiter is the interface between the MC68040 address/data
bus and the high-speed private bus.
The parallel port controls output signals to the front panel LEDs, and receives input
signals (via the register ports) from the backplane. These contain:
S Shelf ID.
S Slot ID.
S Backplane type.
S Backplane revision level.
Memory
The GPROC2 module is equipped with 32 Mbytes of DRAM and 1 Mbyte of EPROM.
The EPROM contains the bootstrap code.
GSM-100-333 GPROC2
29 Aug 1997
234
GMR-04
68P02901W07-O
Troubleshooting
and diagnostics
A fully buffered TTY maintenance port is available on the front panel, to which a personal
computer (PC) can be connected. The TTY can be used for monitoring and controlling
software when performing maintenance or troubleshooting.
The maintenance port meets the requirements of the EIA RS232C and ITUTSS V.24
specifications.
The GPROC2 runs on-board self-diagnostics during initial power-up and on command
from the maintenance TTY connection.
Software
Every GPROC2 is identical in terms of hardware; its function depends upon the software
loaded into it.
The processor functions for BSC applications are different from those for an RXCDR
application and are described separately in the following sections.
BSC GPROC2
functions
The GPROC2 performs the following processor functions:
S Message Transfer Protocol (MTP).
S Signalling Connection Control Part (SCCP) State Machine (SSM).
S Radio Resource State Machine (RRSM).
S Cell Resource Machine (CRM).
S Connectionless Manager (CLM).
S Radio Subsystem (RSS).
S Operations and Maintenance System (OMS).
S Maintains a copy of the application code for collocated peripheral modules.
GPROC2 task groups and device types
The processor functions can be grouped into six task groups depending on the software
loaded into a given GPROC2.
When a group of tasks is assigned to a GPROC2, it is considered to be a unique
GPROC2 device type. The exception to this is the code storage facility processor
(CSFP), which is not considered to be a unique device type.
GSM-100-333 GPROC2
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W07-O
GMR-04
235
Table 2-3 shows the device types and task groups:
Table 2-3 GPROC2 device types
GPROC2
device
BSC
task groups
BSC/BTS
interface
Type 0 N/A Motorola
proprietary
Type1 Base Site Control
Processor (BSP)
Link Control
Processor (LCP)
Motorola
proprietary
Type 2 Base Site Control
Processor (BSP)
Link Control
Processor (LCP)
Operations and
Maintenance
Processor (OMP)
Motorola
proprietary
NOTE
A code storage facility processor (CSFP) can also be
equipped.
RXCDR GPROC2
functions
The RXCDR GPROC2 processor functions are similar to the BSC GPROC2s and
comprise:
These processor functions:
S Maintain the switch database for the KSWs.
S Maintain a copy of the application code for collocated peripheral modules.
S Initialize the RXCDR network element.
S Maintain the configuration database.
S Communicate with other network elements via a 64 kbit/s LAPD serial data link.
S Communicate with the OMC via an X.25 link.
S Communicate with the local monitor via a man-machine interface (MMI).
S Communicate with collocated digital modules.
S Handle redundancy between duplicated modules.
S Control operational software downloads to digital highway modules such as MSIs,
KSWs, and XCDRs.
Fault manager
The RXCDR FM communicates with the BSS FM function via the optional transcoder
BSC link (XBL), a dedicated 64 kbit/s channel.
GSM-100-333 GPROC2
29 Aug 1997
236
GMR-04
68P02901W07-O
Switch manager
The SM:
S Makes connections between the terrestrial links on the A interface (MSC to BSS)
and the radio (traffic) channels on the air interface.
S Interacts with the call processing and fault management functions.
S Provides switching functionality for the BSS distributed within the BSC.
Configuration manager
The CM maintains and updates a configuration database which contains all parameters
and operational software currently in use.
Changes to the database are restricted to the highest level password protection, due to
the potential for down time caused by incorrect changes to the configuration database.
GPROC2 diagram
Figure 2-15 shows a block diagram of the GPROC2 module:
Figure 2-15 GPROC2 block diagram
GSM-100-333 KSW
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W07-O
GMR-04
237
KSW
Purpose
The kiloport switch (KSW) module is a time division digital switch, and:
S Performs timeslot interchange for the active TDM highway.
S Communicates with the controlling GPROC via the MCAP bus.
S At a BSC the KSW routes logical channels dynamically, on a per-call basis.
Requirements
The KSW module fits in the following slots in a BSU or RXU shelf assembly:
S L1 for TDM highway B.
S L27 for TDM highway A.
KSW module
Figure 2-16 shows a KSW module:
ig.205.rh
ALARM LED (RED)
ACTIVE LED (GREEN)
DOWN = DISABLE
BACKPLANE
CONNECTOR
Figure 2-16 KSW module
GSM-100-333 KSW
29 Aug 1997
238
GMR-04
68P02901W07-O
Architecture
Refer to the KSW block diagram at the end of this section.
A Motorola MC56001 digital signal processor (DSP) controls the KSW internally. The
DSP:
S Executes port connects between the switchbound TDM highway and the outbound
TDM highway.
S Controls the timeslot interchange (TSI) section via the connection RAM control
section.
S Performs on-line and off-line self diagnostics, including:
Internal (KSW-related) tests.
External (TDM bus-related) tests.
S Controls inbound and outbound multiplexers.
S Processes alarms.
S Updates the dynamic pattern registers.
The DSP communicates via the MCAP bus interface logic, the DSP data/address bus,
and the serial interface logic.
Timing reference
The timing reference section generates various clock signals, timeslot counts, and frame
counts required by other sections of the KSW.
The TDM counters section is an offset counter that adds a fixed offset to the master TDM
timeslot counter.
The GSM counters section contains four separate counters:
S GSM sub-timeslot counter.
S GSM sequence counter.
S GSM timeslot counter.
S GSM frame counter.
Switchbound
TDM interface
structure
The switchbound TDM highway interface consists of a series of multiplexers that are
used to select one of four switchbound highways (numbered 0 to 3). The DSP controls
the switchbound multiplexers via highway control logic.
Switchbound highway 0 and the outbound highway are split into local and remote parts.
Local
The local switchbound highway 0 and local outbound highways are active when the KSW
is communicating with highway interface modules in the same shelf.
GSM-100-333 KSW
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W07-O
GMR-04
239
Remote
The remote switchbound highway 0 and remote outbound highways are active when the
KSW is communicating with highway interface modules in remote shelves. This
effectively extends the TDM bus to multiple shelves. In the remote case, the KSW sends
and receives TDM data to and from a remote KSW Extender (KSWX
R
) in the same shelf
as the KSW.
The remote KSWX
R
communicates via fibre optic links with a local type KSWX
L
in the
remote shelf. Local switchbound highway 0 has a delay circuit which adds a fixed 12
timeslot delay. This delay is equal to the delay associated with the KSWX extension
operation, and keeps the local and remote switchbound highways in phase.
The modules on the TDM bus are:
S DRIM.
S MSI.
S XCDR.
S GPROC/GPROC2.
Expansion
switchbound
highways
Expansion switchbound highway 1, 2 and 3 data originates from highway interface
modules associated with other KSWs. These remote highway interface modules send
and receive data between their respective KSWs. Each KSW re-transmits data received
on its switchbound highway 0 (local or remote) to other KSWs via dedicated KSWX
E
fibre
optic links.
Data is received on switchbound highways 1, 2 and 3 of remote KSWs. This architecture
results in each KSW receiving data from all 1024 timeslots of all expansion highways
connected to the KSW and retransmitting that data on the 1024 timeslots associated with
its own highway interface modules to the other KSWs.
The DSP can write data to any of the four switchbound highways. This allows known
static data patterns to be inserted into any switchbound timeslot, and data can be looped
back to switchbound highway 0 from the TSI section, enabling self diagnostics. When the
KSW is performing self diagnostics, data is compared at two highway monitors, one
before the TSI section and one after the TSI section.
Timeslot
interchange (TSI)
The TSI section is the main section of the KSW. It switches data from a given timeslot on
one of the four switchbound TDM highways to a given timeslot on the outbound TDM
highway. The TSI section consists of four independent TSI blocks operating in parallel to
support sub-rate switching. Each TSI block switches 16 kbit/s of data.
If a particular timeslot is associated with a 64 kbit/s channel, then one TSI block contains
the same path connection for that timeslot. Conversely, if a timeslot is associated with
two 32 kbit/s channels, two TSIs contain a similar path connection and the other two
contain a different path connection. When a timeslot contains four 16 kbit/s channels,
each TSI section has a different path connection.
Connection RAM
control
The connection RAM control is the interface between the DSP and the TSI section. The
connection RAM control isolates the DSP from strict timing constraints associated with
the TSI section.
GSM-100-333 KSW
29 Aug 1997
240
GMR-04
68P02901W07-O
Three-party
conference (TPC)
memory
After traffic data leaves the TSIs, it is sent to either the TSI mode multiplexer, which
selects full-rate or sub-rate switching as required, or to the three party conference (TPC)
memory section. The TPC memory operates in real time allowing the KSW to support
any number of three party conference calls.
Fixed/dynamic
pattern registers
The fixed/dynamic pattern registers can generate fixed patterns and a variety of dynamic
patterns that generate tones, data sequences, or dynamic test patterns.
Outbound
selection MUX
The outbound selection multiplexer selects the correct source data to be sent to the
outbound highway. Although referred to as a multiplexer, this section does not contain a
physical multiplexer. Instead, multiplexing is implemented by connecting the outputs of all
the possible data sources together and selectively enabling one of these sources during
each timeslot.
After data is sent from the outbound selection multiplexer, a parity bit is added to the data
before it is placed on the outbound TDM highway. Output from the outbound multiplexer
is sent directly to the remote outbound highway, but data for the local outbound highway
is sent through a delay circuit to keep the remote and local outbound highways in phase.
This delay is 12 timeslots.
Highway monitor
The KSW has two highway monitor sections:
S The switchbound monitor logic which selectively monitors one of the four
switchbound TDM highways at the inputs of the TSI section.
S The outbound monitor logic which monitors the output of the outbound selection
MUX.
The DSP uses these monitors for monitoring inbound and outbound data on any timeslot.
When used in conjunction with the various DSP controlled data sources and
fixed/dynamic pattern selection, these monitors allow the KSW to perform extensive self
diagnostics on the TSI section.
Watchdog timer
The watchdog timer ensures that the DSP is functioning normally. The DSP writes to a
memory address that resets the watchdog timer, ensuring that it does not time out. If the
DSP stops running, the watchdog timer times out and causes the red LED on the front
panel to illuminate. An interrupt is also generated and sent to the GPROC via the MCAP
bus. If a DSP fails, the TSI section of the KSW still switches data, but no new path
connections are implemented. This results in existing calls being held while the system is
reconfigured around the failed KSW.
GSM-100-333 KSW
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W07-O
GMR-04
241
Interrupt logic
The interrupt logic generates two interrupts to the DSP:
S Interrupt-A prompts the DSP to perform certain periodic tasks such as updating
the watchdog timer and the dynamic pattern registers.
S Interrupt-B, processes alarms such as clock and reference alarms, and parity
alarms.
Serial interface
logic
The serial interface logic supports the TTY interface. This interface is connected to a
dedicated backplane connector port. This port is a buffered RS232 type. The TTY can be
used to control the KSW, monitor KSW operation status, and support KSW diagnostics.
KSW switching
The usable switching capacity of each KSW depends on site hardware and software
configurations because certain modules require a number of ports for their own use. The
KSW is controlled by the local GPROC via the MCAP bus.
Each KSW can switch connections between 1024 inputs and 1024 outputs. However,
total switching capacity can be expanded by interconnecting up to three additional KSWs
via KSWXs.
In this configuration, each KSW has the ability to switch data between
2048 (2 x 1024), 3072 (3 x 1024) or 4096 (4 x 1024) 64 kbit/s input ports and its 1024
outbound ports. Each KSW has access to all 2, 3 or 4 switchbound highways, although
each KSW only drives its own 1024 port outbound TDM highway.
KSW in a BSC
KSW switching at the BSC is variable. Physical channel mapping on the A interface is
performed for each call, and at every handover.
KSW in a RXCDR
KSW switching in an RXU shelf is fixed. It provides one to one physical mapping
between the traffic to and from the BSC and the traffic to and from the MSC.
GSM-100-333 KSW
29 Aug 1997
242
GMR-04
68P02901W07-O
KSW diagram
Figure 2-17 shows a block diagram of the KSW module:
Figure 2-17 KSW block diagram
GSM-100-333 KSW
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W07-O
GMR-04
243
Interconnected
KSWs
Figure 2-18 shows three interconnected KSWs:

Figure 2-18 KSW interconnection diagram
GSM-100-333 MSI
29 Aug 1997
244
GMR-04
68P02901W07-O
MSI
Purpose
The Multiple Serial Interface (MSI) module drives two separate interface lines to and from
the TDM bus.
MSI module
The MSI module can drive two European 2.048 Mbit/s (E1) data lines.
One of the E1 lines is referred to as group A, the other E1 line is known as group B.
The E1 lines can come from either:
S A balanced-line interconnect board (BIB).
S Type 43 (T43) interconnect board.
The MSI can also extract the clock synchronization from the E1 line data stream.
An RS232 maintenance port, to which a personal computer (PC) can be connected for
testing and debugging, is provided at the top of the BSU or RXU shelf.
Terminology
One wire pair (balanced or unbalanced) equals one E1 serial data stream.
Two E1 serial data streams (transmit and receive) equal one E1 line.
Requirements
The MSI module is fitted in:
S Slots L6 to L17 of the BSU shelf assembly.
S Slots L6 to L10 of the RXU shelf assembly.
An MSI, MSI2, XCDR or GDP must be located in at least one of the BSU locations below
for BSC initialization purposes.
S Shelf 0 slot 16 (Software communicates via either group A or group B)
S Shelf 0 slot 14 (Software communicates via group A)
S Shelf 1 (if second BSU in BSC) slot 16 (Software communicates via group A)
An RXU initialization uses slot 10 instead of slot 16, and slot 8 instead of slot 14.
GSM-100-333 MSI
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W07-O
GMR-04
245
MSI module
Figure 2-19 shows an MSI module:
ALARM LED (RED)
ACTIVE LED (GREEN)
DOWN = DISABLE
BACKPLANE
CONNECTOR
Figure 2-19 MSI module
General features
The MSI converts signals from the E1 lines from serial format to the parallel format that
the TDM highway requires, and converts signals transmitted to the E1 lines from parallel
to serial. The MSI also provides surge protection and frame alignment.
Each serial line can carry the following to and from the active TDM highway in the BSU:
S One 64 kbit/s channel for synchronization.
S One 64 kbit/s channel for control signalling.
S Thirty 64 kbit/s channels that can each be used as follows:
Traffic (four 16 kbit/s compressed voice/data channels each).
Additional control channels.
If all 30 channels are allocated to traffic, 120 traffic channels are possible.
These channels can be placed in any of the 1024 channels on the TDM highway under
the control of the GPROC/GPROC2.
The interfaces provided by MSIs depend upon the transcoding location:
S If transcoding is integrated with the BSC, the MSI provides the BSC to BTS
interface.
S If transcoding is not integrated with the BSC, the MSI provides the RXCDR to BSC
and BSC to BTS interfaces.
GSM-100-333 MSI
29 Aug 1997
246
GMR-04
68P02901W07-O
Transcoded
environment
The MSI can support 240 x 16 kbit/s traffic channels in a transcoded environment, as
defined by GSM. To accomplish this, four 16 kbit/s channels are multiplexed into one 64
kbit/s timeslot, as shown in the following example:
30 64 kbit/s timeslots of a serial data stream
x 4 Submultiplexed 16 kbit/s traffic channels
x 2 E1 lines
= 240 16 kbit/s traffic channels
Functional
description
Refer to the MSI block diagram at the end of this section.
MC68000 processor
A Motorola MC68000 processor, operating at 8 MHz, controls:
S The E1 line to TDM interface function.
S A multiplexer that selects the extracted clock to be routed to the GCLK.
The processor reports the following to the controlling GPROC on the MCAP bus:
S Extracted clock failures.
S Frame alignment errors.
S Multiframe alignment errors.
S Bipolar violations.
S CRC4 errors.
S Transmit or receive failures.
EPROM
The EPROM contains 128 kbytes of bootstrap program code. At power-up the bootstrap
program sends a request message to the GPROC to download the MSI operating
program into the SRAM. The SRAM also stores program variables, and can be
permanently saved in EEPROM.
E1 line to TDM interface circuits
There are two identical E1 lines to TDM interface circuits on the MSI module. This
functional description applies to both.
The TDM interface section converts incoming data from E1 line serial to TDM parallel.
The two E1 lines are interleaved onto the TDM bus in groups of two and are spaced out
by 32 timeslots. The sequence is as follows:
S Group A timeslot 0, group B timeslot 0.
Outgoing traffic data is converted from parallel to serial. The serial data is then sent to
the E1 line transmitter which converts it to standard E1 line levels. The E1 line data is
then HDB3 and CRC4 encoded. After encoding, the data is routed to the loopback
multiplexer and to a level converter. The level converter converts from split-phase, TTL
level unipolar to bipolar.
GSM-100-333 MSI
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W07-O
GMR-04
247
Table 2-4 illustrates the E1 line to TDM Interface circuit actions:
Table 2-4 TDM interface circuit actions
Stage Action
1 The system matches impedance and isolates the signal
2 The E1 line receive signal is applied to a level converter
3 The level converter converts the signal from bipolar to split-phase TTL level
unipolar
4 The signal passes to the HDB3 decoder and clock extraction circuit
5 The signal goes through a crosspoint switch for:
S Diagnostic purposes.
S Distance measurements.
S Drop and insert feature utilization.
The impedance matching circuits consist of isolation transformers and Zener diodes,
which:
S Impedance match the two sides of the interface.
S Provide secondary surge protection from high voltage transients, such as lightning
strikes, which may come down the E1 lines.
The drop and insert feature allows a timeslot coming in on group A, which is meant for
another BTS, to be routed back out on group B.
Clock extraction
The clock extraction section extracts the E1 clocks, to which the entire site (either BTS or
BSC) can be synchronized. The two extracted clocks are routed to a multiplexer that
selects which clock signal (if any) is routed to the GCLK.
Frame decoding
The HDB3 and CRC4 decoding section performs frame decoding according to CCITT
recommendation G.704 for digital multiplex equipment.
GSM-100-333 MSI
29 Aug 1997
248
GMR-04
68P02901W07-O
MSI diagram
Figure 2-20 shows a block diagram of the MSI module.
Figure 2-20 MSI block diagram
GSM-100-333 MSI-2
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W07-O
GMR-04
249
MSI-2
Purpose
The Multiple Serial Interface (MSI-2) module is the interface between the inter-site
communication lines and the TDM highway.
MSI-2 module
The MSI-2 module is a software configured board and has the following drive capability:
S North American 1.544 Mbit/s (T1).
S European 2.048 Mbit/s (E1).
S Japanese 1.544 Mbit/s (JT1).
One of the E1/T1/JT1 lines is referred to as group A, the other E1/T1/JT1 line is known
as group B.
The E1/T1/JT1 lines are connected at the interconnect panel via either:
S A balanced-line interconnect board (BIB).
S Type 43 (T43) interconnect board.
The MSI-2 can also extract the clock synchronization data from the E1/T1/JT1 line data
stream in order to phase lock the GCLK to the line.
An RS232 maintenance port, to which a personal computer (PC) can be connected for
testing and debugging, is provided at the top of the BSU or RXU shelf.
Terminology
One wire pair (balanced or unbalanced) equals one E1/T1/JT1 serial data stream.
Two E1/T1/JT1 serial data streams (transmit and receive) equal one E1/T1/JT1 line.
Requirements
The MSI-2 module is fitted in:
S Slots L6 to L17 of the BSU shelf assembly.
S Slots L6 to L10 of the RXU shelf assembly.
An MSI, MSI-2, XCDR or GDP must be located in at least one of the BSU locations
below for BSC initialization purposes.
GSM-100-333 MSI-2
29 Aug 1997
250
GMR-04
68P02901W07-O
MSI-2 module
Figure 2-21 shows an MSI-2 module:
ALARM LED (RED)
ACTIVE LED (GREEN)
DOWN = DISABLE
BACKPLANE
CONNECTOR
Figure 2-21 MSI-2 module
General features
The MSI-2 converts signals from the E1/T1/JT1 lines from serial format to the parallel
format that the TDM highway requires, and converts signals transmitted to the E1/T1/JT1
lines from parallel to serial.
E1 Data
S One 64 kbit/s timeslot for synchronization.
S One 64 kbit/s timeslot for control signalling.
S Thirty 64 kbit/s timeslots that can each be used as follows:
Additional control timeslots.
If all 30 timeslots are allocated to traffic, 120 traffic channels are possible.
T1 Data
S Twenty-four 64 kbit/s timeslots that can each be used as follows:
Additional control timeslots.
If all 24 timeslots are allocated to traffic, 96 traffic channels are possible.
GSM-100-333 MSI-2
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W07-O
GMR-04
251
Transcoded
environment (E1)
The MSI-2 can support 240 x 16 kbit/s traffic timeslots in a transcoded environment, as
defined by GSM. To accomplish this, four 16 kbit/s timeslots are multiplexed into one 64
x 4 Submultiplexed 16 kbit/s traffic timeslots
x 2 E1 lines
= 240 16 kbit/s traffic timeslots
Transcoded
environment
(T1/JT1)
The MSI-2 can support 192 x 16 kbit/s traffic timeslots in a transcoded environment, as
defined by GSM. To accomplish this, four 16 kbit/s timeslots are multiplexed into one 64
x 4 Submultiplexed 16 kbit/s traffic timeslots
x 2 T1/JT1 lines
= 192 16 kbit/s traffic timeslots
Functional
description
Refer to the MSI-2 block diagram at the end of this section.
MC68302 processor
A Motorola MC68302 processor, operating at 16.384 MHz, controls:
S The E1/T1/JT1 line to TDM interface function.
S A multiplexer that selects the extracted clock signal to be routed to the GCLK.
The processor reports the following to the controlling GPROC/GPROC2 on the MCAP
bus:
S Extracted clock failures.
S Frame alignment errors.
S Multiframe alignment errors.
S Bit errors.
S Transmit or receive failures.
EPROM
The EPROM contains 64 kbytes of bootstrap program code memory, 256 kbytes of
nonvolatile operational code memory (Flash EPROM) and 128 kbytes of volatile program
and data memory (SRAM). At power-up the bootstrap program sends a request message
to the GPROC/GPROC2 to download the MSI2s operating program into the SRAM.
GSM-100-333 MSI-2
29 Aug 1997
252
GMR-04
68P02901W07-O
E1/T1/JT1 line to TDM interface circuits
There are two identical E1/T1/JT1 line to TDM interface circuits on the MSI-2 module.
This functional description applies to both.
The TDM interface section converts incoming data from E1/T1/JT1 line from serial to
TDM parallel.
E1 lines are interleaved onto the TDM bus in groups of two and are spaced out by 32
timeslots. The sequence is as follows:
..........
T1/JT1 lines are interleaved onto the TDM bus in groups of two and are spaced out by 24
timeslots. The sequence is as follows:
..........
Outgoing traffic data is converted from parallel to serial. The serial data is then sent to
the E1/T1/JT1 line transmitter which converts it to standard E1/T1/JT1 line levels.
E1/T1/JT1 data uses Alternate Mark Inversion (AMI) format and line encoding/error
checking can be used.
Table 2-5 gives details on line encoding and error checking available for use with E1, T1
and JT1 lines.
Table 2-5 Line encoding & error checking information
Line format Line Encoding Error Checking
E1 HDB3 CRC4
T1/JT1 B8ZS CRC6
After encoding, the data is routed to the loopback multiplexer and to a level converter.
The level converter converts from split-phase, TTL level unipolar to bipolar.
GSM-100-333 MSI-2
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W07-O
GMR-04
253
Table 2-6 illustrates the E1/T1/JT1 line to TDM Interface circuit actions:
Table 2-6 Line to TDM interface circuit actions
Stage Action
1 The system matches impedance and isolates the signal
2 The E1/T1/JT1 line receive signal is applied to a level converter
3 The level converter converts the signal from bipolar to split-phase TTL level
unipolar
4 The signal passes to the HDB3 decoder (E1) or B8ZS decoder (T1) and clock
extraction circuit
5 The signal goes through a crosspoint switch for:
S Diagnostic purposes.
S Distance measurements.
S Drop and insert feature utilization.
The drop and insert feature allows a timeslot coming in on group A, which is meant for
another BTS, to be routed back out on group B.
Clock extraction
The clock extraction section extracts the E1/T1/JT1 clocks, to which the entire site (either
BTS or BSC) can be synchronized. In the case of T1/JT1, the extracted clock is fed
through a clock adaptor to convert the 1.544 MHz signal to a 2.048 MHz signal. The two
extracted clocks are routed to a multiplexer that selects which clock signal (if any) is
routed to the GCLK.
Frame decoding
The HDB3 (E1) and B8ZS (T1) decoding section performs frame decoding according to
CCITT recommendation G.704 for digital multiplex equipment.
GSM-100-333 MSI-2
29 Aug 1997
254
GMR-04
68P02901W07-O
MSI-2 diagram
Figure 2-22 shows a block diagram of the MSI-2 module.
Figure 2-22 MSI-2 block diagram
GSM-100-333 XCDR
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W07-O
GMR-04
255
XCDR
Purpose
The transcoder (XCDR) module:
S Interfaces an E1/T1 serial line to the internal cabinet TDM highway, which is in a
parallel format.
S Transcodes thirty 64 kbit/s channels into 120 compressed voice/data channels, in
accordance with the GSM recommendations:
Channel zero of each E1/T1 line is reserved for synchronization.
Channel sixteen is reserved for link control signalling.
If the BSC performs the transcoding function, XCDRs interface the BSU or RXU to the
MSC in place of MSI modules.
The XCDR transcodes the remaining 30 channels into 120 x 16 kbit/s compressed
channels. The synchronization and signalling channels and the 120 compressed
voice/data channels are applied to the active TDM highway in the BSU or RXU.
These channels can be placed in any of the 1024 channels on the TDM highway under
control of the GPROC/GPROC2.
Terminology
One wire pair (balanced or unbalanced) equals one E1/T1 serial data stream.
Two E1/T1 serial data streams (transmit and receive) equal one E1/T1 line.
Requirements
The XCDR module is fitted in:
S Slots L6 to L24 (maximum 19 modules) in the RXU shelf assembly.
GSM-100-333 XCDR
29 Aug 1997
256
GMR-04
68P02901W07-O
XCDR module
Figure 2-23 shows an XCDR module:
ALARM LED (RED)
ACTIVE LED (GREEN)
DOWN = DISABLE
BACKPLANE
CONNECTOR
Figure 2-23 XCDR module
Brief description
Refer to the XCDR block diagram at the end of this section.
The XCDR module contains a digital signal processor (DSP) unit that performs:
The speech transcoder bi-directionally interfaces the 64 kbit/s E1/T1 line in the land
network to the 13 kbit/s vocoder format used on the air interface.
Signalling channels are passed straight through the transcoder.
Architecture
The XCDR module contains the following major systems:
S Processor system.
S DSP system.
S Line interface system.
S Switching system.
S MCAP interface system.
S TDM interface system.
GSM-100-333 XCDR
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W07-O
GMR-04
257
Processor
The main component of the processor system is the microcontroller unit (MCU), which:
S Controls and interfaces the five major systems (listed below) on the XCDR
module.
S A watchdog timer.
S 16 kbytes of RAM.
S 64 kbytes of EEPROM.
S 1 kbyte of dual port RAM.
DSP
The DSP system consists of:
S 30 mask programmed DSP units.
S A subrate multiplexer.
S A serial port timing generator.
S A parallel host interface.
Each DSP unit has its own internal memory (2 kbytes of RAM and 12 kbytes of ROM)
and serial interface. The DSP units are arranged into four banks (three banks of eight
and one bank of six).
The serial port timing generator keeps all DSPs synchronized. The parallel host interface
is used to transfer status and control data between the MCU and DSP units.
Subrate
multiplexer
modes
The subrate multiplexer can operate in three modes. Table 2-7 lists the modes and
details what happens.
Table 2-7 Subrate multiplexer modes
Mode Functions
DSP loop back The DSP output is logically connected to its input, enabling a self
test function.
16 kbytes
multiplexed
Each DSP receives 16 bits of data:
The first 8 bits are from a 16 kbytes/s subrate channel from the
TDM highway Two bits at a time are expanded into PCM.
The last eight bits are from the E1/T1 line data stream. The PCM
is processed into 16 kbit/s TRAU frames.
64 kbytes
non-multiplexed
The first eight bits are from the TDM bus, and are passed to the
E1/T1 line.
The second eight bits are from the E1/T1 line, and are passed to
the TDM bus.
GSM-100-333 XCDR
29 Aug 1997
258
GMR-04
68P02901W07-O
Line interface
The line interface system performs:
which may come down the E1/T1 lines.
The impedance matching circuit consists of isolation transformers and Zener diodes.
After impedance matching and isolation the E1/T1 line receive signal is applied to a level
converter that converts the signal from bipolar to split-phase TTL level unipolar.
After level conversion the received E1/T1 line data is sent to the clock extraction circuit
and a HDB3 decoder. The clock extraction section extracts the E1/T1 clock to which all
BSU/RXU shelves can be synchronized. The HDB3/CRC4 decoding section performs
frame decoding law CCITT recommendation G.704 for digital multiplex equipment. Traffic
is then routed to the switching system.
Switching
The switching system consist of two separate digital switches, each performing a
different function.
S The first switch has the E1/T1 line data stream and TDM data streams passing
through it.
S The second switch is used as an interface between the processor section and the
framer of the line interface system.
MCAP interface
The MCAP interface system supports two redundant MCAP buses to the XCDR. The
XCDR communicates with the GPROC in the same manner as all other full-size
modules.
TDM interface
GSM-100-333 XCDR
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W07-O
GMR-04
259
XCDR diagram
Figure 2-24 shows a block diagram of the XCDR module:
Figure 2-24 XCDR block diagram
GSM-100-333 GDP
29 Aug 1997
260
GMR-04
68P02901W07-O
GDP
Purpose
The Generic DSP Processor (GDP) module can be used as an enhanced XCDR, with
additional features, including Enhanced Full Rate (EFR) speech and uplink/downlink
audio volume control. The GDP DSP firmware is downloadable whereas the XCDR
DSP firmware is mask programmed.
The description in the following pages assumes the GDP is being used as an enhanced
XCDR.
The GDP module can only be used with systems running GSR3 or later
releases, as this contains the necessary software support to allow operation.
For a BSC which will operate the EFR speech option, all transcoder boards it
connects to must be GDP, not XCDR.
The GDP has two configured types, one for E1 serial line use and one for T1
serial line use. Each GDP type has a different framer/transceiver with
accompanying crystal oscillator, and two associated resistors. This means that
a GDP used for E1 serial line use cannot be used for T1, and a GDP used for
T1 serial line use cannot be used for E1.
NOTE
The GDP module:
S Provides the transcoding interface to the MSC. The GDP module is located at the
RXCDR, or at a BSC where transcoding is integrated within the BSC.
S Interfaces an E1/T1 serial line to the internal cabinet TDM highway, which is in a
parallel format.
S Transcodes thirty E1(twenty-four T1) 64 kbit/s channels, inserting them as part of
120 E1 (96 T1) compressed voice/data channels, in accordance with the GSM
recommendations:
Channel zero of each E1 line is reserved for synchronization.
Channel sixteen of each E1 line is reserved for link control signalling.
The 30 remaining E1 channels are transcoded.
Each GDP supports thirty compressed voice and data channels, using 15 DSPs. These
channels, and the synchronization and link control signalling channels, can be placed in
any of the 1024 channels on the TDM highway under control of the GPROC/GPROC2.
Terminology
One wire pair (balanced or unbalanced) equals one E1/T1 serial data stream.
Two E1/T1 serial data streams (transmit and receive) equal one E1/T1 line.
GSM-100-333 GDP
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W07-O
GMR-04
261
Requirements
The GDP module is fitted in:
S Slots L6 to L24 (maximum 19 modules) in the RXU shelf assembly.
GDP module
Figure 2-25 shows a GDP module:
ALARM LED (RED)
ACTIVE LED (GREEN)
DOWN = DISABLE
BACKPLANE
CONNECTOR
Figure 2-25 GDP module
Brief description
Refer to the GDP block diagram at the end of this section.
The GDP module contains a digital signal processor (DSP) unit that performs:
The speech transcoder bi-directionally interfaces the 64 kbit/s E1/T1 line in the land
network to the 13 kbit/s vocoder format used on the air interface.
Signalling channels are passed straight through the transcoder.
GSM-100-333 GDP
29 Aug 1997
262
GMR-04
68P02901W07-O
Architecture
The GDP module contains the following major systems:
S MCU subsystem.
S DSP subsystem.
S E1/T1 Line interface.
S Digital crosspoint switch.
S MCAP interface.
S TDM interface.
MCU subsystem
The main component of the processor system is the microcontroller unit (MCU), which:
S Controls and interfaces the other major systems on the GDP module.
S A watchdog timer.
S 256 kbytes of RAM.
S 512 kbytes of Flash EPROM.
S 1 kbyte of dual port RAM for MCAP messaging.
S 1 kbyte of dual port RAM for TDM interface.
DSP subsystem
The DSP subsystem consists of 15 identical blocks each with:
S One 80 MHz DSP processor
S 128k x 24 dedicated SRAM for program and data storage.
S Two Enhanced Synchronous Serial Interfaces (ESSIs).
S On-board phase-locked loops to multiply input from subsystem 16.384 MHz clock.
DSP firmware is downloadable. The MCU uses one of its Serial Communications
Controllers (SCC1) to connect to the SCI of all DSPs, for control, monitoring and
download purposes. All the ESSI signals to the DSPs are buffered by tristate devices.
Subrate
multiplexer
modes
There is a subrate multiplexer within the serial data formatter, converting data from the
DSP subsystem ESSI format to the digital crosspoint switch ST bus format.
The subrate multiplexer can operate in three modes.
GSM-100-333 GDP
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W07-O
GMR-04
263
Table 2-8 lists the subrate multiplexer modes and shows what happens:
Table 2-8 Multiplexer modes
Mode Functions
DSP loop back
The DSP output is logically connected to its input, enabling a self
test function.
16 kbytes
multiplexed
The first 8 bits are from a 16 kbytes/s subrate channel from the
TDM highway Two bits at a time are expanded into PCM.
The last eight bits are from the E1/T1 line data stream. The PCM
is processed into 16 kbit/s TRAU frames.
64 kbytes
non-multiplexed
The first eight bits are from the TDM bus, and are passed to the
E1/T1 line.
The second eight bits are from the E1/T1 line, and are passed to
the TDM bus.
E1/T1 Line
interface
The line interface system performs:
which may come down the E1/T1 lines.
The impedance matching circuit consists of isolation transformers and Zener diodes.
After impedance matching and isolation the E1/T1 line receive signal is applied to a level
converter that converts the signal from bipolar to split-phase TTL level unipolar.
After level conversion the received E1/T1 line data is sent to the clock extraction circuit
and a decoder. The clock extraction section extracts the E1/T1 clock to which all
BSU/RXU shelves can be synchronized. The decoding section performs frame decoding
law CCITT recommendation G.704 for digital multiplex equipment. Traffic is then routed
to the switching system.
CRC-4 Error
checking
A GDP module configured for use with an E1 serial line supports CRC-4 error checking.
This is set by default to the on state 0. All associated switches (MSCs) must also have
CRC-4 error checking set to the on state, so allowing communication across the
A-interface
To check if the GDP board CRC-4 state is set, use the MMS_config_type CM database
command.
disp_element MMS_config_type <location>
Refer to Technical Description: BSS Command Reference (GSM-100-321) for
information on the above CM database command.
To ensure the correct setting of CRC-4 error checking at the MSC, consult the vendor
supplied equipment manual.
GSM-100-333 GDP
29 Aug 1997
264
GMR-04
68P02901W07-O
Digital
crosspoint
switch
The switching system consist of a digital switch, which performs the following functions:.

S Transmission of E1/T1 line data stream and TDM data streams.
S Connection between the processor section and the E1/T1 line interface system.
MCAP interface
The MCAP interface system supports two redundant MCAP buses to the GDP. The
GDP communicates with the GPROC2 in the same manner as all other full-size modules.
TDM interface
GSM-100-333 GDP
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W07-O
GMR-04
265
GDP diagram
Figure 2-26 shows a block diagram of the GDP module:
Figure 2-26 GDP block diagram
GSM-100-333 NVM board description
29 Aug 1997
266
GMR-04
68P02901W07-O
NVM board description
Purpose of the
NVM board
The NVM board provides the BSC or RXCDR with an improved recovery facility following
a total power loss.
In current BSC and RXCDR systems, a total power loss causes configuration data held
at the site to be lost. This data is normally recovered by downloading from the OMC-R
once power is restored.
If an NVM board is installed, data is retrieved from the NVM board rather than from the
OMC-R during recovery from a total power loss.
Mechanical
design
The NVM board is a full height digital board, designed for installation in the BSU cage 0
of a BSC, or the RXU cage 0 of the RXCDR.
Figure 2-27 shows the NVM board in detail.
BACKPLANE
CONNECTOR
FRONT PANEL
NVM BOARD
STATUS LEDs
NVM BOARD
RESET/DISABLE
SWITCH
PCMCIA CARD
STATUS LEDs
PCMCIA CARD
SLOTS
PCMCIA CARD SWAP
SWITCH
EJECT BUTTON
Figure 2-27 The NVM board
The PCMCIA cards used with the NVM board are NOT the same type as used
in M-Cell equipment.
NOTE
GSM-100-333 NVM board description
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W07-O
GMR-04
267
Functional
description
Software ascertains if the NVM board is present during RAM initialization of a BSC or
RXCDR site. If the board is present, software begins loading objects to the NVM board. If
the board is not present then the software continues to check for its existence. A low
priority software task is responsible for loading the NVM board with a copy of the BSS
software objects that currently reside on the master GPROC. The transfer is achieved via
the MCAP bus.
Two synchronized copies of the database are stored. This ensures that if a power outage
occurs during loading to the NVM board, then a usable copy of the database is still
available. Only one copy is updated at a time, and is marked as the current version when
the update is complete.
The object list and the database on the NVM board and the master GPROC are audited
at regular intervals. If any differences between these objects on the NVM board and the
master GPROC are detected, the NVM board is updated automatically from the master
GPROC.
During ROM initialization, the NVM board is used as a BSS software source only if all
GPROCs at the site have no BSS software (for example, after restoration of power
following a power failure). If the NVM board is not present, or fails during BSS software
crossload to the master GPROC, ROM initialization continues as normal.
The NVM board can only be used with systems running GSR5 or later
releases. These releases contain the necessary software support to allow
operation.
NOTE
Interrogating the
NVM board
Object header information of the objects stored on the NVM board can be viewed using
the following EMON command from an LMT at the master GPROC:
nvm objects
Table 2-9 shows the possible output string results of using the above EMON command,
depending on the configuration of the BSU or RXU cage.
Table 2-9 EMON command results, depending on configuration
Configuration Output String
NVM
present?
PCMCIA card
present?
BSS code
objects
present?
No NVM Board not present or
not available
Yes No PCMCIA Card not present
or not available
Yes Yes No No load information
available
Yes Yes Yes Object headers of objects
present on the PCMCIA card are
displayed.
GSM-100-333 Half-size modules
29 Aug 1997
268
GMR-04
68P02901W07-O
Half-size modules
Introduction
Half-size digital modules provide interface extension for the full-size modules, enabling
unit interconnection (for example BSU to BSU, RXU to RXU) and external alarm
connection.
The modules fit into slots in the upper card cage of a BSU or RXU shelf. The slots are
numbered, right to left, from U0 to U28.
The following sections describe the half-size modules that can be mounted in a BSU or
RXU.
The quantity fitted depends upon the specific configuration of the BSU or RXU.
The modules
The following half-size modules are mounted in a BSU or RXU shelf:
Do not fit a digital module in any equipment for which it is not suitable.
CAUTION
S Battery back up board (BBBX).
S Clock extender (CLKX).
S Digital radio interface extender (DRIX).
S Kiloport switch extender (KSWX).
S Double kiloport switch extender (DSWX).
S Local area network extender (LANX).
S Parallel interface extender (PIX).
GSM-100-333 BBBX
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W07-O
GMR-04
269
BBBX
Purpose
If the main supply fails, the battery back up board (BBBX) provides a back up supply of
+5 V at 8 A.
The +5 V DRAM battery back up supply maintains power to the:
S Optical circuit on the LANX module.
S DRAM memory located on the GPROC.
Normally, the PSMs supply +5 V DRAM voltage to the BSU or RXU backplane. If the
PSMs fail to deliver this due to cabinet input power failure or PSM failure, the BBBX
converts an external back up supply to a fused +5 V DRAM supply.
Requirements
The BBBX module is normally positioned in slots U16, U17 or U18 of the BSU or RXU
shelf assembly, but can be fitted in any spare half-size card slot.
All connections are made at the front of the module.
BBBX module
Figure 2-28 shows a BBBX module:
CONNECTOR PC1 IS CABLED TO A12
ON THE DIGITAL CAGE BACKPLANE
CONNECTOR PC2 IS CABLED TO TOP
OF CABINET FOR CONNECTION TO PC4
ON THE DAB AND BATT BACKUP
Figure 2-28 BBBX module
GSM-100-333 BBBX
29 Aug 1997
270
GMR-04
68P02901W07-O
BBBX diagram
Figure 2-29 shows a block diagram of the BBBX:
Figure 2-29 BBBX block diagram
GSM-100-333 CLKX
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W07-O
GMR-04
271
CLKX
Purpose
Laser radiation could be emitted when fibre optic cables are disconnected.
Do not look directly into beams with or without the use of any optical aids.
Radiation can come from either the data in/out connectors or unterminated
fibre optic cables connected to data in/out connectors.
WARNING
The clock extender (CLKX) module optically distributes the clock and reference signals
generated by the GCLK in the parent shelf to all other shelves at a site.
The extended clock signals are received by a KSWX
L
in the remote BSU/RXU.
Requirements
The CLKX module is fitted in slots U2 to U7 of the BSU or RXU shelf assembly.
A maximum of six remote shelves can be supported.
In a multishelf site, the shelf containing the GCLK must also receive its clocks via a
CLKX and a KSWX
L
to maintain synchronization integrity.
Fibre optic cables extending clock reference signals, from the parent shelf to all other
shelves at a site, must be of the same length to maintain site synchronization integrity.
GCLK module
Figure 2-30 shows a CLKX module:
FIBRE OPTIC CLOCK
OUTPUTS TO LOCAL
KSWXs
BACKPLANE
CONNECTOR
Figure 2-30 CLKX module
GSM-100-333 CLKX
29 Aug 1997
272
GMR-04
68P02901W07-O
CLKX diagram
Figure 2-31 shows a block diagram of the CLKX module:
Figure 2-31 CLKX block diagram
GSM-100-333 DSWX
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W07-O
GMR-04
273
DSWX
Purpose
This section provides information relevant to DSWX performance when the
module is installed retrospectively in a BSSC2 installation.
NOTE
The DSWX uses an LED as the fibre optic light source, not a laser.
The DSWX fibre optics are therefore not hazardous. Since other
modules in the cabinet may emit hazardous laser radiation when fibre
optic cables are disconnected, to eliminate the possibility of mistakes
do not look directly into any beams with or without the use of optical
aids. Radiation can come from either the data in/out connectors or
unterminated fibre optic cables connected to data in/out connectors.
WARNING
The double kiloport switch extender (DSWX) module extends the 1024/2048 ports of a
KSW/DSW2 respectively, in one BSU or RXU type cage to the TDM highways in another
BSU or RXU type cage. It is used when the number of required peripherals exceeds the
capacity of a BSU or RXU shelf.
S A DSWX in expansion mode (DSWX
E
) connects the KSW/DSW2 to the
KSW/DSW2 in a another BSU or RXU type cage.
S A DSWX in remote transmit mode (DSWX
R
) accepts the highway data from a
KSW/DSW2 and sends it to a local receiver.
S A DSWX in local receive mode (DSWX
L
) accepts the highway data and drives the
TDM bus in the local BSU or RXU, and also provides a clock reference in
multishelf configurations.
Although a KSW/DSW2 is located in a particular BSU/RXU, it is logically connected to
the TDM bus in that BSU/RXU and to the TDM buses in up to 13 other shelves, which it
can be driving. For each BSU or RXU that a KSW/DSW2 is driving, two KSWXs/DSWXs
are required; one acting as a remote transmitter attached to the KSW/DSW2, the other
as a local receiver attached to the TDM highway in the remote shelf.
Requirements
The DSWX is fitted in slots U0 to U9 and slots U21 to U28 of the BSU or RXU type shelf
assembly, with the following limitations:
S DSWX
R
must be fitted in slots U2 to U6 and U24 to U28.
S DSWX
L
must be fitted in slots U0 and U1.
S DSWX
E
The fibre optic cables used to extend/expand the TDM highway from one BSU/RXU to
another BSU/RXU must be of the same length. This allows correct operation of the TDM
highway to be maintained.
GSM-100-333 DSWX
29 Aug 1997
274
GMR-04
68P02901W07-O
DSWX module
Figure 2-32 DSWX module
Fibre optic
input from
clock
Fibre optic
output to another
DSWX/KSWX
Red/Green
LEDs show
alarm/normal
status
RESET/DISABLE
switch
Fibre optic input
from another
DSWX/KSWX
Brief description
The DSWX is a multi-function module responsible for optically transmitting and receiving
all TDM bus information between shelves, and for distributing the TDM bus information
and TDM clock and reference pulses in the BSS shelves.
The DSWX is required for all installations if it is used for clock distribution. In a BSSC2
installation using more than one cabinet, it also extends the 1024 ports of a KSW/DSW2
to other shelves and/or interconnects up to four KSW/DSW2 modules via fibre optic
cable. In a TDM switch highway extended between two module shelves, a KSWX/DSWX
module is required in each shelf.
There are three modes in which the DSWX may operate. These modes are dependent
on where in the shelf the DSWX module is placed. The three modes are:
Expansion (DSWX
E
)
In a BSSC2 installation, expands the standard or double rate TDM bus between up to
four KSW/DSW2 respectively to expand switching capacity. DSWX
E
modules are
optically connected to other DSWX
E
modules.
Remote (DSWX
R
)
In a BSSC2 installation, extends the standard or double rate TDM bus to a shelf with no
KSW/TSW/DSW2. This allows a KSW/DSW2 to switch data to and from highway
interface modules (MSIs and DRIMs) in a shelf with no KSW/DSW2. DSWX
R
modules
are optically connected to DSWX
L
modules.
GSM-100-333 DSWX
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W07-O
GMR-04
275
Local (DSWX
L
)
The DSWX
L
distributes the TDM bus within a shelf and this is received optically from a
DSWX
R/
KSWX
R
in another shelf, and distributes clock and reference signals received
from a CLKX. DSWX
L
modules are optically connected to CLKX modules and can also
be connected to DSWX
R/
KSWX
R
modules.
GSM-100-333 DSWX
29 Aug 1997
276
GMR-04
68P02901W07-O
DSWX Block
diagram
Figure 2-33 shows a block diagram of the DSWX.
Figure 2-33 Block diagram of DSWX
TDM RX
Data Optical
I/F. From
another
DSWX or
KSWX
TDM TX
data Optical
I/F.
To another
DSWX or
KSWX
Clock
Optical
Interface
Serial to
Parallel
Parallel
to Serial
Decode
10B/9B
Encode
9B/10B
Elastic
Buffer
backplane
interface
backplane
interface
Frame
Counter/
TDM
Control
Logic
10
10
9
9
9
9
9
TDM Data Path
OE
CLK
Recovered Clock
W
r
i
t
e
R
e
a
d
R
e
a
d
TDM_O
TDM_I
RMTENA
TDM Clock Select
CLK16A
REF125A
CLK16B
REF125B
Clock/Reference
Select
Clock Multiply
Front Panel Interface
Clock Recovery and
Clock/Encoded
Reference
Recovery
Reference
Decode
Clock/
Reference
Distribution
backplane
buffer
Clock
Control
Logic/
Clock Fail
Clock Fail
Clock/Data Status
16 MHz clock (board)
Encoded reference (board)
16 MHz clock (mate)
Encoded reference (mate)
t
o

M
A
T
E
TDM VLTN
MRQ (mate)
MRQ (board)
FLT (mate)
FLT (board)
System Clock
System
DIAG Status
LED
Control
Logic
REF125*
REF60*
REF612*
CLK16Ux
REFxxxU
f
r
o
m

M
A
T
E
Serial Bus
Interface SLOTID 7
Diagnostics
Diagnostic
Test/Control
Logic
9
Diag Data In
Diag Control
SERB
SERA
Status0
Status1
Control0
Control1
RevLevel
Board ID
7
7
7
7
3
4
Serial
Reset

A
d
d
r
Reset
Reset
Toggle
Reset
Reset
backplane
buffer
backplane
buffer
A
d
d
r
Switch
Diag Data Lpbk
9
Distribution
and
T
D
M

C
l
o
c
k

1
6
T
D
M

C
l
o
c
k

3
2
T
D
M

C
l
o
c
k

6
4
T
D
M

R
e
f

1
2
5
Sync
D
i
a
g
D
a
t
a

O
u
t
9
Status0
Status0
Status0
Status1
Status0
Encoded Clock
Reference
SELECT A/B
LEDs
green
red
xclk pres
KSW pres
MODE10
2
MODE1
MODE1
CLK16Lx
REFxxxL
JTAG port
4
Controller
Bus
GSM-100-333 KSWX
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W07-O
GMR-04
277
KSWX
Purpose
Possible laser radiation when fibre optic cables are disconnected. Do not look
directly into beams with or without the use of any optical aids. Radiation can
come from either the data in/out connectors or unterminated fibre optic cables
connected to data in/out connectors.
WARNING
The kiloport switch extender (KSWX) module extends the 1024 ports of a KSW in one
BSU or RXU to the TDM highways in another BSU or RXU. It is used when the number
of required peripherals exceeds the capacity of a BSU or RXU shelf.
S A KSWX in expansion mode (KSWX
E
) connects the KSW to the KSW in a remote
BSU or RXU.
S A KSWX in remote transmit mode (KSWX
R
) accepts the highway data from a
KSW and sends it to a local receiver.
S A KSWX in local receive mode (KSWX
L
) accepts the highway data and drives the
TDM bus in the local BSU or RXU, and also provides a clock reference in
multishelf configurations.
Although a KSW is located in a particular BSU/RXU, it is logically connected to the TDM
bus in that BSU/RXU and to the TDM buses in up to 13 other shelves, which it can be
driving. For each BSU or RXU that a KSW is driving, two KSWXs are required; one
acting as a remote transmitter attached to the KSW, the other as a local receiver
attached to the TDM highway in the remote shelf.
Requirements
The KSWX is fitted in slots U0 to U9 and slots U21 to U28 of the BSU or RXU shelf
assembly, with the following limitations:
S KSWX
R
S KSWX
L
must be fitted in slots U0 and U1.
S KSWX
E
The fibre optic cables used to extend/expand the TDM highway from one BSU/RXU to
another BSU/RXU must be of the same length. This allows correct operation of the TDM
highway to be maintained.
GSM-100-333 KSWX
29 Aug 1997
278
GMR-04
68P02901W07-O
KSWX module
Figure 2-34 shows a typical KSWX module:
FIBRE OPTIC INPUT
FROM ANOTHER KSWX
FIBRE OPTIC INPUT
FROM CLKX
FIBRE OPTIC OUTPUT
TO ANOTHER KSWX
ACTIVE/ALARM LED
RESET/DISABLE
SWITCH
BACKPLANE
CONNECTOR
Figure 2-34 KSWX module
Brief description
The KSWX is a multi-function module responsible for optically transmitting all TDM bus
information between shelves, and for distributing the TDM bus information and TDM
clock and reference pulses in the BSS shelves.
The KSWX is required when a site has more than one cabinet. It extends the 1024 ports
of a KSW to other shelves and/or interconnects up to four KSW modules via fibre optic
cable. In a TDM switch highway extended between two module shelves, a KSWX module
is required in each shelf.
There are three modes in which the KSWX may operate. These modes are dependent
on where in the shelf the KSWX module is placed. The three modes are:
Expansion (KSWX
E
)
Expands the TDM bus between up to four KSW to expand switching capacity. KSWX
E
modules are optically connected to other KSWX
E
modules.
Remote (KSWX
R
)
Extends the TDM bus to a shelf with no KSW/TSW. This allows a KSW to switch data to
and from highway interface modules (MSIs and DRIMs) in a shelf with no KSW. KSWX
R
modules are optically connected to KSWX
L
modules.
Local (KSWX
L
)
The KSWX
L
distributes the TDM bus within a shelf and this is received optically from a
KSWX
R
in another shelf, and distributes clock and reference signals received from a
CLKX. KSWX
L
modules are optically connected to CLKX modules and can also be
connected to KSWX
R
modules.
GSM-100-333 KSWX
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W07-O
GMR-04
279
KSWX diagram
Figure 2-35 shows a block diagram of the KSWX module:
Figure 2-35 KSWX block diagram
GSM-100-333 LANX
29 Aug 1997
280
GMR-04
68P02901W07-O
LANX
Purpose
Possible laser radiation when fibre optic cables are disconnected. Do not look
directly into beams with or without the use of any optical aids. Radiation can
come from either the data in/out connectors or unterminated cables
connected to data in/out connectors.
WARNING
The local area network extender (LANX) module is required for each BSU or RXU shelf.
The LANX:
S Connects one of the LAN interfaces of each GPROC/GPROC2 in a BSU or RXU
shelf to the local shelf token ring LAN via the shelf backplane.
S Allows optical LAN extension from one BSU or RXU to another.
S Switches empty module slots or faulty GPROC/GPROC2s out of the LAN.
S Sets the cage (BSU or RXU shelf) ID.
S Performs on-board MCAP bus arbitration.
S Provides shelf active/standby redundant LAN control.
Shelf to shelf extension is via a LANX module in each shelf, interconnected with fibre
optic cabling.
The LANX supports up to eight GPROC/GPROC2s on the local LAN in one BSU or RXU
shelf.
Requirements
LANX modules must be fitted in slots U19 and U20 of the BSU or RXU shelf assembly at
all times.
A sixteen position (0 to F hex) rotary switch on the LANX module sets the BSU or RXU
LAN address (shelf ID number).
GSM-100-333 LANX
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W07-O
GMR-04
281
LANX module
Figure 2-36 shows a LANX module:
FIBRE OPTIC INPUT FROM
ANOTHER LANX IN ANOTHER
SHELF AT THE SITE
FIBRE OPTIC OUTPUT TO
ANOTHER LANX IN ANOTHER
SHELF AT THE SITE
ROTARY SWITCH FOR
SETTING SHELF ID
NUMBER
BACKPLANE
CONNECTOR
Figure 2-36 LANX module
Brief description
Refer to the block diagram at the end of this section.
Each LANX receives LAN data from another shelf via optical fibre cables and:
1. Routes the LAN data to the first GPROC/GPROC2.
2. Receives the LAN data back from the first GPROC/GPROC2.
3. Routes the LAN data to the second GPROC/GPROC2.
4. Receives the LAN data back from the second GPROC/GPROC2.
And so on until all GPROC/GPROC2s in the shelf have received the LAN data.
The LAN data received back from the last GPROC/GPROC2 in the shelf is sent via fibre
optics to the next shelf (if LAN extension is used). If a GPROC/GPROC2 is not present in
the shelf or has failed, the LANX bypasses it and passes the LAN data to the next
GPROC/GPROC2.
Local LAN data
switching
Each GPROC/GPROC2 using the LANX uses the following signals to route LAN data:
S LAN DATA IN.
S LAN DATA OUT.
S INSERT.
GSM-100-333 LANX
29 Aug 1997
282
GMR-04
68P02901W07-O
GPROC/GPROC2 present
When the GPROC/GPROC2 is present and operating with no faults, the INSERT line is
logic 1, causing LANX multiplexers to switch the GPROC/GPROC2 signals as follows:
S LAN DATA OUT signal of this GPROC/GPROC2 is switched to the LAN DATA IN
signal of the next GPROC/GPROC2 slot. In the case of shelf extension, the LAN
DATA OUT signal of GPROC/GPROC2 7 is switched to the fibre optic transmitter
stage.
S LAN DATA OUT signal from the previous GPROC/GPROC2 slot is switched to the
LAN DATA IN signal of this GPROC/GPROC2. In the case of shelf extension, the
signal from the fibre optic receiver stage is switched to the LAN DATA IN signal of
GPROC/GPROC2 0.
GPROC/GPROC2 not present
If the GPROC/GPROC2 is not present or operating with faults, the INSERT line is logic 0
causing LANX multiplexers to switch the GPROC/GPROC2 signals as follows:
S LAN DATA OUT signal of this GPROC/GPROC2 is switched (looped back) to the
LAN DATA IN signal of the same GPROC/GPROC2.
S LAN DATA OUT signal of the previous GPROC/GPROC2 is switched to the LAN
DATA IN signal of the next GPROC/GPROC2.
This removes the GPROC/GPROC2 from the LAN ring, and subsequent LAN data
bypasses the GPROC/GPROC2.
Extended LAN
data switching
In configurations of more than one shelf, the LANX allows the local LAN data to be
extended to another shelf via optical fibre connected to a LANX in the other shelf.
Any of the GPROC/GPROC2s in the shelf controls local LAN data switching between
shelves. Control is via the serial bus connected to the LANX signal, LAN
LOCAL/EXTERNAL.
Logic 1
A logic 1 on the LAN LOCAL/EXTERNAL line causes multiplexers on the LANX to switch
signals as follows:
S LAN DATA IN signal of GPROC/GPROC2 7 is switched to the fibre optic
transmitter stage. The optical transmitter provides a Tx data signal, consisting of
the local LAN data of this shelf, which is transmitted via fibre optic to a LANX in
another shelf.
S Rx data signal from the fibre optic receiver stage is switched to the LAN DATA
OUT signal of GPROC/GPROC2 0.
Logic 0
A logic 0 on the LAN LOCAL/EXTERNAL line causes multiplexers on the LANX to switch
signals from LAN DATA IN signal of GPROC/GPROC2 7 is switched to the LAN DATA
OUT signal of GPROC/GPROC2 0.
This bypasses the LANX fibre optic transmitter and receiver stages consequently
disabling local LAN extension to another shelf.
Power loss
If the local LANX loses dc power, the Rx data signal from the fibre optic receiver stage is
switched (looped back) to the optical transmitter, providing a Tx data signal via fibre optic
to the LANX in another shelf.
GSM-100-333 LANX
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W07-O
GMR-04
283
Bus arbiter
The LANX bus arbiter decides which GPROC/GPROC2 is allowed to write data to the
MCAP bus via the LAN DATA IN line. Each GPROC/GPROC2, 0 to 7, can assert its
respective BUS REQUEST line. The bus arbiter starts by monitoring GPROC/GPROC2
0 slot.
If GPROC/GPROC2 0 has an active BUS REQUEST line, the bus arbiter asserts the
GPROC/GPROC2 0 BUS GRANT line. GPROC/GPROC2 0 seizes the MCAP bus and
writes data to the bus. When GPROC/GPROC2 0 has finished writing data to the MCAP
bus, it deactivates the BUS REQUEST line. This frees the bus and the bus arbiter
activates the BUS GRANT line of the next higher numbered GPROC/GPROC2 with an
active BUS REQUEST line.
Redundant LAN
If the redundant GPROC/GPROC2 LAN interface is used, a redundant LANX is required.
Each LANX has two serial bus interfaces for communications with the
GPROC/GPROC2. The selection of which LAN interface is to be used is determined by
the GPROC/GPROC2.
Shelf ID
The shelf ID is a unique hexadecimal number assigned to each BSU or RXU shelf. The
LANX is fitted with a 16-position (hexadecimal encoded) rotary switch, which defines the
shelf ID number of the shelf containing the LANX. The shelf ID is read by the
GPROC/GPROC2 via the serial bus interface. The ID number is used by the BSS
software when configuring the BSU or RXU.
No two shelves at a site can have the same shelf ID. When a redundant LANX is present
in a shelf, it must have the same ID number as the primary LANX.
The following rules apply:
S A BSU shelf in a BSC is numbered 0 to D (hexadecimal).
S An RXU shelf in a BSC is numbered 0 or 1 (hexadecimal).
Front panel
The front panel of the LANX incorporates:
S Rx fibre optic input connector. This connects to the Tx fibre optic output of a LANX
in another shelf.
S Tx fibre optic output connector. This connects to the Rx fibre optic input of a LANX
in another shelf.
S Rotary switch for setting the BSU/RXU shelf ID number.
GSM-100-333 LANX
29 Aug 1997
284
GMR-04
68P02901W07-O
LANX diagram
Figure 2-37 shows a block diagram of the LANX module:
Figure 2-37 LANX block diagram
GSM-100-333 PIX
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W07-O
GMR-04
285
PIX
Overview
Refer to the block diagram in Figure 2-39.
The parallel interface extender (PIX) module provides:
S An input/output (I/O) interface for customer site equipment.
S The interface logic between the GPROC and external customer alarm devices
such as relays and switches.
S Eight optically isolated inputs and four relay outputs.
Requirements
PIX modules can be fitted in the following slots of a BSU or RXU shelf assembly:
S BSSC2:
S BSSC:
slots U16, 17 and U18.
slots U15 and U16.
PIX module
Figure 2-38 shows a PIX module:
ig.240.rh
ALARM LED (GREEN)
ON = NO ALARMS
OFF = CUSTOMER
ALARM DETECTED
CONNECTOR IS
CABLED TO TOP OF
CABINET FOR
CONNECTION TO
CUSTOMER SITE
EQUIPMENT
BACKPLANE
CONNECTOR
Figure 2-38 PIX module
GSM-100-333 PIX
29 Aug 1997
286
GMR-04
68P02901W07-O
PIX diagram
Figure 2-39 shows a block diagram of the PIX module:
Figure 2-39 PIX block diagram
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W07-O
GMR-04
i
Chapter 3
Power, fans and interconnections
GSM-100-333
29 Aug 1997
ii
GMR-04
68P02901W07-O
GSM-100-333
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W07-O
GMR-04
iii
Chapter 3
Overview 31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
In this chapter 31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DPSM 33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DPSM view 33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DPSM diagram 35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EPSM 36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EPSM view 36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EPSM diagram 38 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IPSM 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IPSM view 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IPSM diagram 311 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PDU 312 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 312 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input power 312 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DAB 313 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose 313 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Requirements 313 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DAB diagram 313 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alarm functions 316 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Visual warnings 316 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communications 316 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAB 317 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose 317 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagram 317 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BSSC cabinet 317 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jumpers 319 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alarm functions 319 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Visual warnings 319 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input signals 320 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Serial bus 320 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reset 321 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Timing 321 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Signal routeing 321 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Signal timing 321 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GSM-100-333
29 Aug 1997
iv
GMR-04
68P02901W07-O
PDB and AIB 322 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 322 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AIB description 322 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AIB view 322 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PDB description 323 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PDB diagram 323 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose 324 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BSSC with PAB 324 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BSSC with PDB/AIB 324 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BSSC2 324 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 325 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power 325 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Location 326 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose 326 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BSSC 327 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BSSC2 328 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Location 329 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose 329 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
T43 diagram 329 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
T43 connectors 330 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Location 331 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose 331 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BIB diagram 331 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BIB connectors 332 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W07-O
GMR-04
31
Overview
Introduction
This chapter describes the following cabinet equipment:
S Power supplies.
Digital power supply module (DPSM).
Enhanced power supply module (EPSM).
Integrated power supply module (IPSM).
Power converter unit (PCU).
S Power distribution units (PDUs).
Distribution alarm board (DAB).
Power alarm board (PAB).
Power distribution board (PDB) and alarm interface board (AIB).
Circuit breaker panel.
S Fan cooling systems.
Fan power converter unit (FPCU).
S Interconnect panels.
In this chapter
Do not fit equipment in any cabinet for which it is not suitable.
CAUTION
All information given is valid for GSM, extended GSM (EGSM), DCS1800 and PCS1900
systems unless otherwise indicated.
GSM-100-333 Power supply modules
29 Aug 1997
32
GMR-04
68P02901W07-O
Power supply modules
Introduction
Ensure that the correct power supply module is fitted for the input used.
CAUTION
There are three compartments at the base of the BSU/RXU shelf assembly with slide-in
mountings for plug-in power supply modules (PSMs):
These cabinets ... Use this type of power supply ...
BSSC Digital power supply modules (DPSMs)
Positive earth BSSC2 Integrated power supply modules (IPSMs)
Negative earth BSSC2 Enhanced power supply modules (EPSMs)
The left compartment is for an optional redundant PSM. If the configuration of a particular
cabinet does not require a redundant PSM, a blanking plate is fitted over the
compartment. The redundant PSM must be compatible with the other cabinet power
units.
Cabinet power
requirements
Table 3-1 shows the power requirements of the cabinet:
Table 3-1 Cabinet power requirements
Supply Cabinet type
Earth Voltage BSSC2
Negative +27 V 90 A
Positive 48 V 50 A
60 V 40 A
GSM-100-333 DPSM
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W07-O
GMR-04
33
DPSM
Overview
The digital power supply (DPS) system for each BSU consists of up to three plug-in
enhanced power supply modules (DPSMs).
The DPSM is a switching type dc - dc power converter that converts the cabinet dc input
power to the following dc outputs:
S +5 V ( 2% at 85.5 A).
S $12 V ( 5% at 2.5 A).
The BSU or RXU backplane connects the outputs of each DPSM in parallel.
The DPSMs in the DPS system load-share:
S Two of the DPSMs provide sufficient power for a fully equipped BSU or RXU.
S The third DPSM (if fitted) provides n+1 redundancy.
A DPSM in an alarm condition sends an alarm message to the GPROC/GPROC2 via the
serial bus.
DPSM view
Figure 3-1 shows the DPSM:
ig.242.rh
REAR VIEW
RTN (EARTH FOR +5 V OUTPUT)
+5 V
+5 V
25-PIN D-TYPE CONNECTOR
(FEMALE)
C GND (CHASSIS EARTH)
V RTN (0 V INPUT)
V IN (+27 V INPUT)
ACTIVE LED (GREEN):
ON WHEN ALL OUTPUT
VOLTAGES ARE PRESENT
AND WITHIN TOLERANCE
ALARM LED (RED):
ON WHEN ONE OR MORE
ALARM CONDITIONS
EXIST.
OFF WHEN NO ALARM
CONDITION EXISTS.
Figure 3-1 DPSM module
GSM-100-333 DPSM
29 Aug 1997
34
GMR-04
68P02901W07-O
25-pin D-type connections
The 25-pin D-type connector provides connections for:
S +12 V power output.
S 12 V power output.
S Backplane slot ID input.
S Loss of dc input voltage alarm.
S Serial data bus.
S +5 V sense input.
Functional
description
Normal operation
During normal operation, the DPSMs share the load current demand of the BSU or RXU
shelf modules:
S Half of the load current supplied by each DPSM in a two-DPSM system.
S One third of the load current supplied by each DPSM in a three-DPSM system.
Regulated dc power is applied to the backplane to power the BSU or RXU shelf modules.
Redundancy
Two DPSMs can provide adequate operating power for all modules in a BSU or RXU
shelf. A third DPSM can be added for redundancy.
When plugged into the backplane, all DPSM power outputs are connected in parallel, so
that the DPS system current capacity is twice that of the individual DPSM; any third
DPSM is redundant (n+1).
Power supply shutdown
During a shutdown condition caused by a faulty DPSM, the output circuits of the
malfunctioning DPSM are isolated from the backplane output line, and the DPSM alarm
LED is switched on. The malfunctioning DPSM informs the GPROC/GPROC2 of the
shutdown condition.
Monitoring circuits
Parallel output connections allow each DPSM to sense its own output lines for:
S Output voltage regulation.
S Over-voltage protection to shut the DPSM down if the output voltage exceeds 1.2
to 1.3 times the rated output.
S Over-current protection to latch the power supply off (after a short delay for large
overloads) if the output current exceeds:
1.15 to 1.5 times the full-load rating of the +5 V output.
1.15 to 2 times the full-load rating of the +12 V and 12 V outputs.
The BSU or RXU shelfs GPROC/GPROC2 also monitors the status of each DPSM, via
a serial alarm link on the backplane, for:
S Loss of dc input voltage.
S Loss of output voltage.
S Overtemperature.
S Loss of serial link.
GSM-100-333 DPSM
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W07-O
GMR-04
35
Circuit protection
Additional internal DPSM circuit protection includes:
S Input dc reverse polarity protection to prevent DPSM damage using an input series
diode to block reverse voltages.
S Thermal protection to send an alarm message to the GPROC/GPROC2 via the
serial port, and shut the DPSM down, if the DPSM ambient temperature exceeds a
safe level.
After an alarm condition has ceased, normal DPSM operation is automatically restored.
Serial link
The serial link carries the following information and flags an alarm if an unexpected state
or failure occurs:
Address Device location
Slot 0 2
Revision DPSM Alarms
I/P Fail
O/P Fail
Overtemp
LED display
Two LEDs are mounted on the front of the DPSM to indicate the following:
S Active (Green): on when all output voltages are present and within specified limits.
S Alarm (Red): on when one or more alarm conditions exist.
DPSM diagram
Figure 3-2 shows a functional block diagram of the DPSM:
Figure 3-2 DPSM block diagram
GSM-100-333 EPSM
29 Aug 1997
36
GMR-04
68P02901W07-O
EPSM
Overview
The enhanced power supply (EPS) system for each BSU in a negative earth (+27 V)
system consists of up to three plug-in enhanced power supply modules (EPSMs). The
EPSM can only be used in a negative earth cabinet.
The EPSM is a switching type dc - dc power converter that converts the cabinet dc input
S +5 V ( 2% at 85.5 A).
S $12 V ( 5% at 2.5 A).
The BSU or RXU backplane connects the outputs of each EPSM in parallel.
When three EPSMs are fitted in the EPS system, they load-share as follows:
S Two EPSMs provide sufficient power for a fully equipped BSU or RXU.
S The third EPSM (if fitted) provides n+1 redundancy.
An EPSM in an alarm condition sends an alarm message to the GPROC/GPROC2 via
the serial bus.
EPSM view
Figure 3-3 shows the EPSM:
(FEMALE)
+5 V
+5 V
V RTN (0 V INPUT)
V IN (+27 V INPUT)
ACTIVE LED (GREEN):
ON WHEN OUTPUT
VOLTAGES ARE
PRESENT AND WITHIN
TOLERANCE.
ALARM LED (RED):
ON WHEN ONE OR
MORE ALARM
CONDITIONS EXISTS.
OFF WHEN NO ALARM
CONDITION EXISTS.
Figure 3-3 EPSM module
GSM-100-333 EPSM
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W07-O
GMR-04
37
S Serial data bus.
S +5 V sense input.
Functional
description
Normal operation
During normal operation, the EPSMs share the load current demand of the BSU or RXU
shelf modules:
S Half of the load current supplied by each EPSM in a two-EPSM system.
S One third of the load current supplied by each EPSM in a three-EPSM system.
Regulated dc power is applied to the backplane to power the BSU or RXU shelf modules.
Redundancy
Two enhanced power supply modules (EPSMs) can provide adequate operating power
for all modules in a BSU or RXU shelf. A third EPSM can be added for redundancy.
When plugged into the backplane, all EPSM power outputs are connected in parallel, so
that the EPS system current capacity is twice that of the individual EPSM; any third
EPSM is redundant (n+1).
During a shutdown condition caused by a faulty EPSM, the output circuits of the
malfunctioning EPSM are isolated from the backplane output line, and the EPSM alarm
LED is switched on. The malfunctioning EPSM informs the GPROC/GPROC2 of the
shutdown condition.
Monitoring circuits
Parallel output connections allow each EPSM to sense its own output lines for:
S Over-voltage protection to shut the EPSM down if the output voltage exceeds 1.2
to 1.3 times the rated output.
1.15 to 1.5 times the full-load rating of the +5 V output.
The BSU or RXU shelfs GPROC/GPROC2 also monitors the status of each EPSM, via a
serial alarm link on the backplane, for:
S Overtemperature.
GSM-100-333 EPSM
29 Aug 1997
38
GMR-04
68P02901W07-O
Circuit protection
Additional internal EPSM circuit protection includes:
S Input dc reverse polarity protection to prevent EPSM damage using an input series
diode to block reverse voltages.
serial port, and shut the EPSM down, if the EPSM ambient temperature exceeds a
safe level.
After an alarm condition has ceased, normal EPSM operation is automatically restored.
Serial link
or failure occurs:
Slot 0 2
Revision EPSM Alarms
I/P Fail
O/P Fail
Overtemp
LED display
Two LEDs are mounted on the front of the EPSM to indicate the following:
EPSM diagram
Figure 3-4 shows a functional block diagram of the EPSM:
Figure 3-4 EPSM block diagram
GSM-100-333 IPSM
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W07-O
GMR-04
39
IPSM
Overview
The integrated power supply (IPS) system for each BSU or RXU in a positive earth
(48 V/60 V) system consists of up to three plug-in integrated power supply modules
(IPSMs). The IPSM can only be used in positive earth cabinets.
The IPSM is a switching type dc dc power converter that converts the cabinet dc input
S +27.5 V 5 % at 45 A (full-load current).
S +5.1 V 2 % at 87.5 A (full-load current).
S +12 V 5 % at 2.5 A (full-load current).
S 12 V 5 % at 2.5 A (full-load current).
The BSU or RXU backplane connects the outputs of each IPSM in parallel.
When three IPSMs are fitted in the IPS system, they load-share as follows:
S Two IPSMs provide sufficient power for a fully equipped BSU or RXU.
S The third IPSM provides n + 1 redundancy.
An IPSM in an alarm condition sends an alarm message to the GPROC/GPROC2 via the
serial bus.
IPSM view
Figure 3-5 shows the IPSM:
(FEMALE)
+5 V
+5 V
+27.5 V (RTN)
+27.5 V (OUTPUT)
V RTN (0 V INPUT)
V IN (48 V/60 V INPUT)
ACTIVE LED (GREEN):
ON WHEN ALL OUTPUT
VOLTAGES ARE PRESENT
AND WITHIN TOLERANCE
ALARM LED (RED):
ON WHEN ONE OR MORE
ALARM CONDITIONS EXIST.
OFF WHEN NO ALARM
CONDITION EXISTS.
Figure 3-5 IPSM module
GSM-100-333 IPSM
29 Aug 1997
310
GMR-04
68P02901W07-O
S Serial data bus.
S +5 V sense input.
Functional
description
Normal operation
During normal operation, the IPSMs equally share load current demand of the BSU or
RXU shelf modules:
S Half of the load current supplied by each IPSM in a two-IPSM system.
S One third of the load current supplied by each IPSM in a three-IPSM system.
Redundancy
Two IPSMs can provide adequate operating power for all modules in a BSU or RXU
shelf. A third IPSM can be added for redundancy.
When plugged into the backplane, all IPSM power outputs are connected in parallel, so
that the IPS system current capacity is twice that of the individual IPSM; any third IPSM
is redundant (n+1).
During a shutdown condition caused by a faulty PSM, the output circuits of the
malfunctioning PSM are isolated from the backplane output line and the PSM alarm LED
is on. The malfunctioning PSM informs the GPROC/GPROC2 of the shutdown condition.
Monitoring circuits
Parallel output connections allow each IPSM to sense its own output lines for:
S Over-voltage protection to shut the IPSM down if the output voltage exceeds 1.2 to
1.3 times the rated output.
1.05 to 1.3 times the full-load rating of the +5.1 V output.
The BSU or RXU shelfs GPROC/GPROC2 monitors the status of each IPSM via a serial
alarm link on the backplane for:
S Overtemperature.
GSM-100-333 IPSM
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W07-O
GMR-04
311
Circuit protection
Additional internal IPSM circuit protection includes:
S Input dc reverse polarity protection to prevent IPSM damage using an input series
diode that blocks reverse voltages.
serial port, then shut the IPSM down, if the IPSM ambient temperature exceeds a
safe level.
After an alarm condition has ceased, normal IPSM operation is automatically restored.
Serial link
or failure occurs:
Slot 0 2
Revision IPSM Alarms
I/P Fail
O/P Fail
Overtemp
LED display
Two LEDs are mounted on the front of the IPSM to indicate the following:
IPSM diagram
Figure 3-6 shows a functional diagram of the IPSM:
Figure 3-6 IPSM block diagram
GSM-100-333 PDU
29 Aug 1997
312
GMR-04
68P02901W07-O
PDU
Overview
The power distribution unit (PDU) is located on the top shelf of the cabinet and:
S Distributes dc power throughout the cabinet.
S Provides an alarm interface.
It consists of a circuit breaker panel and one of the following:
S A distribution alarm board (DAB).
S A power alarm board (PAB).
S A power distribution board (PDB) with an alarm interface board (AIB).
Input power
DC input power is applied at the interconnection panel on top of the cabinet and is routed
to:
S The VIN bus bar.
S The earth (GND) bus bar in the PDU.
A second bus bar obtains +27 V power from:
S The power supply modules (PSMs) in the lower BSU or RXU in positive earth
(48/60 V) cabinets.
S The VIN and GND busbars via busbar links in negative earth (+27 V) cabinets.
GSM-100-333 DAB
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W07-O
GMR-04
313
DAB
Purpose
The distribution alarm board (DAB):
S Distributes +27 V dc to units within the cabinet via 25 fuses.
S Monitors alarm lines.
S Passes individual alarms to the GPROC/GPROC2.
The DAB processes operational failure signals from:
S Ruptured fuses.
S The fan stall sense line from each cooling fan.
Two bi-coloured LEDs (D43 and D8) are mounted on the DAB to indicate DAB and
cabinet-based faults. The other LEDs indicate fuse failures according to the tables in this
section. The DAB can be used in a BSSC2 cabinet.
Requirements
The DAB is fitted in the PDU shelf.
DAB diagram
Figure 3-7 shows a DAB:

Figure 3-7 DAB module
GSM-100-333 DAB
29 Aug 1997
314
GMR-04
68P02901W07-O
Fuses and LEDs
(BSSC2)
Table 3-2 details the functions of the DAB fuses and LEDs used in the BSSC2:
Table 3-2 DAB fuses and LEDs (BSSC2)
Fuse Rating Power to LED
F4 0.5 A Not used D27
F12 4A Not used D28
F13 4A Not used D26
F14, F15 4A Not used D30
F18 2A Not used D42
F19 0.5 A DAB supply N/A
F20 2A Not used D40
F21 2A Upper fan 5 D33
F24 2A Lower fan 2 D38
F27 2A Not used D36
F28 2A Not used D39
F29, F30 4A Not used D34
GSM-100-333 DAB
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W07-O
GMR-04
315
Switch settings
(BSSC2)
Table 3-3 shows the settings of DAB switches S1 and S2, which can be configured as
required in the BSSC2:
Table 3-3 S1 and S2 switch settings (DAB BSSC2)
Function Switch Position Setting
VSWR1 (Sector 1) S1 1 OFF
Spare S1 4 OFF
Battery backup O/P 2 S1 5 OFF (if battery backup installed)
ON (if battery backup not installed
or installed but not selected)
Battery backup O/P 1 S1 6 ON (if battery backup installed in a
cabinet fitted with a lower cage
only, or if battery backup not
installed or installed but not used)
OFF (if battery backup installed in
a cabinet fitted with both upper
and lower cages)
Battery backup I/P 2 S1 7 ON
Battery backup I/P 1 S1 8 ON
DRCU5 S2 1 OFF
DRCU2 S2 2 OFF
DRCU4 S2 3 OFF
DRCU1 S2 4 OFF
DRCU3 S2 5 OFF
DRCU0 S2 6 OFF
Spare S2 7 OFF
BBB ID S2 8 OFF
Note
A site reset is required for changes to the DAB switch settings to take full effect.
Failure to do this may result in incorrect/inaccurate alarm conditions being generated.
GSM-100-333 DAB
29 Aug 1997
316
GMR-04
68P02901W07-O
Alarm functions
The DAB produces alarms for several different devices and modules:
S 25 fuses.
S Battery backup input and output alarms.
S Multicoupler.
S Six circuit breakers.
S Six fan alarms.
Each signal from the fuse alarms is at a nominal +27 V level and is brought to a TTL high
level. Under no-fault conditions, the TTL output is held at a high level. If one or more
fuses fail on the multicoupler fuse panel the TTL level is low.
The addressable asynchronous receiver/transmitter (AART) has eight status inputs,
which are multiplexed to obtain the required alarm functionality.
Visual warnings
Each +27 V (nominal) fuse protected branch circuit that powers cabinet equipment has a
corresponding LED indicator on the DAB. The LED lights if the fuse is ruptured by a fault
condition, and the associated alarm line goes low.
The DAB also provides visual warnings for alarms via two bi-coloured LEDs:
S D43 indicates any internal cabinet or multicoupler and combiner failure.
S D8 indicates a fuse failure on the DAB only.
Both LEDs are driven by the master GPROC/GPROC2 in response to alarms generated
by the DAB; red indicates an alarm, otherwise the LEDs remain green. If the master
GPROC/GPROC2 is not running then both LEDs default to red.
Communications
The DAB communicates with the master GPROC/GPROC2 via the serial bus link. The
master GPROC/GPROC2 always initiates connections, in which all modules respond
with status reports on the serial bus.
The DAB processes operational failure reports from the following:
S Ruptured fuses.
S Protected side of circuit breakers (except DPS circuit breakers, which are
monitored by the master GPROC/GPROC2 directly).
S Fan stall sense line from each cooling fan.
S Hardware failures reported directly to the DAB are individually sent to the master
GPROC/GPROC2 via the serial bus.
The serial bus circuitry is powered by the same +5 V that powers each digital card shelf.
The power supplies that provide this +5 V (as well as 12 V) deliver isolated outputs.
Thus all devices in the serial bus circuit have a return that is floating (digital) earth
relative to the cabinet (main) earth. However, many of the signals being alarmed are
referenced to cabinet earth.
GSM-100-333 PAB
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W07-O
GMR-04
317
PAB
Purpose
The power alarm board (PAB) located in the PDU processes operational failure reports
from the following:
S Ruptured fuses.
S Protected side of circuit breakers (except DPS circuit breakers).
S Fan stall sense line from each cooling fan.
S Hardware failures that are reported directly to the PAB, are individually sent to the
GPROC via the serial bus.
The PAB provides +27 V (nominal) fuse-protected branch circuits for cabinet equipment
and fuse-protected +5 V DRAM back up power for the digital modules in the BSU and
RXU shelves. Each fused branch has a corresponding LED indicator on the PAB, which
lights when the fuse is ruptured.
The PAB also has a bi-coloured LED which turns red to indicate a PAB-based fault. The
PAB maintains the bicoloured LED on the cabinet front door at green to indicate that the
system has power applied. The PAB can be used in BSSC cabinets.
Diagram
Figure 3-8 shows a PAB:
Figure 3-8 PAB module
BSSC cabinet
The BSSC cabinet has fuse-protected branch circuits for the following internal and
external cabinet equipment:
S +5 V DRAM back up to lower and upper BSU/RXU.
S Each cabinet cooling fan.
S +27 V DRAM back up battery (external).
GSM-100-333 PAB
29 Aug 1997
318
GMR-04
68P02901W07-O
Fuses and LEDs
(BSSC)
Table 3-4 details the functions of the PAB fuses and LEDs used in the BSSC:
Table 3-4 PAB fuse and LED functions
Fuse Rating Power to LED
F1, F2 4 A +5 V DRAM battery back up (lower shelf) 1
F3 4 A 27 V battery back up input (internal/external) 2
F4 0.5 A Not used 3
F5 0.5 A Not used 4
F6 0.5 A Not used 5
F7 0.5 A Not used 6
F8 0.5 A Not used 7
F9 0.5 A Not used 8
F10 0.5 A Not used 9
F11 0.5 A Not used 10
F12 4 A Not used 11
F13 4 A Not used 12
F14, F15 4 A Not used 13
F16, F17 4 A +5 V DRAM battery back up (upper shelf) 14
F18 2 A Not used 15
F19 0.5 A PAB Supply 16
F20 2 A Not used 17
F21 2 A Upper Fan 5 18
F24 2 A Lower Fan 2 21
F27 2 A Not used 24
F28 2 A Not used 25
F29, F30 4 A Not used 26
GSM-100-333 PAB
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W07-O
GMR-04
319
Jumpers
Jumper JU1 must be fitted on POS, as shown in the diagram, for +27V cabinets, or to
NEG for 48/60V cabinets.
Normally, the +5 V DRAM voltage is supplied to the BSU backplane by the DPSMs. If
the DPSMs fail to deliver the +5 V DRAM supply, due to cabinet input power failure or
DPSM failure, the PAB converts either an external +27 V back up supply (input power
protection) or the +27 V cabinet supply (DPSM failure protection) to a fused +5 V DRAM
supply. The desired option is selected using jumpers JU2 and JU3, as shown below.
Connect pins 12 on both jumpers for INTERNAL power conversion
INT EXT
JU2
JU3
1
1
Connect pins 23 on both jumpers for EXTERNAL backup power
Set to POS (JU1 pins 2 3)
JU1 POS NEG 1
Alarm functions
The PAB alarms several different devices and modules:
S 26 fuses.
S Four +5 V DRAM back up fuses.
S 48/60 V converter alarms.
S The multicoupler alarm.
S Eight circuit breakers.
S Six fan alarms.
The addressable asynchronous receiver/transmitter (AART) has seven status inputs
available. To obtain the required alarm functionality, the inputs to the status pins are
multiplexed.
The serial bus circuitry is powered by the same +5 V that powers each digital card shelf.
The power supplies that provide this +5 V (as well as 12 V) deliver isolated outputs.
Thus all devices in the serial bus circuit have a return that is floating (digital) earth
relative to the cabinet (main) earth. However, many of the signals being alarmed are
referenced to cabinet earth.
In order to preserve the isolation between the two earths present in the PAB,
opto-isolators between the multiplexer/data selector outputs and status inputs are used
where needed.
Visual warnings
Each +27V (nominal) fuse-protected branch circuit that powers cabinet equipment has a
corresponding LED indicator on the PAB. The LED lights if the fuse is ruptured by a fault
condition, and the associated alarm line goes low.
The PAB also provides visual warnings for alarms through two bicoloured LEDs.
S The first LED is mounted on the cabinet door. This LED indicates failures in:
An internal cabinet function.
External multicoupler and combiner.
S The second LED (LED27) is on the lower left corner of the PAB and signals a fuse
failure on the PAB only.
GSM-100-333 PAB
29 Aug 1997
320
GMR-04
68P02901W07-O
Input signals
Fuse alarm levels
Each of the signals from the fuse alarms is at a nominal +27 V level and is brought to a
TTL high level.
Circuit breaker alarms
Depending on the cabinet fit, the following signals from circuit breakers are fed to the
PAB:
S BSSC:
Two signals to sense the 48/60 V dc to dc fan power converter input
voltages. The output from each converter circuit breaker, at a nominal
48 V or 60 V level, is brought to a TTL high level.
Multicoupler alarm
Under no-fault conditions the TTL level output is held at a high level. If one or more
fuses fail on the multicoupler fuse panel the TTL level is low.
Converter alarms
Two 48 V or 60 V dc to dc converter alarm signals are detected. One signal is an over
temperature indication, the other a low voltage failure. Under no-fault conditions the TTL
level output is held high. If one or both failures occur the TTL level is low.
+5 V back up supply
The PAB also supplies current to the digital shelves for the purpose of a back up supply.
The device used to perform this function is a 150 W dc to dc converter which delivers an
output of 16 A at a nominal +5 V. The converter is configured to give a +4.85 V output.
This back up power, which is for the GPROC and LANX modules, is switched in only in
the event of a loss of the primary base station cabinet input power.
Serial bus
The serial bus allows the GPROC bus master to connect to, and communicate with, the
PAB.
Status word
The function of the status word is to report any alarms that occur to the master GPROC.
Under normal (no alarm) operating conditions, bits S0S2 and S4S6 are high while bits
S3 and S7 are low.
Transmit enable
As the serial bus communication link is bidirectional, allowing the PAB to receive and
transmit information along the same signal path, a one-shot serial bus access circuit is
used to provide an 10 ms access/transmit window. The command strobe (CS) pulse is
generated by the addressable asynchronous receiver/transmitter ( AART) after it
receives a valid command word. The CS pulse signals the one-shot to send the 10 ms
pulse to the receive and transmit circuitry, allowing data transmission.
Transmit and receive
When the transmit enable 10 ms pulse is active, the PAB can send data (input data and
status words) on the serial bus. The A/B select line decides on which serial data line the
information is to be received from the GPROC.
GSM-100-333 PAB
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W07-O
GMR-04
321
Reset
The ART could enter an unknown state at switchon, therefore its reset is tied to an
undervoltage sensing circuit. This allows the AART to receive power before it is reset.
Timing
A MC406 crystal oscillator provides the 307.2 kHz clock frequency. This frequency is
then internally divided by 64 to derive the receive data strobe and the data clock rate
(4800 Hz).
BSSC status
inputs
The status inputs S0S7 respond to the following alarms on the BSSC cabinet:
Status input ... Responds to alarms from ...
S0 Not used.
S1 Not used.
S2 Fan 0 (F26), fan 1 (F25), fan 2 (F24), fan 3 (F23), fan 4 (F22) and
fan 5 (F21) power supplies; 48/60 V fan power converter
temperature fail and +27 V DRAM back up input supply.
S3 +27 V PAB supply (F19); 48/60 V fan power converter 1 (CB4),
fan power converter 2 (CB5) and 48/60 V fan power converter
fail.
S4 +5 V DRAM supply (lower shelf) (F1 and 2) and (upper shelf) (F16
and 17).
S5 Fans 05 stall alarms.
S6 +27 V PAB supply (F19).
S7 Not used.
Signal routeing
Each of the above signals, with the exception of the +5 V DRAM supply, are first brought
to a TTL level before being fed to a data selector, which selects the appropriate input.
The input is passed through an opto-isolator to ensure the signal is isolated between the
main and digital earths. The output of the opto-isolator is routed to the appropriate status
input of the AART.
Signal timing
Since the data selectors that drive the status inputs S0S3 and S5 are referenced to
main earth, the clocking signals, and output from the AART, are opto-isolated before
clocking the data selectors. The status input S4 is driven from a data selector that is
referenced to digital earth and is clocked directly from the AART.
GSM-100-333 PDB and AIB
29 Aug 1997
322
GMR-04
68P02901W07-O
PDB and AIB
Overview
The PDU in BSSC cabinet comprises an Alarm Interface Board (AIB) and a Power
Distribution Board (PDB).
AIB description
The AIB circuits operate from:
S +27 V and optional +27 V DRAM back up from the PDB.
S +5 V from digital power supplies via the BSU backplane.
Normally the +5 V DRAM voltage for a GPROC/GPROC2 dynamic RAM is supplied to
the BSU backplane by the DPSM. If the primary +27 V is removed from the cabinet, the
AIB converts the +27 V DRAM back up to a fused +5 V DRAM voltage, which is supplied
to the BSU backplane.
+5 V DRAM voltage fuses and usage are as follows:
S F1 (60 V, 10 A) supplies +27 V to the upper BSU shelf backplane.
S F2 (60 V, 10 A) supplies +27 V to the lower BSU shelf backplane.
The AIB monitors alarm lines, passes individual alarms to the GPROC/GPROC2 and
provides a composite alarm signal for the cabinet alarm LED.
The AIB combines all alarms into one common alarm output which is routed to the
cabinet alarm LED mounted on the cabinet front door. When the LED is on, a hardware
and/or software failure condition exists within the cabinet. There is also a bi-coloured
LED mounted on the AIB which indicates an AIB based fault.
The AIB processes operational failure signals from:
S Ruptured fuses.
S The protected side of circuit breakers (except DPSM circuit breakers).
S The fan stall sense line from each cooling fan.
AIB view
Figure 3-9 shows an AIB:
ig.249.rh
J
U
4
J
U
3
J
U
2
PC9
PC8
PC7
JU5
PC3
PC6
PC1
PC2
F2 F1
DS1
PC3
Serial
chip
J
U
1
Figure 3-9 AIB module
GSM-100-333 PDB and AIB
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W07-O
GMR-04
323
PDB description
The PDB distributes +27 V and +5 V to units within the cabinet through 25 fuses. The
PDB reports fuse failures to the AIB and also provides a fused circuit for the optional
27 V DRAM back up battery which connects to the DRAM port on top of cabinet.
Table 3-5 shows the functions of the PDB fuses:
Table 3-5 PDB Fuse functions
Fuse Voltage Rating Power to
1 to 5 60 25 A Not used (May or may not be installed)
6 to 10 60 0.5 A Not used (May or may not be installed)
11 & 12 60 5 A Not used (May or may not be installed)
17 60 2 A Lower Fan 0
20 60 2 A Upper Fan 0 (If installed)
23 60 2 A Spare
24 60 2 A DRAM Back-up
25 60 2 A Alarm Interface Board
PDB diagram
Figure 3-10 shows a PDB:
Figure 3-10 PDB module
GSM-100-333 Circuit breakers
29 Aug 1997
324
GMR-04
68P02901W07-O
Circuit breakers
Purpose
Power is distributed within the cabinet via the circuit breakers. This section details the
function of each circuit breaker in each cabinet.
BSSC with PAB
Eight circuit breakers distribute power to units in a BSSC cabinet with a PAB-type PDU.
S CB4 and CB5 provide -48/60 V power to the fan power converters in positive
earth cabinets only.
S CB6, CB7 and CB8 provide power to the DPSMs in the upper BSU or RXU shelf:
In a positive earth cabinet, the circuit breakers supply 48/60 V.
In a negative earth cabinet, the circuit breakers supply +27 V.
S CB9, CB10 and CB11 provide power to the DPSMs in the lower BSU or RXU shelf:
In a positive earth cabinet, the circuit breakers supply 48/60 V.
In a negative earth cabinet, the circuit breakers supply +27 V.
BSSC with
PDB/AIB
Six circuit breakers distribute power to units in a BSSC cabinet with a PDB/AIB-type
PDU.
S CB0, CB1, CB2, CB3, CB4 and CB5 provide +27 V power to the DPSMs in both
BSU or RXU shelves.
BSSC2
Seven circuit breakers distribute power to units within the BSSC2 cabinet.
S CB1, at 30 A, provides +27 V power to the DAB.
S CB5 to CB10, at 60 A, provide power to the PSMs:
In a positive earth cabinet, the circuit breakers supply 48/60 V power to
the IPSMs.
In a negative earth cabinet, the circuit breakers supply +27 V power to the
EPSMs.
GSM-100-333 Fan cooling system
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W07-O
GMR-04
325
Fan cooling system
Overview
The fan cooling system comprises two fan tray assemblies mounted directly below each
BSU or RXU shelf. Each fan tray assembly contains three exhaust fans.
Cabinet baffling divides the cabinet cooling system into upper and lower cabinet cooling
subsystems. The cooling system, in conjunction with the correct use of shelf airflow
deflectors, provides adequate cooling for all cabinet equipment.
Each fan has a fan stall sensor, which is connected to alarm circuits in the PDU.
Power
In negative earth cabinets, power for the fans is derived from the +27 V bus bar via the
PDU.
In positive earth BSSC cabinets, a Fan Power Converter Unit (FPCU) is required to
derive +27 V from the -48/60 V supply.
The FPCU is mounted above the lower BSU or RXU shelf in positive earth BSSC
cabinets.
Figure 3-11 shows the FPCU module.
ig.251.rh
FAN POWER
CONVERTER
MODULE 1
FAN POWER
CONVERTER UNIT
INTERFACE
FAN POWER
CONVERTER
MODULE 2
Figure 3-11 FPCU module
29 Aug 1997
326
GMR-04
68P02901W07-O
Interconnect panel
Location
The interconnect panel is on top of the cabinet.
Purpose
This panel provides connections for:
S DC input power.
S 2.048 Mbit/s E1 line interconnect modules.
S Customer defined alarm equipment input and output.
S +27 V battery back up input for DRAM.
S +27 V power/alarm for external receiver multicoupler and external remotely
tuneable combiner (BTS only).
The interconnect panel has feed-through tubes for routing fibre optic intercabinet cables
into and out of the cabinet. Feed-through tubes do not compromise the cabinets EMC
screening, as the tubes operate below their waveguide cut off frequency.
The 2.048 Mbit/s E1 line interconnection modules are:
S Type 43 interconnect boards (T43), used for unbalanced lines.
S Balanced-line interconnect boards (BIB), used for balanced lines.
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W07-O
GMR-04
327
BSSC
Diagram
Figure 3-12 shows the interconnect panel for the 48/60 V BSSC:
PIX 1
PIX 0
GKO
BATTERY
BACK UP
EARTH STUD
V IN
48/60 V dc
0 V
FIBRE OPTIC CABLES
FEED THROUGH TUBE
X21-0 X21-1
Connectors
Table 3-6 details the interconnect panel connectors for the BSSC.
Table 3-6 BSSC interconnect panel connectors
Connector Function Internal destination External
destination
+27 V Batt
Back up
DRAM back-up
battery
PAB connector PC6 +27 V back-up
battery
interface ports (up
to six E1/T1
circuits at each
on lower BSU/RXU
backplane
E1/T1 circuits
source or
termination
equipment (via BIB
MS4 to MS7
circuits at each
connector; six Tx
and six Rx
circuits)
on upper BSU/RXU
backplane
equipment (via BIB
or T43)
PIX0 and PIX1 Customer alarm
input/output ports
PIX modules
Customer alarm
equipment
GKO Not used in this
configuration
GKO connector on lower
BSU backplane
X21-0 and
X21-1
Not used in this
configuration
29 Aug 1997
328
GMR-04
68P02901W07-O
BSSC2
Diagram
Figure 3-13 shows the interconnect panel for the BSSC2:
PIX 1
PIX 0
GKO
BATTERY
BACK UP
EARTH STUD
V IN
48/60 V dc
or
+27 V dc
0 V
FIBRE OPTIC CABLES
FEED THROUGH TUBE
Connectors
Table 3-7 details the interconnect panel connectors for the BSSC2.
Table 3-7 BSSC2 Interconnect panel connectors
Connector Function Internal destination External
destination
+27 V battery
backup
DRAM backup
battery
DAB connector PC4 and
BBBX connector PC2
+27 V backup
battery
interface ports (up
to six E1/T1
circ its at each
on lower BSU/RXU
backplane
E1/T1 circuits
source or
termination
eq ipment ( ia a
MS4 to MS7
circuits at each
connector; six Tx
and six Rx circuits)
on upper BSU/RXU
backplane
equipment (via a
T43 or BIB)
PIX0 and PIX1 Customer alarm
input and output
ports
PIX modules
Customer alarm
equipment
configuration
GKO connector on lower
BSU backplane
GSM-100-333 Type 43 interconnect board
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W07-O
GMR-04
329
Type 43 interconnect board
Location
The T43 interconnect board plugs into the interconnect panel via a 37-pin D-type
connector.
Purpose
The T43 interconnect board matches the impedance between the pulse code modulation
(PCM) circuit lines and the BSU/RXU backplanes. The board interfaces up to six input
and six output unbalanced coaxial 75 ohm 2.048 Mbit/s E1 lines to the BSU/RXU
backplane through twelve type 43 coaxial connectors.
The T43 uses 12 transformers to provide impedance matching between the PCM circuit
lines and the multiple serial interface (MSI) modules. Each transformer has a 1:1.25 turns
ratio to match the external 75 ohm and backplane 120 ohm connections. Each input and
output is isolated by up to 1500 V from the backplane.
Use the T43 for unbalanced lines.
NOTE
T43 diagram
Figure 3-14 shows the T43 interconnect board:
J1
J2
J5
J4
J7
J8
J10
J13 J11
J14
J16
J17
J0
Figure 3-14 T43 module
GSM-100-333 Type 43 interconnect board
29 Aug 1997
330
GMR-04
68P02901W07-O
T43 connectors
Table 3-8 details the T43 connectors.
Table 3-8 T43 Connectors
D-Type
Pin no.
Function Coaxial
Pin no.
DType
Pin no.
Function Coaxial
Pin no.
J0-1 MSI_MEGA_Tx1
+
J1 Centre J0-20 MSI_MEGA_Tx1
(AC coupled to earth)
J1 Shield
J0-2 MSI_MEGA_Rx1
+
J2 Centre J0-21 MSI_MEGA_Rx1
(Earth)
J2 Shield
J0-4 MSI_MEGA_Tx4
+
J4 Shield
J0-5 MSI_MEGA_Rx4
+
(Earth)
J5 Shield
J0-7 MSI_MEGA_Tx2
+
J7 Shield
J0-8 MSI_MEGA_Rx2
+
(Earth)
J8 Shield
J0-10 MSI_MEGA_Tx5
+
J10
Shield
J0-11 MSI_MEGA_Rx5
+
(Earth)
J11
Shield
J0-13 MSI_MEGA_Tx3
+
J13
Shield
J0-14 MSI_MEGA_Rx3
+
(Earth)
J14
Shield
J0-16 MSI_MEGA_Tx6
+
J16
Shield
J0-17 MSI_MEGA_Rx6
+
(Earth)
J17
Shield
Connector J0 pins 3, 6, 9, 12, 15, 18, 19, 22, 25, 28, 31, 34, and 37 are not used
GSM-100-333 Balanced line interconnect board
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W07-O
GMR-04
331
Balanced line interconnect board
Location
The BIB plugs into the interconnect board via two 37-pin D-type connectors.
Purpose
The balanced-line interconnect board (BIB) matches the impedance between the pulse
code modulation (PCM) circuit lines and the BSU backplanes. The board provides
interfaces for six input and six output balanced 120 ohm E1/T1 lines.
The board uses 12 transformers to match the impedance between the PCM circuit lines
and the multiple serial interface (MSI) modules. Each transformer has a 1:1 turns ratio to
match the external and backplane 120 ohm connections.
Use the BIB for balanced lines.
NOTE
BIB diagram
Figure 3-15 shows the BIB module.
J1
J0
Figure 3-15 BIB module
GSM-100-333 Balanced line interconnect board
29 Aug 1997
332
GMR-04
68P02901W07-O
BIB connectors
Table 3-9 details the BIB connectors:
Table 3-9 BIB Connectors
Pin
no.
Function Pin
no.
Pin
no.
Function Pin
no.
J01 MSI_MEGA/EXT_ME
GA_Tx1+
J11 J020 MSI_MEGA/EXT_ME
GA_Tx1
J120
J02 MSI_MEGA/EXT_ME
GA_Rx1+
GA_Rx1
J121
J03 Earth J13 J022 Earth J122
J04 MSI_MEGA/EXT_ME
GA_Tx4+
GA_Tx4
J123
J05 MSI_MEGA/EXT_ME
GA_Rx4+
GA_Rx4
J124
J07 MSI_MEGA/EXT_ME
GA_Tx2+
GA_Tx2
J126
J08 MSI_MEGA/EXT_ME
GA_Rx2+
GA_Rx2
J127
J010 MSI_MEGA/EXT_ME
GA_Tx5+
GA_Tx5
J129
GA_Rx5+
GA_Rx5
J130
GA_Tx3+
GA_Tx3
J132
GA_Rx3+
GA_Rx3
J133
GA_Tx6+
GA_Tx6
J135
GA_Rx6+
GA_Rx6
J136
J019 Earth J119
C
H
A
P
T
E
R

2
I
N
S
T
A
L
L
A
T
I
O
N
C
H
A
P
T
E
R

3
D
E
C
O
M
I
S
S
I
O
N
I
N
G
C
H
A
P
T
E
R

1

S
I
T
E

P
R
E
P
A
R
A
T
I
O
N
29 Aug 1997
Installation and Configuration: BSC/RXCDR
68P02901W08-O
GMR-04
i
Category 433
Installation and Configuration
GSM-100-433
29 Aug 1997
ii
GMR-04
68P02901W08-O
GSM-100-433
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W08-O
GMR-04
iii
Category 433
Installation and Configuration i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 1
Overview 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Torque values 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
In this chapter 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tool kit one 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tool kit two 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagram 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Back up power 17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 110 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Before the visit 110 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Leaving the site 111 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rubbish 111 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rural sites 111 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety on site 112 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 2
Overview 21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
In this chapter 21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Before starting 21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cabinet types 21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Delivery 21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Packaging 22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Site earthing 22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Torque values 23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Optical fibres 23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GSM-100-433
29 Aug 1997
iv
GMR-04
68P02901W08-O
Introduction 24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure 24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shipping crate 24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure 25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BSSC2 26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BSSC 26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagram 27 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAB 29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DAB 29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 213 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure 213 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 214 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety 216 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure 216 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 217 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure 217 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 218 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure 219 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BSU shelf 220 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RXU shelf 221 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 222 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 225 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PIX connector 226 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GSM-100-433
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W08-O
GMR-04
v
Introduction 228 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MS0 to BSU 228 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MS1 to BSU 229 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MS2 to BSU 229 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MS3 to BSU 230 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MS0 to RXU 230 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MS1 to RXU 231 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MS2 to RXU 231 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MS3 to RXU 232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 233 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MS0 to BSU 234 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MS1 to BSU 235 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MS2 to BSU 236 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MS3 to BSU 237 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MS0 to RXU 238 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MS1 to RXU 239 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MS2 to RXU 240 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MS3 to RXU 241 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 3
Overview 31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Prerequisite 31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Before starting 32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure 32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BSSC checklist 34 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GSM-100-433
29 Aug 1997
vi
GMR-04
68P02901W08-O
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W08-O
GMR-04
i
Chapter 1
Site preparation
GSM-100-433
29 Aug 1997
ii
GMR-04
68P02901W08-O
GSM-100-433
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W08-O
GMR-04
iii
Chapter 1
Overview 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Torque values 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
In this chapter 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tool kit one 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tool kit two 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagram 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Back up power 17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 110 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Before the visit 110 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Leaving the site 111 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rubbish 111 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rural sites 111 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety on site 112 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GSM-100-433
29 Aug 1997
iv
GMR-04
68P02901W08-O
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W08-O
GMR-04
11
Overview
Introduction
This manual contains installation and configuration procedures for Motorola BSSC and
BSSC2 equipment cabinets, used as a BSC or RXCDR.
Hazardous voltages in excess of 50 V dc exist inside 48 V and 60 V
cabinets. Use extreme caution when working on a cabinet with power
applied. Remove all rings, watches and other jewellery.
WARNING
Torque values
Table 1-1 lists the torque values to be used when tightening corresponding bolts.
Table 1-1 Bolt torque values
Size Torque
Nm lbf
M4 5.4 4
M5 8.2 6
M6 14.8 11
M8 34 22
M10 66 49
M12 126 93
In this chapter
Read this chapter before beginning the installation. It covers installation tool kits, site
requirements, power requirements, optical fibre handling precautions, site visits and
cabinet labelling.
GSM-100-433 Tool kits for installing GSM cellular equipment
29 Aug 1997
12
GMR-04
68P02901W08-O
Tool kits for installing GSM cellular equipment
Introduction
Two tool kits are recommended for use when installing GSM cellular sites. Cellular tool
kit number one is for installation, and number two is for commissioning. Equipment
required for optimization is listed in Chapter 3.
Tool kit one
Table 1-2 lists the contents of cellular tool kit number one.
Table 1-2 Tool kit number one contents
Quantity Description
1 pair Safety goggles
1 Hard hat
1 Dust mask
1 pair Ear defenders
1 Antistatic wrist strap with coiled lead
1 Antistatic mat
1 Torch
1 5-Tray cantilever tool box (22 in)
1 Padlock to fit cantilever tool box
1 Zipped tool case
1 Socket set (A/F/Metric 1/2 in drive)
1 10 in adjustable spanner
1 8 in adjustable spanner
1 each
2
Combination spanners A/F:
1/4 in, 5/16 in, 3/8 in, 7/16 in, 1/2 in, 9/16 in, 5/8 in, 11/16 in, 7/8 in
and 1 in
3/4 in
1 Ratchet spanner (9/16 in x 1/2 in)
1 Torque wrench (10-150 ft/lb)
1 Torx driver set (T10 to T30)
1 Allen key set A/F
1 Claw hammer
1 Pipe cutter
1 Cone cutter (up to 1 in)
1 Cone cutter (up to 2 in)
1 Junior hacksaw
10 Replacement blades for junior hacksaw
1 300 mm hacksaw
10 Replacement blades for 300 mm hacksaw
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W08-O
GMR-04
13
1 pair 6 in side cutters
1 pair 6 in heavy-duty side cutters
1 pair Wire cutters
1 pair Cable shears
1 Knife with retractable blade
1 pair 8 in combination pliers
1 pair General purpose pliers
1 pair Snipe nose pliers
1 each Screwdrivers 0pt, 1pt and 2pt
1 each Screwdrivers 4 in, 6 in and 8 in
1 Set of jewellers screwdrivers
1 Screwdriver set (including flat and cross-head blades)
1 Transpower 110 V (twin outlet)
1 Kango 501 110 V
1 M20 drill bit to fit Kango 501
1 Pistol drill P221 115V
1 24-piece drill bit set 1/16 in to 1/2 in
2 110 V plugs
1 6 m 240 V extension cable (twin outlet)
1 Soldering iron
1 Soldering iron stand
1 Hand crimp tool
1 Crimp tool for type 43 connectors
1 BNC crimp tool with inserts
1 Telephone plug crimp tool
1 50 mm crimp tool
1 Cable tie gun
1 4 ft wooden step ladder
1 Table vice
1 10 in vice grips
1 7.5 m tape measure
1 12 in steel rule
1 Spirit level (3 ft)
1 Centre punch
1 Pocket scriber
1 10 in half round file
29 Aug 1997
14
GMR-04
68P02901W08-O
Tool kit two
Table 1-3 lists the contents of cellular tool kit number two.
Table 1-3 Tool kit number two contents
1 Antistatic wrist strap with coiled lead
1 Antistatic mat
1 Marker pen
1 Zipped tool pack case
1 Large sectioned storage box
1 Torx driver set including sizes T10 to T30
1 pair Flush cut wire cutters
1 pair Light duty cable cutters
1 pair Industrial scissors
1 pair GP serrated jaw pliers
1 pair Snipe nose pliers
1 pair Straight point tweezers
1 Screw/nut driver set
1 Screw gripping driver
1 Null modem
1 RS232 mini tester
1 Soldering iron (dual temperature) with holder
1 Cable tie gun
1 M to M gender changer
1 Co-ax cable stripper for 2002 (75 ohm coaxial cable)
GSM-100-433 Site requirements and considerations
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W08-O
GMR-04
15
Site requirements and considerations
Introduction
The base site must meet the following criteria.
Structural
requirements
There must be:
Clearance of at least 775 mm (30.5 in) in front of the equipment for operation and
maintenance purposes.
An overhead cable trough, mounted at least 150 mm (6 in) above the top of the tallest
cabinet.
Cabinet
dimensions
BSSC and BSSC2 cabinets both have the following dimensions:
Height 2096 mm
Width 711 mm
Depth (with door) 416 mm
Depth (without door) 400 mm
Operating
environment
Temperature 5 _C to +45 _C.
Humidity 20 % to 80 % non-condensing relative humidity
(maximum 0.024 gram of water/m# of dry air).
Airborne particulate matter < 5 milligrams/1000 cubic feet of air.
The BSSC cabinet dissipates a maximum of 3100 watts when fully equipped.
Storage
environment
Temperature 45 _C to +70 _C .
Humidity 10 % to 90 % non-condensing relative
humidity
GSM-100-433 Site requirements and considerations
29 Aug 1997
16
GMR-04
68P02901W08-O
Diagram
Figure 1-1 shows the cabinet dimensions and mounting foot details:
Figure 1-1 Cabinet dimensions and mounting foot details
GSM-100-433 Power requirements
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W08-O
GMR-04
17
Power requirements
Introduction
BSSC cabinets can operate from either positive or negative earth supplies (requested by
the customer and configured at initial installation) at various voltages.
Positive earth
BSSC cabinets
Positive earth BSSC cabinets operate from a 48 V or 60 V dc supply. The maximum
power requirements are:
S (48 V) = 50 A.
S (60 V) = 40 A.
Negative earth
BSSC cabinets
Negative earth BSSC cabinets operate from a nominal +27 V dc (+3 V, 5 V dc) supply.
The maximum power requirement is:
S (+27 V) = 90 A.
Back up power
BSSC cabinets can be connected to an external battery to provide a dc input power back
up for dynamic random access memory (DRAM) devices.
The DRAM back up maximum power requirement for each cabinet is:
S 4 A (maximum) at +27 V dc.
An adequate means of routeing cables from the power source to the
equipment, for example a cable trough, must be provided (BS 7671
Reference Method 11).
NOTE
Overcurrent
protection
The cabinet overcurrent protection device can be:
S A fuse conforming to BS88 (IEC 513).
S A main circuit breaker conforming to BS EN 60898 (IEC 898).
The device must be of the following rating:
S +27 V cabinets: 100 A.
GSM-100-433 Handling optical fibres
29 Aug 1997
18
GMR-04
68P02901W08-O
Handling optical fibres
Introduction
The section details the precautions necessary for the handling of both glass and polymer
optical fibres.
Optical fibre cables contain an inner core, which is a strand of polymer or glass, coated
by a cladding (sometimes in two layers), and an outer sheath providing mechanical
protection.
The optical fibre acts as a light waveguide. In order for the link to work correctly light
must be propagated with minimal loss from end-to-end of the fibre. A number of causes
can prevent this from happening, resulting in the potential for the link to become faulty.
Protection of
fibres and
connectors
To maintain good light transmission through the optical fibre link it is essential the
connector end surfaces and/or bare fibre ends are kept clean at all times. Dust or dirt
must not be allowed to contaminate either the ends of the fibres, or enter the emitters or
detectors on the circuit board.
When an optical fibre is not connected, the protective caps must be fitted at all times to
the ends of the fibre and to all unused connectors on the modules.
Cleaning of
fibres and
connectors
When cleaning of contaminated optical connectors is deemed necessary, all areas must
be wiped gently with a lint-free cloth soaked in a suitable cleaning solution.
Care must be taken to ensure the ends of optical fibres are not damaged in
any way.
CAUTION
Lint free cloth is the preferred medium for cleaning, since the risk of
contamination or damage due to the cleaning process is minimal. In extreme
circumstances the use of soft clean cotton may be acceptable.
The use of cotton buds soaked in cleaning solution is not recommended, since
lint is frequently left on the fibre and the connectors may be wet when the
cables are inserted into the connectors.
NOTE
Fibre connection
FibreSMA connectors are used at both ends of the glass fibre optic cables. These
should be tightened to handtight only when connecting under no circumstances
should any tools, such as pliers or spanners be used to tighten the connectors.
GSM-100-433 Handling optical fibres
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W08-O
GMR-04
19
Minimum bend
radius
All optical fibres have a minimum bend radius. This represents the smallest circle that
can be formed, without damage, from a loop of fibre, that is how tight it can be coiled,
looped or bent.
Under NO circumstances should fibres be bent tighter than the minimum bend
radius
CAUTION
The minimum bend radius for the optical fibres used in Motorola BSS equipment cabinets
is 30 mm. Refer to Figure 1-2.
Double the bend radius value stated above if the fibre is under tension.
NOTE
As a rule of thumb, the natural bend radius of the fibre can be determined by allowing
the fibre to bend under its own weight. This radius will normally be greater than that
specified above, and it is recommended that this is not exceeded. If in doubt, check by
measuring accurately.
If a fibre is bent tighter than the minimum bend radius, two effects are possible:
S Excessive light loss from the outside of the bend.
S Fibre fracture due to microscopic imperfections caused by bending. Light is
scattered and reflected by the fracture. The damage is permanent and is not
repaired by straightening the fibre.
ig.270.rh
Minimum
bend
radius
Fibre optic cable
Figure 1-2 Minimum bend radius of 30 mm (at size)
GSM-100-433 Visiting the site
29 Aug 1997
110
GMR-04
68P02901W08-O
Visiting the site
Introduction
Follow these instructions when preparing to work at a site and upon arrival.
Before the visit
Before going to the site:
Step Action
a. Ensure that all team members have adequate test
equipment, tools and hardware to carry out their tasks.
Check the site folder for any special requirements.
b. Contact the person in charge of the building to advise of the
teams estimated time of arrival and the expected duration of
their stay on the site. This will usually have been dealt with
previously, but it is always advisable to make sure that the
information has been passed on.
c. Check with the engineer in charge of the project to see if
anything needs to be taken to the site and collect any
outstanding work for the site to be visited.
d. Ensure that the team read the site access details on each
visit to a site as local regulations may change.
Arriving at the
site
When entering any site:
Step Action
a. Contact the local OMC and MSC to announce the teams
arrival, indicate your expected time of departure, and
arrange for the 2 Mbit/s links to be checked, before entering
the site. Do not enter the site until you have made contact
with its OMC or MSC.
b. Enter the site and check for any building alarms, for
example intruder alarms, that may have been activated by
entry.
c. Disable the Halon gas systems (if fitted) and any entry
alarms.
d. Read any local instructions.
Occupied sites
In any exchange or occupied building, contact the caretaker or person in charge, who will
explain local regulations and may advise on parking, rubbish disposal and catering
facilities.
Be as polite and helpful as possible; colleagues may well have to go back to the site at a
later date.
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W08-O
GMR-04
111
Leaving the site
When leaving a site during the installation or optimization period:
Step Action
a. At the end of the working day enable the Halon gas system
(if fitted) and any alarm systems disabled on entry.
b. Contact the local OMC or MSC to announce the teams
departure.
c. Out of hours, if an alarm is fitted and the local MSC is not
staffed, contact the network control centre or OMC and
inform them of the teams departure.
d. Sign out of the building as necessary.
Never leave vehicles parked on site overnight.
NOTE
Rubbish
At the end of the job, clear all rubbish from the site unless otherwise indicated by the
customer.
DO NOT burn rubbish. Packaging can give off toxic gasses.
WARNING
Rural sites
The senior engineer must:
S Ensure that all personnel on site are aware of the country code and the health
regulations relating to water authority sites.
All personnel must:
S Guard against all risk of fire.
S Fasten all gates.
S Drive carefully on country roads and observe all speed restrictions.
S Keep to the paths and tracks across farm land.
S Not leave litter.
Remember that site visits can be traced back if a complaint is made.
29 Aug 1997
112
GMR-04
68P02901W08-O
Safety on site
The senior engineer must:
S Advise all staff on site of safety requirements before any work takes place.
S Ensure that cabinets are safely positioned at all times.
Do not move a cabinet without assistance. Cabinets must be safely positioned
at all times.
WARNING
All personnel must:
S Wear the safety helmets supplied when antenna or overhead work is in progress,
and when local regulations require them.
S Wear the safety goggles, ear protectors and dust masks supplied when drilling.
This is particularly important when drilling overhead ironwork.
S Wear approved safety footwear when moving heavy equipment.
S Stop work if any person in the team is not properly protected.
S Cut cable tie tails to remove sharp edges.
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W08-O
GMR-04
i
Chapter 2
Installing the equipment
GSM-100-433
29 Aug 1997
ii
GMR-04
68P02901W08-O
GSM-100-433
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W08-O
GMR-04
iii
Chapter 2
Overview 21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
In this chapter 21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Before starting 21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cabinet types 21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Delivery 21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Packaging 22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Site earthing 22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Torque values 23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Optical fibres 23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure 24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shipping crate 24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure 25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BSSC2 26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BSSC 26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagram 27 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAB 29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DAB 29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 213 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure 213 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 214 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety 216 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure 216 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 217 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure 217 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 218 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure 219 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BSU shelf 220 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RXU shelf 221 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GSM-100-433
29 Aug 1997
iv
GMR-04
68P02901W08-O
Introduction 222 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 225 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PIX connector 226 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 228 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MS0 to BSU 228 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MS1 to BSU 229 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MS2 to BSU 229 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MS3 to BSU 230 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MS0 to RXU 230 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MS1 to RXU 231 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MS2 to RXU 231 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MS3 to RXU 232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 233 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MS0 to BSU 234 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MS1 to BSU 235 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MS2 to BSU 236 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MS3 to BSU 237 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MS0 to RXU 238 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MS1 to RXU 239 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MS2 to RXU 240 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MS3 to RXU 241 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W08-O
GMR-04
21
Overview
Introduction
Follow the procedures and guidelines in this chapter to install BSS equipment cabinets
and their internal and external interfaces.
To install equipment not supplied by Motorola, for example battery chargers and power
supplies, refer to the site specific documentation and the vendor instructions.
cabinets. Extreme caution must be used when working on a cabinet with
power applied. Remove all rings, watches and other jewellery.
WARNING
In this chapter
Installation consists of the following steps, all of which are described in this chapter:
S Unpacking the equipment and inspecting for visible damage.
S Positioning and securing the cabinets as shown on the floor plan.
S Earthing the cabinets.
S Connecting dc power to the cabinets.
S Inserting modules into the cabinets.
S Connecting external equipment cabling such as transmit and receive antenna
cables and E1/T1 lines.
S Connecting the inter-cabinet fibre optic cables.
Before starting
Before starting an installation, prepare the site as described in chapter 1 of this category
and in the site specific documentation.
Cabinet types
This chapter describes the installation procedure for BSSC cabinets. The procedure is
the same for all cabinets except where otherwise indicated.
Delivery
Before the the BSSC equipment is delivered, designate an area of the site where the
heavy freight and/or moving company can unload the equipment. The equipment must be
carefully delivered to the site with the dollies and padding required to move it from the
unloading area to the installation point.
29 Aug 1997
22
GMR-04
68P02901W08-O
Packaging
The cabinets are shipped in wooden crates.
Cabinets are shipped with the following items already installed:
S Cabinet interconnect panel.
S DC power distribution and alarm interface equipment.
S Module mounting shelves.
S Cooling fan assemblies.
S All intra-cabinet cabling.
S Digital modules.
The following items are shipped in separate cartons:
S Power supply modules (PSMs).
Lifting cabinets
An unequipped BSSC cabinet can weigh up to 136 kg (300 lb). Handle
cabinets with extreme caution to avoid tipping.
WARNING
BSSC cabinets are fitted with four lifting points, designed to accommodate M12 eyebolts,
built in to the top panels. These lifting points are fitted with plastic inserts to protect the
threads. Motorola kit number SWLN4648A contains four M12 eyebolts manufactured to
C.E. conformity, each with a safe weight load of 400 kg and individually numbered. Only
eyebolts supplied in this kit must be used.
Before attempting to insert the eyebolts, visually check each one for any damage that
may have occurred in transit. If any damage is apparent, DO NOT USE; contact
Motorola for replacement.
1. Carefully remove the plastic insert from the M12 threaded lifting point.
2. Insert the eyebolt into the thread, ensuring that no cross-threading occurs.
The eyebolts must not be overtightened; hand tight is sufficient. Screw the
eyebolt fully into the lifting point so that no thread is left exposed.
WARNING
3. Repeat the procedure until all four eyebolts have been correctly fitted.
4. When the lifting operation is complete, remove the eyebolts and refit the plastic
inserts.
For continued use of eyebolts, there may be local regulations that govern the use of
lifting equipment and stipulate a test and/or examination regime. If the eyebolts are to be
used, ensure that all such regulations are met.
Site earthing
This manual summarizes general procedures. For detailed earthing information, refer to
Grounding Guidelines For Cellular Radio Installations (68P81150E62).
The cell site equipment must be earthed at the same common earth point as its power
source. Provision must be made for routeing earthing lines into the site and to the
cabinet before installing the system cabinets. An earthing terminal (stud) is located on
the interconnect panel on top of each cabinet. Each cabinet must be earthed separately
(not daisy chained). For detailed site earthing information, refer to the site specific
documentation.
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W08-O
GMR-04
23
Transient/
lightning
protection
E1/T1 lines connected to Motorola equipment have secondary transient protection as
part of the balanced-line interconnect board (BIB) or T43 board. The receive and transmit
antenna connections to the building must be fed through coaxial electromagnetic
protection (EMP) devices.
Torque values
Table 2-1 lists the torque values to be used when tightening corresponding bolts.
Table 2-1 Bolt torque values
Size Torque
Nm lbf
M4 5.4 4
M5 8.2 6
M6 14.8 11
M8 34 22
M10 66 49
M12 126 93
Optical fibres
Refer to Handling optical fibres in chapter 1 before installing fibre optic cables.
GSM-100-433 Unpacking the equipment
29 Aug 1997
24
GMR-04
68P02901W08-O
Unpacking the equipment
Introduction
Carry out the following procedure with reference to the diagram on the next page.
Procedure
To unpack a cabinet from its shipping crate:
1. Cut the plastic banding used to secure the wooden crate. Put the banding in a
place where it will not be lost.
2. Remove the eight metal clips that secure the lid of the crate using a claw hammer
or a similar levering device. Put the clips in a place where they will not be lost or
damaged.
3. Lift the lid free of the crate. Place the lid where it will not be damaged.
4. Remove the 12 metal clips that secure the sides of the crate using a claw hammer.
Put the clips in a place where they will not be lost or damaged.
5. Lift the sides free of the crate. Place the sides where they will not be damaged.
Take care not to scratch or otherwise damage the cabinet.
CAUTION
6. Carefully cut open the sealed barrier bag containing the cabinet.
7. Lift or slide the cabinet off the base of the crate.
8. Remove the desiccant bag from the cabinet.
9. Put all the clips in a bag and tie them together with the banding, desiccant bag,
barrier bag and the lid, sides and base of the cabinet.
10. Return the dismantled crate as advised by the in-country project manager.
11. Immediately after unpacking the equipment, inspect it for damage and report the
extent of any damage to the transport company.
Shipping crate
Figure 2-1 shows a cabinet shipping crate.
ig.271.rh
LID
SIDE
SIDE
SIDE
SIDE
BASE
METAL
CLIP
Figure 2-1 Cabinet shipping crate
GSM-100-433 Anchoring the cabinet
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W08-O
GMR-04
25
Anchoring the cabinet
Introduction
Mounting procedures must conform to local building codes and regulations. Consult the
site authorities before beginning an installation.
Procedure
To secure a cabinet to the floor:
1. Open the cabinet door.
2. For access to the bottom of the cabinet, remove the lower fan housing/air baffle
assembly (below the BSU shelf) by removing the four screws that secure it to the
cabinet frame; retain the screws for reassembly.
3. Carefully place the cabinet at its anchoring point as shown in the site plan.
Ensure that cabinets are electrically insulated from each other. Cabinets can
be secured to adjacent cabinets or support structure using insulating bolts.
CAUTION
4. Use the mounting foot of the cabinet as a template to mark the location of the four
mounting holes. All four anchoring positions must be used.
Wear safety glasses while drilling holes.
WARNING
Cement dust from drilling concrete flooring is harmful to equipment and wiring.
Make sure that the cabinet and any nearby equipment are protected. Use a
tarpaulin, cloth, or plastic sheeting to cover exposed equipment. Carefully
clean up any accumulated debris from the anchor installation before exposing
the equipment.
CAUTION
5. Move the cabinet away from the installation point. Drill holes for concrete
mounting anchors and fit them (Motorola suggests the RAWLNUT 1275).
6. Move the cabinet back to the installation point. Place an insulating shoulder
washer and then a flat washer onto each bolt. Loosely secure each cabinet to the
anchors using the bolts with washers (Motorola suggests M12 x 100 bolts for use
with the RAWLNUT 1275 anchors).
7. Tighten the bolts, ensuring that the cabinet remains vertical and level.
8. Replace the lower fan housing/air baffle assembly removed in step 2.
GSM-100-433 Installing the cabinet air deflector
29 Aug 1997
26
GMR-04
68P02901W08-O
Installing the cabinet air deflector
Introduction
The SHN4757 air deflector unit is supplied with each cabinet. Installation is
recommended, but is left to the customers discretion.
The air deflector mounts on the cabinet door in front of the upper exhaust vent, which is
approximately at the height of a persons eye when standing in front of the cabinet. It
directs the airflow upwards without adversely affecting cabinet equipment cooling.
BSSC2
The unit comprises a deflector and four mounting screws.
Temporary installation
1. Clip the air deflector on to the cabinet door upper exhaust vent.
Permanent installation
1. Remove the protective caps from the four pre-drilled holes in the door around the
upper exhaust vent.
3. Secure the air deflector to the door using four M5 screws.
BSSC
The unit comprises a deflector and three mounting screws.
Temporary installation
Permanent installation
2. Using the pre-drilled holes in the bottom flange of the deflector, mark the locations
for screw mounting holes on the door.
3. Remove the air deflector.
4. Open the door and cover the internal units.
Wear safety glasses while drilling holes.
WARNING
Ensure that the interior of the cabinet is protected from possible swarf
ingestion.
CAUTION
5. Drill three 3.5 mm diameter holes through the door.
GSM-100-433 Installing the cabinet air deflector
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W08-O
GMR-04
27
6. Repeat step 1.
7. Secure the air deflector to the door using three M4 x 8 self tapping screws.
Diagram
Figure 2-2 shows the air deflector mounted on a BSSC cabinet:
ig.272.rh
CLIPS
(2 EACH END)
M4 X 3
TAPPING
AIR DEFLECTOR
EXHAUST VENT
DRILL THREE
3.5 mm HOLES
(OPTIONAL)
Figure 2-2 BSSC cabinet air deflector mounting points
GSM-100-433 Preparing to connect dc power and earth cables
29 Aug 1997
28
GMR-04
68P02901W08-O
Preparing to connect dc power and earth cables
Introduction
The external converter used to supply the cabinet must have double or
reinforced insulation between its primary and secondary circuits and must also
conform to safety standard EN60 950.
Do not make dc input power connections at the main dc power source at this
point in the procedure.
WARNING
To protect unused connectors on the cabinet interconnect panel from damage
by static electricity or foreign matter, ensure that the covers supplied are fitted.
CAUTION
Before connecting input dc power cables to the main dc power source, perform
any adjustment procedures on the main power supply equipment
recommended by the manufacturer. Input to the cabinet, under all load
conditions, must remain between 22 V and 30 V dc for nominal +27 V dc
operation and between 40 V and 75 V dc for 48/60 V dc operation.
CAUTION
The dc power distribution system within each cabinet, including all internal power cabling
and fuses, is factory assembled and tested.
The power requirements for the cabinets are listed in Chapter 1.
The power input and earth connectors are secured with M10 nuts.
Adequate means, for example a cable trough, must be provided for routeing cables from
the main power source to the cabinet.
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W08-O
GMR-04
29
PAB
Configure the power alarm board (PAB) jumpers JU1 to JU3 for the power supply polarity
and the external +27 V backup supply as shown below:
(JU1 pins 2, 3) NEG 1 POS JU1
(JU2 pins 2, 3)
INT EXT
JU2
JU3
1
1
(JU3 pins 2,3)
JU1, set for negative earth (+27 Vdc) supply
JU2 and JU3 set to external supply
(JU1 pins 1, 2) NEG 1 POS JU1 JU1, set for positive earth (48/60 Vdc) supply
DAB
Configure the distribution alarm board (DAB) switches S1 and S2 for the cabinet
equipment configuration. Each switch comprises eight switches in a line.
Table 2-2 lists the alarms that the switches S1 and S2 enable.
Table 2-2 S1 and S2 enabled alarms
Label Switch Position Circuit monitored On/Off
VSWR1 (Sector 1) S1 1 Power to VSWR1 monitor As required
Spare S1 4 OFF
BB O/P2 S1 5 BBBX lower shelf output ON
BB O/P1 S1 6 BBBX upper shelf output ON
BB I/P2 S1 7 BBBX lower shelf input ON
BB I/P1 S1 8 BBBX upper shelf input ON
DRCU5 S2 1 Power to DRCU5 ON if fitted
Spare S2 7 OFF
BBB ID S2 8 Backup battery fitted ON if fitted
The battery backup input and output alarms (switch S1 positions 5 to 8) are
enabled when the switch is set to OFF.
NOTE
29 Aug 1997
210
GMR-04
68P02901W08-O
BSSC2
interconnect
panel
Figure 2-3 shows the BSSC2 interconnect panel.
PIX 1
PIX 0
FIBRE OPTIC CABLES
FEED THROUGH TUBE
GKO
BATTERY
BACKUP
EARTH STUD
V IN
48/60 V dc
or
+27 V dc
0 V
Figure 2-3 BSSC2 interconnect panel
Table 2-3 lists the BSSC2 interconnect panel connectors.
Table 2-3 BSSC2 interconnect panel connectors
20 to 75 V dc
battery
backup
DRAM backup battery PAB connector PC6 20 to 75 V dc backup
battery
MS0 to MS3 MSI ports (maximum
six E1/T1 per
connector six Tx and
six Rx)
Corresponding MS
connector on lower
BSU/RXU backplane
E1/T1 line source or
(via a T43 or BIB)
six E1/T1 per
six Rx)
Corresponding MS
connector on upper
BSU/RXU backplane
(via a T43 or BIB)
PIX0 and
PIX1
End user alarm
input/output ports
Edge connector of PIX
modules
End user alarm
equipment
configuration
GKO connector on
lower BSU backplane
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W08-O
GMR-04
211
Negative earth
BSSC
interconnect
panel
Figure 2-4 shows the negative earth BSSC interconnect panel.
GK0
PIX 0
PIX 1
EARTH STUD
FIBRE OPTIC CABLES
FEEDTHROUGH TUBE
+27 V
BATTERY
BACKUP
+27 V
Figure 2-4 BSSC interconnect panel (negative earth)
Table 2-4 lists the negative earth BSSC interconnect panel connectors.
Table 2-4 BSSC interconnect panel connectors (negative earth)
+27 V dc
battery
backup
DRAM backup battery PAB connector PC6 +27 V dc backup
battery
six E1/T1 per
six Rx)
Corresponding MS
connector on lower
BSU/RXU backplane
(via a T43 or BIB)
six E1/T1 per
six Rx)
Corresponding MS
connector on upper
BSU/RXU backplane
(via a T43 or BIB)
GK0 Not used
PIX0 and
PIX1
End user alarm
input/output ports
modules
End user alarm
equipment
29 Aug 1997
212
GMR-04
68P02901W08-O
Positive earth
BSSC
interconnect
panel
Figure 2-5 shows the positive earth BSSC interconnect panel.
PIX 1
PIX 0
FIBRE OPTIC CABLES
FEED THROUGH TUBE
X21-0 X21-1
GKO
BATTERY
BACKUP
EARTH STUD
V IN
48/60 V dc
0 V
Figure 2-5 BSSC intreconnect panel (positive earth)
Table 2-5 lists the positive earth BSSC interconnect panel connectors.
Table 2-5 BSSC interconnect panel connectors (positive earth)
+27 V dc
battery
backup
DRAM backup battery PAB connector PC6 +27 V dc backup
battery
six E1/T1 per
six Rx)
Corresponding MS
connector on lower
BSU/RXU backplane
(via a T43 or BIB)
six E1/T1 per
six Rx)
Corresponding MS
connector on upper
BSU/RXU backplane
(via a T43 or BIB)
PIX0 and
PIX1
End user alarm
input/output ports
modules
End user alarm
equipment
configuration
GKO connector on
lower BSU backplane
X21-0 and
X21-1
Not used in this
configuration
GSM-100-433 Connecting dc power cables between cabinets and external equipment
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W08-O
GMR-04
213
Connecting dc power cables between cabinets and external
equipment
Introduction
Protect unused connectors on the cabinet interconnect panel from damage by
static electricity or foreign matter by ensuring that the covers supplied are
fitted.
CAUTION
The procedure below describes how to install dc power cabling from the cabinet to the
DRAM battery back up equipment.
All cables and connectors must be supplied by the end user.
NOTE
Procedure
1. For BSSC2 cabinets, construct the required cables with reference to Table 2-6.
Table 2-6 DRAM battery back up cable requirements
Cable Cable type Connector: cabinet end Connector: external
end
Type Pin function Type Pin
function
DRAM
back
up
battery
Shielded
twisted pair
(red/black)
1mm
2
9 way
female
shielded
D type
1 (upper cage) and 2
(lower cage): Battery
ve (black)
7 (lower cage) and 6
(upper cage) : Battery
+ve (red)
End users
choice
End users
choice
2. Connect the cable shield to the connector shell at the cabinet end.
3. Make sure that no cable has short or open circuit conductors.
4. Locate the connector(s) on the top of the cabinet interconnect panel.
5. Connect the cabinet end of the cable to the cabinet mating connector.
6. Connect the other end of the cable to the external equipment mating connector.
GSM-100-433 Connecting dc input power and earth cables to the cabinet
29 Aug 1997
214
GMR-04
68P02901W08-O
Connecting dc input power and earth cables to the cabinet
Introduction
The location and details of the BSSC cabinet input power terminals and the earth stud
are shown in the diagrams and tables in Preparing to connect dc power and earth
cables. earlier in this chapter.
Power and earth
cables
Earth each cabinet using the earth stud on the interconnect panel on the top of
the cabinet. Each cabinet must be individually connected to the master earth
bar (MEB). Do not daisy chain cabinet earths.
CAUTION
The maximum cable lengths for BSSC(2) cabinets must observe the following rules:
S If the required length falls between two values of cross sectional area (CSA),
round up to the next biggest cable.
S The earth cable must be the same size as the power cable.
S The cabinet overcurrent protection device must be a BS88 (IEC 513) fuse or a
BS EN 60898 (IEC 898) main circuit breaker.
S Maximum ambient temperature +50 _C.
S Cables must be routed parallel and touching each other on a perforated tray
(BS7671 method 11).
S The maximum length given is based on a 4% voltage drop at nominal voltage
(BS7671 section 5250102).
Table 2-7 lists the maximum BSSC(2) cabinet cable lengths.
Table 2-7 BSSC(2) cabinet cable lengths
CSA (mm
2
) Maximum cable length (m)
+27 V
cabinet
48 V
cabinet
60 V
cabinet
16
25 21.6 27.0
35 16.1 30.3 37.8
50 21.7 40.7 50.9
70 32.0 60.1 75.1
95 43.8 82.3 102.9
120 56.0 105.2 131.5
GSM-100-433 Connecting dc input power and earth cables to the cabinet
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W08-O
GMR-04
215
Power cables for
ve earth
cabinets
Use the correct cable specified in the previous tables for the dc input power cable from
the main dc power source.
The positive cable must be red and the negative cable must be black. The
black cable is at earth potential.
WARNING
To connect dc power cables to a negative earth cabinet:
1. Ensure that the main power source output is switched off.
2. Connect the earth from the MEB to the earth stud on top of the cabinet.
3. Connect the red positive dc power cable from the main dc power source to the
cabinet dc power connector assembly terminal marked VIN.
4. Connect the black negative dc power cable from the main dc power source to the
cabinet dc power connector assembly terminal marked 0 V.
5. Tighten the dc power and earth terminal set screws (M10).
Power cables for
+ve earth
cabinets
Use the correct cable specified in the tables for the dc input power cable from the main
dc power source.
The negative power cable must be blue and the positive cable must be black.
The black cable is at earth potential.
WARNING
To connect dc power cables to a positive earth cabinet:
1. Ensure that the main power source output is switched off.
2. Connect the earth from the master earth bar to the earth stud on top of the
cabinet.
3. Connect the blue negative () dc power cable from the main dc power source to
the cabinet dc power connector assembly terminal marked VIN.
4. Connect the black positive (+) dc power cable from the main dc power source to
the cabinet dc power connector assembly terminal marked 0V.
5. Tighten the dc power and earth terminal set screws (M10).
GSM-100-433 Connecting dc input power and earth cables to the main power source
29 Aug 1997
216
GMR-04
68P02901W08-O
Connecting dc input power and earth cables to the main power
source
Safety
Do not wear an antistatic wrist strap when servicing the power supplies or
power distribution cabling. Serious personal injury can result.
The external converter used to supply the cabinet must have double or
reinforced insulation between its primary and secondary circuits and must also
conform to safety standard EN60 950.
WARNING
Procedure
To connect the dc power cables to the main power source:
Before connecting input dc power cables to the main dc power source, perform
any adjustment procedures on the main power supply equipment
recommended by the manufacturer. Input to the cabinet, under all load
conditions, must remain between 22 V and 30 V dc for nominal +27 V dc
operation and between 40 V and 75 V dc for 48/60 V dc operation.
CAUTION
1. Ensure that all main dc power source output switches are switched off.
2. Ensure that all circuit breakers in the cabinet are switched off.
3. Use a digital voltmeter to ensure that power is not present.
4. Connect the positive lead of the input dc power cable to the positive terminal of the
main dc power supply.
5. Connect the negative lead of the input dc power cable to the negative terminal of
the main dc power supply.
Ensure that all power connections are secure.
WARNING
6. Do not apply power to the cabinet at this point in the procedure.
GSM-100-433 Installing power supply modules
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W08-O
GMR-04
217
Installing power supply modules
Introduction
The following types of power supply modules (PSMs) are fitted:
S BSSC: Digital power supply module (DPSM).
S ve earth BSSC2: Enhanced power supply module (EPSM).
S +ve earth BSSC2: Integrated power supply module (IPSM).
Before installing power supply modules, refer to the site specific documentation to
determine the following:
S The number of power supply modules to be installed.
S The positions in which the power supply modules are to be installed.
Procedure
To install the power supply modules:
1. Locate and unpack the power supply modules.
Switch the appropriate circuit breakers OFF to ensure that the supply to the
PSMs is isolated.
CAUTION
Refer to the label on the power supply module to ensure that the correct
module is fitted for the input power (48V, 60V or +27V) used.
CAUTION
2. If the cabinet is delivered with the digital modules already installed, two
transportation panel fillers are fitted to the digital shelf to prevent the modules from
falling out of the shelf in transit. Remove these by releasing the clips at the top and
bottom, and replace them with blanking plates, before proceeding.
3. Mount each power supply module (and power converter if fitted) in the BSU/RXU
shelf assembly according to the configuration information in the site specific
documentation.
4. Pull each PSM forward by about 25 mm (1 in) to unseat it.
GSM-100-433 Installing digital modules
29 Aug 1997
218
GMR-04
68P02901W08-O
Installing digital modules
Introduction
Do not look directly into a fibre optic cable or data in/out connector with or
without the use of optical aids. Laser radiation can come from either the data
in/out connectors or unterminated fibre optic cables connected to data in/out
connectors.
WARNING
BSSC cabinets use circuitry that is sensitive to static discharge. Avoid handling
the modules in a high-static environment. Do not touch connector contacts.
Wear an earthed high-impedance wrist strap when handling modules.
CAUTION
Bus terminator cards (BTCs) are fitted in all BSU/RXU shelves at the factory.
The BTC ejectors have a protective plastic cover over the ejector tabs, which
is held in place by a crosshead screw. The plastic cover must be removed
before installing or replacing a BTC module.
NOTE
Before installing digital modules, refer to the site specific documentation to determine the
following:
S The number of digital modules to be installed.
S The positions in which the digital modules are to be installed.
Factory
installation
Some cabinets are delivered with all digital modules already installed. If this is the case,
perform only those steps in the procedure that relate to cabling.
If a digital module is found to be unserviceable, return it to Motorola in the container
provided in the PCB transportation boxes kit (SWBN4831A).
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W08-O
GMR-04
219
Installing BBBX
modules
The battery back up board (BBBX) module has no backplane connections, and can
therefore be installed in any available slot, provided that the associated cables can reach
it.
The cables are factory installed in the cabinet, but must be connected to the BBBX
module on site.
Table 2-8 details the BBBX cabinet cabling.
Table 2-8 BBBX cable connectors
BBBX
connector
Type Pin Function Connects
to
Input 9-way male D-type 1 Input return DAB
4 Input good signal
5 Output good signal
6 Input voltage
7 Earth
9 Signal return (0 V
digital)
Output 4-way 1 0 V Connector
AI2 on
4 +5 V
AI2 on
backplane
NOTE
Pins not listed are not used.
Procedure
Refer to Handling optical fibres in chapter 1 before connecting fibre optic
cables.
CAUTION
To install the digital modules:
1. Locate and unpack the full-size and half-size digital modules. Place the modules
on an antistatic bench mat. If an antistatic bench mat is not available place each
module on the antistatic bag from which it was removed.
2. Locate a PIX module. If no PIX module is present go to step 6.
3. Locate the PIX interconnect cables that are tie-wrapped to the BSU/RXU shelf. If
one PIX module is present, cut the tie-wrap for the cable labelled PIX0. If two PIX
modules are present, cut the tie-wraps for both cables (labelled PIX0 and PIX1).
4. Insert the first PIX module into slot 16, ensuring that the module is firmly seated in
the backplane connector. Insert the second PIX module (if present) into slot 15,
making sure that the module is firmly seated in the backplane connector.
5. Connect the cable PIX0 to the PIX module in slot number 16 and tighten the two
captive screws to secure the cable to the PIX module. Connect the cable PIX1 to
the PIX module in slot 15 (if present) and tighten the two captive screws to secure
the cable to the PIX module.
29 Aug 1997
220
GMR-04
68P02901W08-O
6. Insert the remaining modules in the BSU/RXU shelf assembly according to the
configuration information in the site specific documentation and the diagrams on
the next two pages.
7. Make sure that the switch on the front of each digital module is set to the down
(disabled) position.
8. Using a non-permanent marker, note the module arrangement used for this BSU
shelf on the label affixed to the inside of the cabinet door.
BSU shelf
Figure 2-6 shows the BSU shelf module arrangement.
DRI and DRX modules are not used in a BSSC cabinet.
XCDR modules may be replaced by an enhanced transcoder, GDP/GDP2.
The GDP is compatible only with GSR3 or later software releases. The GDP2
is compatible only with GSR7 or later software releases.
NOTE
Figure 2-6 BSU shelf
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W08-O
GMR-04
221
RXU shelf
Figure 2-7 shows the RXU shelf module arrangement.
XCDR modules may be replaced by an enhanced transcoder, GDP/GDP2.
The GDP is compatible only with GSR3 or later software releases. The GDP2
is compatible only with GSR7 or later software releases.
NOTE
Figure 2-7 RXU shelf
GSM-100-433 Installing the NVM board
29 Aug 1997
222
GMR-04
68P02901W08-O
Installing the NVM board
Introduction
This section provides the information required to install the NVM board in either a BSC or
an RXCDR site.
Installation
options
The installation options for the NVM board are as follows:
S Installation in the BSU cage 0 in a BSC.
S Installation in the RXU cage 0 in an RXCDR.
Installation procedures for both of these options are described in the following pages.
Installing the
NVM board in a
BSC
The NVM board must be installed in slot 26 (SPARE) in the BSU cage 0 (master) of the
BSC. Figure 2-8 shows the location of slot 26 in the BSU cage.
LOCATION OF
SLOT 26
Figure 2-8 Location of slot 26 in the BSU cage
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W08-O
GMR-04
223
Installing the
NVM board in an
RXCDR
The NVM board must be installed in slot 24 (XCDR 0) in the RXU cage 0 (master) of the
RXCDR. Figure 2-9 shows the location of slot 24 in the RXU cage.
An XCDR will be lost if all the XCDR slots are used. However, if slot 24 (XCDR
0) is currently being used and there is another spare XCDR slot, the XCDR
board and associated interface cabling can be moved from slot 24 to the spare
slot.
NOTE
LOCATION OF
SLOT 24
Figure 2-9 Location of slot 24 in the RXU cage
29 Aug 1997
224
GMR-04
68P02901W08-O
NVM board
installation
procedure
This procedure assumes that the BSC/RXCDR is already initialized.
Proceed as follows to install the NVM board in either the BSU or the RXU cage:
The NVM board contains devices that are sensitive to static. A suitable earth
strap must be worn when handling the module.
CAUTION
1. Unclip the protective cover from the appropriate slot. If an XCDR board is already
installed in slot 24 in the RXU cage, refer to the note in the previous section
Installing the NVM board in an RXCDR.
2. Set the RESET/DISABLE switch on the front panel of the NVM board to the
DISABLE position.
3. Insert the NVM board into the slot, ensuring that it locks firmly into the backplane.
4. Move the RESET/DISABLE switch up to the RESET position and release.
The red ALARM LED above the RESET/DISABLE switch illuminates to indicate a
board reset has occurred. Once the software detects the NVM board, the red LED
extinguishes and the green ACTIVE LED illuminates to show that the board is
operational.
When the software detects the PCMCIA card in slot 1, the green CARD 1 STATUS
LED illuminates to show that the PCMCIA card is operational.
The red and green CARD 2 STATUS LEDs are currently not used.
NOTE
The procedure for installing the NVM board is now complete.
GSM-100-433 Installing the control signal cabling
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W08-O
GMR-04
225
Installing the control signal cabling
Introduction
The internal control signal cabling within each BSSC cabinet is factory fitted and tested.
This section deals with external connections.
Inter-cabinet
fibre optic
connections
Do not look directly into a fibre optic cable or data in/out connector with or
without the use of optical aids. Laser radiation can come from either the data
in/out connectors or unterminated fibre optic cables connected to data in/out
connectors.
WARNING
Refer to the site specific documentation for information on the following inter-cabinet fibre
optic interconnections:
S BSSC cabinet to BTS cabinet.
S BSSC cabinet to other BSSC cabinet.
E1/T1 line
connections
Transient protection of the E1/T1 lines connected to Motorola equipment is the
responsibility of the end user. All E1/T1 lines brought in from outside the
building must be spark-gap (three-anode gas tube) protected at the building
entry point. Where this is not practical, an optional transient-protection board
can be purchased from Motorola. Consult Motorola about transient protection
for the BSSC sites.
CAUTION
E1/T1 line connections are made by one of the following methods:
S 120 ohm twisted pair through a BIB mounted on top of the BSSC cabinet.
S 75 ohm coaxial cable through a T43 board mounted on top of the BSSC cabinet.
See T43 to backplane connections and BIB to backplane connections at the end of
this chapter for the connections between the T43 or BIB and the cabinet backplane.
29 Aug 1997
226
GMR-04
68P02901W08-O
End user I/O
device cabling
A maximum of two PIX modules per cabinet allows for a total of eight sets of output
control contacts and 16 input sense contacts at the BSSC site.
Relay-closure outputs
If connectors PIX0 and/or PIX1 on the cabinet interconnect panel are unused,
they should be protected from damage by static electricity or foreign matter by
ensuring that the covers supplied are fitted.
CAUTION
The PIX module includes four relays controlled by a GPROC. There are both normally
open and normally closed contacts for each of the four relays. The contacts are rated for
1A at 30 V and can be used to control external equipment at the site such as fans or
audible alarms. The external equipment is connected to the BSSC at the 62-pin D-type
connector marked PIX0 or PIX1 on the interconnect panel.
Dry-contact inputs
The PIX module includes eight inputs which can be used to connect external sensors.
These inputs cause alarms to be reported at the BSC, which forwards the alarm to the
OMC.
The external sensors are supplied by the end user. Each sensor is connected across a
pair of PIX inputs (SEN Dn and SEN Sn, where n corresponds to a PIX opto-coupler 1 to
8). For correct operation, all sensors must be of the dry-contact type with the following
specification:
S 10 kohms or greater across sense inputs is required for a logic 1 (PIX opto-coupler
off).
S 1 kohm or less across sense inputs is required for a logic 0 (PIX opto-coupler on).
These inputs are available at the 62-pin D-type connectors marked PIX0 and PIX1 on the
interconnect panel. Ensure that the connector being used is terminated at a PIX module
in the cabinet.
PIX connector
Figure 2-10 shows the PIX connector:
ig.279.rh
43 62
22 42
1 21
(MATING SIDE OF FEMALE CONNECTOR VIEWED FROM
TOP OF CABINET)
Figure 2-10 PIX connector
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W08-O
GMR-04
227
PIX connector
details
Table 2-9 lists the PIX connector details:
Table 2-9 PIX connector details
PIN no. Function PIN no. Function PIN no. Function
1 Sense S7 22 Not used 43 Not used
2 Sense D7 23 Not used 44 Sense S8
3 Not used 24 Not used 45 Sense D8
13 Not used 34 Not used 55 Not used
14 Common 4 35 Not used 56 NC4
15 Not used 36 NO4 57 Not used
21 Not used 42 NO1
GSM-100-433 T43 to backplane connections
29 Aug 1997
228
GMR-04
68P02901W08-O
T43 to backplane connections
Introduction
The following tables show the mapping between a single backplane and the four
associated T43 positions (MS0 to MS3). Equipment containing two card cages will have
four T43 positions associated with each cage. Some equipment, for example the BTS,
may not equip all four T43 positions.
The following mappings are listed:
S MS0 to BSU.
S MS1 to BSU.
S MS2 to BSU.
S MS3 to BSU.
S MS0 to RXU.
S MS1 to RXU.
S MS2 to RXU.
S MS3 to RXU.
MS0 to BSU
Table 2-10 lists T43 MS0 to BSU backplane card slot mapping:
Table 2-10 MS0 to BSU card slot mapping
MSI no. Card slot T43 conn. PIN
no.
4 L13 J1, Tx
4 L13 J2, Rx
4 L13 J4, Tx
4 L13 J5, Rx
2 L15 J7, Tx
2 L15 J8, Rx
2 L15 J10, Tx
2 L15 J11, Rx
0 L17 J13, Tx
0 L17 J14, Rx
0 L17 J16, Tx
0 L17 J17, Rx
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W08-O
GMR-04
229
MS1 to BSU
no.
5 L12 J1, Tx
5 L12 J2, Rx
5 L12 J4, Tx
5 L12 J5, Rx
3 L14 J7, Tx
3 L14 J8, Rx
3 L14 J10, Tx
3 L14 J11, Rx
1 L16 J13, Tx
1 L16 J14, Rx
1 L16 J16, Tx
1 L16 J17, Rx
MS2 to BSU
no.
10 L7 J1, Tx
10 L7 J2, Rx
10 L7 J4, Tx
10 L7 J5, Rx
8 L9 J7, Tx
8 L9 J8, Rx
8 L9 J10, Tx
8 L9 J11, Rx
6 L11 J13, Tx
6 L11 J14, Rx
6 L11 J16, Tx
6 L11 J17, Rx
29 Aug 1997
230
GMR-04
68P02901W08-O
MS3 to BSU
no.
11 L6 J1, Tx
11 L6 J2, Rx
11 L6 J4, Tx
11 L6 J5, Rx
9 L8 J7, Tx
9 L8 J8, Rx
9 L8 J10, Tx
9 L8 J11, Rx
7 L10 J13, Tx
7 L10 J14, Rx
7 L10 J16, Tx
7 L10 J17, Rx
MS0 to RXU
Table 2-14 lists T43 MS0 to RXU backplane card slot mapping:
Table 2-14 MS0 to RXU card slot mapping
MSI/XCDR
/GDP
Card slot T43 conn.
PIN no.
XCDR 5 L19 J1, Tx
XCDR 5 L19 J2, Rx
XCDR 4 L20 J4, Tx
XCDR 4 L20 J5, Rx
XCDR 3 L21 J7, Tx
XCDR 3 L21 J8, Rx
XCDR 2 L22 J10, Tx
XCDR 2 L22 J11, Rx
XCDR 1 L23 J13, Tx
XCDR 1 L23 J14, Rx
XCDR 0 L24 J16, Tx
XCDR 0 L24 J17, Rx
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W08-O
GMR-04
231
MS1 to RXU
MSI/XCDR
/GDP
Card slot T43 conn.
PIN no.
XCDR 11 L13 J1, Tx
XCDR 11 L13 J2, Rx
XCDR 10 L14 J4, Tx
XCDR 10 L14 J5, Rx
XCDR 9 L15 J7, Tx
XCDR 9 L15 J8, Rx
XCDR 8 L16 J10, Tx
XCDR 8 L16 J11, Rx
XCDR 7 L17 J13, Tx
XCDR 7 L17 J14, Rx
XCDR 6 L18 J16, Tx
XCDR 6 L18 J17, Rx
MS2 to RXU
MSI/XCDR
/GDP
Card slot T43 conn.
PIN no.
XCDR 1 L9 J1, Tx
XCDR 1 L9 J2, Rx
XCDR 1 L9 J4, Tx
XCDR 1 L9 J5, Rx
XCDR 0 L10 J7, Tx
XCDR 0 L10 J8, Rx
XCDR 0 L10 J10, Tx
XCDR 0 L10 J11, Rx
XCDR 13 L11 J13, Tx
XCDR 13 L11 J14, Rx
XCDR 12 L12 J16, Tx
XCDR 12 L12 J17, Rx
29 Aug 1997
232
GMR-04
68P02901W08-O
MS3 to RXU
Table 2-17 MS3 to RXU cardslot mapping
MSI/XCDR
/GDP
Card slot T43 conn.
PIN no.
XCDR 4 L6 J1, Tx
XCDR 4 L6 J2, Rx
XCDR 4 L6 J4, Tx
XCDR 4 L6 J5, Rx
XCDR 3 L7 J7, Tx
XCDR 3 L7 J8, Rx
XCDR 3 L7 J10, Tx
XCDR 3 L7 J11, Rx
XCDR 2 L8 J13, Tx
XCDR 2 L8 J14, Rx
XCDR 2 L8 J16, Tx
XCDR 2 L8 J17, Rx
GSM-100-433 BIB to backplane connections
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W08-O
GMR-04
233
BIB to backplane connections
Introduction
The following tables show the mapping between a single backplane and the four
associated BIB positions (MS0 to MS3). Equipment containing two card cages will have
four BIB positions associated with each cage.
The mappings listed are:
S MS0 to BSU.
S MS1 to BSU.
S MS2 to BSU.
S MS3 to BSU.
S MS0 to RXU.
S MS1 to RXU.
S MS2 to RXU.
S MS3 to RXU.
29 Aug 1997
234
GMR-04
68P02901W08-O
MS0 to BSU
Table 2-18 lists the BIB MS0 to BSU backplane card slot mapping:
MSI no. Card
slot
PCM signal
(MSI board)
BIB conn.
PIN no.
Signal
(BIB board)
BIB no.
& MS no.
4 L13 MEGATX+ J11 EXT_MEGA_RX1+ 0
4 L13 MEGATX J120 EXT_MEGA_RX1 0
4 L13 MEGARX+ J12 EXT_MEGA_TX1+ 0
4 L13 MEGARX J121 EXT_MEGA_TX1 0
4 L13 MEGBTX+ J14 EXT_MEGA_RX4+ 0
4 L13 MEGBTX J123 EXT_MEGA_RX4 0
4 L13 MEGBRX+ J15 EXT_MEGA_TX4+ 0
4 L13 MEGBRX J124 EXT_MEGA_TX4 0
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W08-O
GMR-04
235
MS1 to BSU
MSI no. Card
slot
PCM signal
(MSI board)
BIB conn.
PIN no.
Signal
(BIB board)
BIB no.
& MS no.
29 Aug 1997
236
GMR-04
68P02901W08-O
MS2 to BSU
MSI no. Card
slot
PCM signal
(MSI board)
BIB conn.
PIN no.
Signal
(BIB board)
BIB no.
& MS no.
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W08-O
GMR-04
237
MS3 to BSU
MSI no. Card
slot
PCM signal
(MSI board)
BIB conn.
PIN no.
Signal
(BIB board)
BIB no.
& MS no.
29 Aug 1997
238
GMR-04
68P02901W08-O
MS0 to RXU
Table 2-22 lists the BIB MS0 to RXU backplane card slot mapping:
MSI/XCDR
/GDP
Card
slot
PCM signal
(MSI/XCDR
board)
BIB
conn.
PIN no.
Signal
(BIB board)
BIB no.
& MS no.
XCDR 5 L19 MEGATX+ J11 EXT_MEGA_RX1+ 0
XCDR 5 L19 MEGATX J120 EXT_MEGA_RX1 0
XCDR 5 L19 MEGARX+ J12 EXT_MEGA_TX1+ 0
XCDR 5 L19 MEGARX J121 EXT_MEGA_TX1 0
XCDR 4 L20 MEGBTX+ J14 EXT_MEGA_RX4+ 0
XCDR 4 L20 MEGBTX J123 EXT_MEGA_RX4 0
XCDR 4 L20 MEGBRX+ J15 EXT_MEGA_TX4+ 0
XCDR 4 L20 MEGBRX J124 EXT_MEGA_TX4 0
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W08-O
GMR-04
239
MS1 to RXU
MSI/XCDR
/GDP
Card
slot
PCM signal
(MSI/XCDR
board)
BIB
conn.
PIN no.
Signal
(BIB board)
BIB no.
& MS no.
29 Aug 1997
240
GMR-04
68P02901W08-O
MS2 to RXU
MSI/XCDR
/GDP
Card
slot
PCM signal
(MSI/XCDR
board)
BIB
conn.
PIN no.
Signal
(BIB board)
BIB no.
& MS no.
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W08-O
GMR-04
241
MS3 to RXU
MSI/XCDR
/GDP
Card
slot
PCM signal
(MSI/XCDR
board)
BIB
conn.
PIN no.
Signal
(BIB board)
BIB no.
& MS no.
29 Aug 1997
242
GMR-04
68P02901W08-O
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W08-O
GMR-04
i
Chapter 3
Decommissioning the equipment
GSM-100-433
29 Aug 1997
ii
GMR-04
68P02901W08-O
GSM-100-433
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W08-O
GMR-04
iii
Chapter 3
Overview 31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Prerequisite 31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Before starting 32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure 32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BSSC checklist 34 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GSM-100-433
29 Aug 1997
iv
GMR-04
68P02901W08-O
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W08-O
GMR-04
31
Overview
Introduction
This chapter describes how to decommission BSSC cabinets. To decommission
equipment not supplied by Motorola, for example battery chargers, power supplies and
antennas, refer to the vendors instructions.
cabinets.
WARNING
Use extreme caution when working on a cabinet with power applied. Remove
all rings, watches and other jewellery.
WARNING
Prerequisite
Read Chapter 1 of this manual before attempting to decommission a base site.
Lifting cabinets
BSSC cabinets are fitted with four lifting points, designed to accommodate M12 eyebolts,
built in to the top panels. These lifting points are fitted with plastic inserts to protect the
threads. Motorola kit number SWLN4648A contains four M12 eyebolts manufactured to
C.E. conformity, each with a safe weight load of 400 kg and individually numbered. Only
eyebolts supplied in this kit must be used.
Before attempting to insert the eyebolts, visually check each one for any damage that
may have occurred in transit. If any damage is apparent, DO NOT USE; contact
Motorola for replacement.
To use the eyebolts correctly:
1. Carefully remove the plastic insert from the M12 threaded lifting point.
2. Insert the eyebolt into the thread, ensuring that no cross-threading occurs.
The eyebolts must not be overtightened; hand tight is sufficient. Screw the
eyebolt fully into the lifting point so that no thread is left exposed.
WARNING
3. Repeat the procedure until all four eyebolts have been correctly fitted.
4. When the lifting operation is complete, remove the eyebolts and refit the plastic
inserts.
For continued use of eyebolts, there may be local regulations that govern the use of
lifting equipment and stipulate a test and/or examination regime. If the eyebolts are to be
used, ensure that all such regulations are met.
GSM-100-433 Decommissioning a BSSC cabinet
29 Aug 1997
32
GMR-04
68P02901W08-O
Decommissioning a BSSC cabinet
Introduction
Use the following procedure to decommission a BSSC, and use the checklist to check off
each action as it is completed. Photocopy the checklist as often as required; do not write
on the original.
Before starting
Before starting to decommission a BSSC ensure that:
S The main power source is switched off and that no power is connected to the
BSSC cabinet.
S Sufficient packing crates and cartons are available to pack the decommissioned
equipment.
Procedure
To decommission a BSSC cabinet:
1. Check the cabinet and its contents for signs of damage.
2. Use a digital voltmeter to ensure that power is not present in the cabinet.
Stow disconnected cables so that they do not constitute a hazard to personnel
using the site.
WARNING
3. Disconnect the positive and negative leads, of the cabinet input dc power cable,
from the main power source. Do not remove the earth lead. Put the cables in
suitable packaging.
4. Disconnect the E1/T1 link cables from the cabinet and secure them to the
overhead racking.
BSSC cabinets use circuitry which is sensitive to static discharge. Avoid
handling the modules in a high-static environment. When handling the
modules, do not touch connector contacts. An earthed high-impedance wrist
strap must be worn when handling modules.
CAUTION
5. Remove the fibre optic cables from the LANX modules and put them into suitable
packaging.
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W08-O
GMR-04
33
6. Using a suitable screwdriver remove:
The T43 or BIB boards including covers.
The PIX modules from shelf 0.
The BTC modules (from both shelves), take care not to damage the threads
on the extractor lever covers.
The remaining half size modules (from both shelves).
7. Ensure that the optical ports on the LANX modules are protected by dust caps.
Put the boards and modules into antistatic bags then carefully pack them in the
boxes provided.
8. Remove the following full-size modules from both shelves:
The KSW modules.
The GPROC/GPROC2 modules.
The MSI modules.
The GCLK modules.
9. Put the modules into antistatic bags then carefully pack them in the boxes
provided.
10. Remove the PSMs. Put the modules into antistatic bags then carefully pack them
in the boxes provided.
11. Disconnect the power leads from the cabinet and the earth lead from the cabinet
and the main power source.
12. If the BSSC is mounted on a plinth, remove the bottom fittings (bolts and washers)
then carefully pack them in suitable bags.
13. Remove the overhead cable trough and supports and put them into suitable
packaging.
An unequipped BSSC cabinet can weigh up to 136 kg (300 lb). Handle
cabinets with extreme caution to avoid tipping.
WARNING
14. Move the cabinet to a location where it can be safely packed into its wooden
transit case.
29 Aug 1997
34
GMR-04
68P02901W08-O
BSSC checklist
ENGINEERS NAME DATE
SIGNATURE
SITE NAME
EQUIPMENT TYPE
NAT ID
All fibre optic cables disconnected
ACTION YES NO N/A
PSU decommissioned
Packing material (including antistatic bags) on site
Are cabinets damaged? If yes detail in comments box.
Cables disconnected fromtop of cabinet and stowed
PIX/ T43/ BIB/ BTC and modules removed and packed
Remaining half size modules removed and packed
GPROC/GPROC2 modules removed and packed
MSI/ KSWmodules removed and packed
GCLK modules removed and packed
PSMs removed and packed
All loose cables in the cabinet stowed and secured
Earth cable disconnected fromcabinet
Air deflector removed and packed
Cabinet bottomfittings removed and packed
Cabinet packed in transit case
Cable trough and supports removed and packed
COMMENTS
C
H
A
P
T
E
R

2
G
E
N
E
R
A
L

P
R
O
C
E
D
U
R
E
S
C
H
A
P
T
E
R

3
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
P
R
O
C
E
D
U
R
E
S
C
H
A
P
T
E
R

4
R
E
P
L
A
C
E
M
E
N
T
P
R
O
C
E
D
U
R
E
S
C
H
A
P
T
E
R

5
M
I
S
C
E
L
L
A
N
E
O
U
S

R
E
P
A
I
R
C
H
A
P
T
E
R

1

I
N
T
R
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
N
29 Aug 1997
Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR
68P02901W09-O
GMR-04
i
Category 533
Maintenance Information
GSM-100-533
29 Aug 1997
ii
GMR-04
68P02901W09-O
GSM-100-533
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W09-O
GMR-04
iii
Category 533
Maintenance Information i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 1
Introduction i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Audience 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Prerequisites 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Structure 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 2
Introduction 21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Definition 25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MMI uses 25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose 26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Prerequisites 26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure 26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 210 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Prerequisites 210 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Prerequisites 213 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 215 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure 215 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 3
Introduction 31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Prerequisites 31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GSM-100-533
29 Aug 1997
iv
GMR-04
68P02901W09-O
Introduction 32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety 34 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cable tray 34 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power System 35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cabling 36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Grounding 37 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 4
Purpose 41 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description 41 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Illustrations 43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Illustration 45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing CLKXA 45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing CLKXB 46 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 47 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Illustration 47 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the fan 48 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 49 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Illustration 49 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GSM-100-533
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W09-O
GMR-04
v
Overview 411 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Prerequisite 411 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Illustration 411 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conditions 411 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 413 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test equipment 413 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Commands 413 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Process 414 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 416 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Illustration 418 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 419 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Prerequisites 419 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Illustration 419 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure 420 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 421 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Prerequisites 421 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Illustration 421 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure 421 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 423 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Illustration 423 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LED indications 424 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 426 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure 426 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 427 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Prerequisites 427 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 429 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure 429 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GSM-100-533
29 Aug 1997
vi
GMR-04
68P02901W09-O
Overview 430 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Illustration 430 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure 431 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 432 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Illustration 432 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure 433 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 434 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Illustration 435 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure 435 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NVM replacement 437 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 437 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PIX replacement 439 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 439 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Illustration 439 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 440 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Applications 440 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Illustration 440 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 5
Introduction 51 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 52 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Indications 52 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 54 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conditions 54 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure 1 55 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure 2 56 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure 3 56 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure 4 58 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Redundant KSWs 58 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure 5 58 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GSM-100-533
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W09-O
GMR-04
vii
Introduction 510 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Background 510 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Precautions 510 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 513 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Background 513 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Precautions 513 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PDB removal 514 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AIB removal 515 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 517 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Prerequisites 517 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose 523 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure 1 523 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure 2 524 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GSM-100-533
29 Aug 1997
viii
GMR-04
68P02901W09-O
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W09-O
GMR-04
i
Chapter 1
Introduction
GSM-100-533
29 Aug 1997
ii
GMR-04
68P02901W09-O
GSM-100-533
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W09-O
GMR-04
iii
Chapter 1
Introduction i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Audience 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Prerequisites 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Structure 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GSM-100-533
29 Aug 1997
iv
GMR-04
68P02901W09-O
GSM-100-533 Introduction
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W09-O
GMR-04
11
Introduction
Overview
This chapter:
S Gives the purpose of the maintenance category.
S Lists prerequisites for using the maintenance category.
S Lists documents related to this category.
Audience
This category is for technical staff who work at Base Station System (BSS) sites.
The category assumes a degree of familiarity with Motorola BSS hardware and software.
Technical staff may use this manual to diagnose and repair the BSSC/2 cabinets.
Purpose of the
manual
Use the procedures contained within this category to remove and replace various
components in the cabinet.
Prerequisites
This category assumes the reader knows:
S How to operate a local maintenance terminal (LMT).
S How the BSS system works.
Structure
The manual contains the following:
S General procedures
This chapter contains general information, including information on:
Resetting and reinitializing a site.
Connecting a local maintenance terminal (LMT) to a cabinet.
Locating and identifying faulty cabinets and devices.
S Maintenance procedures
This chapter contains information on the maintenance procedures to be carried out
on the BSC/RXCDR cabinets.
S Replacement procedures
This chapter contains detailed replacement procedures for components within the
BSC/RXCDR cabinet.
S Miscellaneous repair
This chapter contains replacement/repair procedures for cabinet components not
included in the Replacement procedures chapter.
GSM-100-533 Introduction
29 Aug 1997
12
GMR-04
68P02901W09-O
Related
documentation
There are two types of reference documentation, required reference and general
reference.
S Required reference documentation consists of books which supplement the
information contained within this manual. The required reference documentation
for this manual is the Technical Description: BSS Command Reference
(GSM-100-321).
S General reference documentation contains background information to this manual.
General reference documents to this manual are Maintenance Information: GSM
Alarm Handling at the OMC-R and Operating Information: GSM System Operation
(GSM-100-201).
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W09-O
GMR-04
i
Chapter 2
General procedures
GSM-100-533
29 Aug 1997
ii
GMR-04
68P02901W09-O
GSM-100-533
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W09-O
GMR-04
iii
Chapter 2
Introduction 21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Definition 25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MMI uses 25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose 26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Prerequisites 26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure 26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 210 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Prerequisites 210 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Prerequisites 213 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 215 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure 215 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GSM-100-533
29 Aug 1997
iv
GMR-04
68P02901W09-O
GSM-100-533 General procedures
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W09-O
GMR-04
21
General procedures
Introduction
This chapter contains general repair information. This information applies to all
maintenance and repair procedures.
Motorola recommends reading this chapter before:
S Leaving for a site.
S Beginning a repair procedure.
Table 2-1 lists the different sections in this chapter.
Table 2-1 General procedures sections
Section entitled Information contained
Test and Repair equipment
lists
S A list of required testing equipment.
S A list of required repair equipment.
General repair procedures Site configuration overview information.
Man Machine Interface Information on the uses of MMI.
Locating faulty cabinets Instructions for isolating a fault to a cabinet
Connecting the Local
Maintenance Terminal (LMT)
Instructions for:
Connecting the LMT.
Setting up the MMI interface.
Changing the security level.
Identifying the faulty devices The procedure for displaying alarms at the LMT.
Resetting and re-initializing a
site
The procedure for resetting and re-initializing a site
for power distribution unit module replacement.
GSM-100-533 Test and Repair equipment lists
29 Aug 1997
22
GMR-04
68P02901W09-O
Test and Repair equipment lists
Repair
equipment list
Table 2-2 lists the tools Motorola recommends for repairing cabinets.
Table 2-2 Repair equipment
1 Torque wrench, calibrated in newton meters or footpounds
1 Torx driver, size T30
1 Nut driver, size 3/8ths inch
1 Nut driver, size 5/16ths inch
1 Flat blade screwdriver
1 Phillips screwdriver
1 Tamper-proof Allen key for loosening and tightening the
covers on external cabinet locks
1 Motorola approved wrist strap
1 Anti-static pad
May vary, depending
on the number of
boards being
removed.
Anti-static containers or bags
1 Set, jewellers screwdrivers, both Phillips and flat blade
1 Bucket
Mild dishwashing soap or detergent
GSM-100-533 Test and Repair equipment lists
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W09-O
GMR-04
23
Test equipment
list
Table 2-3 lists the test equipment Motorola recommends for diagnosing and testing
BSSC cabinets.
Table 2-3 GSM test equipment
1 IBM compatible personal computer (PC) with the following
minimum specifications:
Intel 486 processor.
170 MB hard drive.
8 MB RAM.
ODS Local Area Network (LAN) card.
NOTE
Some software tools require a PC with these specifications. If
the only purpose of the PC is to monitor alarms and enter
MMI commands , a PC with the following specifications
should suffice:
Intel 386 processor.
60MB hard drive.
4 MB RAM.
ODS Local Area Network (LAN) card.
1 RS232 cable. 9-way female to 25-way male
1 ESD protection kit
GSM-100-533 General repair procedures
29 Aug 1997
24
GMR-04
68P02901W09-O
General repair procedures
Overview
The Operations and Maintenance Centre (OMC) uses Base Station System (BSS) Fault
Management software to determine whether or not a site is in a fault condition. If it is, the
OMC sends a technician to the site to fix the problem.
The rest of this section contains general steps to follow to isolate the fault.
Site
configuration
A site may include either or both of the following:
S Base station controller (BSC).
S Remote transcoder (RXCDR).
This manual assumes familiarity with these components. Refer to the appropriate service
manuals for detailed descriptions.
GSM-100-533 Man machine interface (MMI)
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W09-O
GMR-04
25
Man machine interface (MMI)
Definition
The MMI is the interface between the user and the software.
The MMI may run on:
S A terminal at the Operations and Maintenance Centre (OMC).
S A Local Maintenance Terminal (LMT).
MMI uses
Use the MMI to :
S Obtain information from the system:
Display alarm reports.
Retrieve device status.
S Control the system:
Take modules out of service (OOS).
Put modules into service (INS).
GSM-100-533 Locating faulty cabinets
29 Aug 1997
26
GMR-04
68P02901W09-O
Locating faulty cabinets
Purpose
This section contains instructions for isolating a particular fault to a particular cabinet.
Prerequisites
These steps assume that:
S The OMC requested a visit to the site.
S The OMC knew the site locations, and which cabinet was generating the alarm.
Procedure
Follow these steps to isolate the fault to a cabinet.
1. Enter the site if it is safe to do so.
2. Determine whether the BSC or RXCDR cabinets have alarm LEDs in the door.
Some older cabinets have an LED in the upper left corner. Later generations of
cabinets do not have this LED.
The cabinet LED indicates that the cabinet is receiving power.
If the cabinet... Then...
has an LED in the door... continue with step 3.
does not have an LED in the
door...
skip ahead to step 4.
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W09-O
GMR-04
27
3. Check the LED on each BSC and RXCDR cabinet.
If the door
LED is...
The
cabinet...
Therefore...
lit... has power... continue with step 4.
off... does not
have
power...
investigate the power failure to this cabinet.
i. Check the rectifiers for correct
operation. Refer to the documentation
supplied by the rectifier manufacturer.
If the rectifiers are working correctly,
continue with step ii, below.
If the rectifiers are working incorrectly,
repair or replace them according to
the manufacturers instructions.
Check back with the OMC to see if
the alarm is cleared.
If the alarm is cleared, the condition is
fixed. No further action is necessary.
If the alarm has not cleared, continue
with step ii, below.
ii. Check the top of the cabinet to see if
there is voltage present.
If there is no voltage present, check
for an auto disconnect.
If voltage is present, check for an
internal failure.
4. Open the door of the faulty cabinet.
The OMC should be able to identify the faulty cabinet, getting the information from
various alarm messages sent by the system.
If the OMC has not identified the faulty cabinet, open each cabinet at the site until
one with a fault indication is found. Such an indication would be a lit Alarm (red)
LED.
5. Note the status of the LED indicators on the front panel of each module equipped
with them.
6. Continue with Connecting a local maintenance terminal (LMT)
29 Aug 1997
28
GMR-04
68P02901W09-O
Figure 2-1 and Figure 2-2 show BSU and RXU module location within a shelf.
If AMR hardware modules are fitted retrospectively in BSSC installations, for
the purpose of these figures:
For KSWX, read DSWX as relevant.
For KSW, read DSW2 as relevant.
NOTE
Figure 2-1 BSU shelf modules slot assignment layout and backplane connectors
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W09-O
GMR-04
29
Figure 2-2 RXU shelf modules slot assignment layout and backplane connectors
GSM-100-533 Connecting a local maintenance terminal (LMT)
29 Aug 1997
210
GMR-04
68P02901W09-O
Connecting a local maintenance terminal (LMT)
Overview
Most of the diagnostic and repair procedures suggest connecting a Local Maintenance
Terminal (LMT) in order to enter MMI commands, lock and unlock devices, and view
alarms.
This section gives detailed instructions for connecting the LMT.
Required tools
and equipment
This procedure requires the following equipment:
S IBM - compatible Personal Computer (PC).
S RS-232 cable.
Refer to Table 2-2 for a list of repair equipment specifications and Table 2-3 for a list of
test equipment specifications.
Prerequisites
Before performing the steps in this procedure, determine which cabinet contains the
master processor.
Connecting the
LMT to a GPROC
The following procedure details the steps required to connect a PC to a GPROC, or
GPROC2, creating an LMT.
1. Open the cabinet containing the master GPROC.
2. Locate the master GPROC.
Motorola recommends connecting a PC to the master GPROC. However, a PC
can be connected to any GPROC that is not in an alarm state.
3. Connect one end of the RS-232 cable to the asynchronous communications
controller port of the PC, and the other end to the TTY port connector on the front
panel of the master GPROC.
4. Power up the PC.
The PC is now a Local Maintenance Terminal (LMT).
5. Continue with Setting up the MMI.
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W09-O
GMR-04
211
Setting up the
MMI
Follow these steps to set up the Local Maintenance Terminal.
1. Set the LMT TTY port parameters as:
9600 baud.
8 data bits.
1 stop bit.
1 start bit.
no parity.
2. Press the RETURN (or ENTER) key.
The LMT displays one of the following prompts:
MMI-ROM 0115 > (for GPROC running in ROM).
MMI-RAM 0115 > (for GPROC running in RAM).
Work from either prompt.
Connection to the master GPROC will result in the number 0115 being
displayed as above. Connection to a GPROC other than the master, will result
in a different number being displayed.
NOTE
Changing the
security level
Follow these steps to change the security level.
1. Enter the disp_level command at the prompt.
The system displays the current user security level, like this:
Current security level is 1
2. Enter the chg_level command at the prompt.
The system asks for the password to gain access to the next level. There are two
passwords available:
One password changes the security level to Level 2.
The second password changes the security level to Level 3.
Passwords must be entered in sequence. The system does not permit a jump
from security Level 1 to security Level 3. Security Level 2 must be accessed
first, followed by security Level 3.
The passwords to gain access to security Level 3 will be held by the OMC.
NOTE
29 Aug 1997
212
GMR-04
68P02901W09-O
3. Enter the password to access the next level of security.
Enter the
password...
And the system displays... Then continue with...
correctly in
ROM...
the new security level and the
system prompt:
Current security level is x
MMI-ROM 0115 >
Where x is the new security
level. Possible values are:
2.
3.
Identifying the faulty
devices
correctly in
RAM...
the new security level and the
system prompt:
Current security level is x
MMI-RAM 0115 >
Where x is the new security
level. Possible values are:
2.
3.
Identifying the faulty
devices
incorrectly the old security level and system
prompt.
step 3 and step 4, until the
system displays the new
security level.
GSM-100-533 Identifying the faulty devices
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W09-O
GMR-04
213
Identifying the faulty devices
Prerequisites
Before performing the steps in this procedure,:
S Locate the faulty cabinet.
S Connect the LMT.
Equipment safety
During replacement procedures, it may be possible to identify signs of damage caused
by overheating, short circuits or sudden component failure. This may indicate a problem
that could repeat itself, cause additional damage, or be a symptom of a failure
elsewhere. Analysis of the problem may identify common faults and make corrective
action possible.
It is recommended that:
S The OMC is informed that an equipment safety problem has been identified.
S The steps for Reporting safety issues are followed. These are detailed in the
introductory section of this manual.
Checking the
alarm status
Use the following steps to check the status of the device that is reporting the alarm.
Devices that are Out Of Service (OOS) report an operational state of
disabled.
NOTE
1. To enable alarm reporting, enter the following command at the LMT:
enable_alarm <site>
Where: is:
site 0 or BSC if the site is a
BSC site.
site 0 if the site is an XCDR
site
2. To display a list of the currently active Fault Management Initiated Cleared and
Operator Initiated Cleared alarms, enter the following command at the LMT:
disp_act_alarm <site>
Where: is:
site 0 or BSC if the site is a
BSC site.
site 0 if the site is an XCDR
site
GSM-100-533 Identifying the faulty devices
29 Aug 1997
214
GMR-04
68P02901W09-O
3. Observe the displayed alarm report and active alarm list.
The system now displays alarm reports as they occur. The module in the alarm
report is detecting the alarm.
4. Check to see if the module reporting the alarm, or that has an active alarm, is the
same as the module with a status LED indicating a fault.
This module may be the source of the fault. However, some other device, cable or
shelf could be causing the fault.
5. Look up the Device Alarm in the Device Alarms tables, detailed in Maintenance
Information: BSS Field Troubleshooting (GSM100523).
There is an Alarm table for each device or digital board.
6. Diagnose the problem by following the Fault Diagnosis procedure indicated in the
Device Alarm table.
7. If necessary, use the module replacement procedures detailed in this manual to
replace the suspect module.
Additional fault isolation may be necessary if the module reporting the failure is replaced,
placed in service and new alarms are reported again. To perform this additional fault
isolation, evaluate the actual alarm message that the module is reporting. Refer to the
GSM event/alarm messages in Maintenance Information: Alarm Handling at the OMC
(GSM-100-501) for a list of valid alarm reports and alarm information details.
GSM-100-533 Resetting and reinitializing a site
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W09-O
GMR-04
215
Resetting and reinitializing a site
Overview
BSS software commands cannot take BSSC cabinet power distribution unit modules Out
of Service (OOS).
Procedure
Follow these steps to reset a site for power distribution unit module replacement.
Resetting the site takes the site out of service (OOS) and drops all calls. It is
advisable to perform this procedure during periods of low traffic.
CAUTION
1. Enter reset_bss at the local Maintenance Terminal (LMT).
2. Replace the faulty module using the appropriate procedure.
3. Activate the front panel RESET switch on each of the following modules to
reinitialize the site and put it back In Service (INS).
MSI
KSW/TSW
GPROC
4. Verify the site automatically re-boots and is INS.
GSM-100-533 Resetting and reinitializing a site
29 Aug 1997
216
GMR-04
68P02901W09-O
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W09-O
GMR-04
i
Chapter 3
Maintenance Procedures
GSM-100-533
29 Aug 1997
ii
GMR-04
68P02901W09-O
GSM-100-533
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W09-O
GMR-04
iii
Chapter 3
Introduction 31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Prerequisites 31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety 34 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cable tray 34 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power System 35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cabling 36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Grounding 37 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GSM-100-533
29 Aug 1997
iv
GMR-04
68P02901W09-O
GSM-100-533 Maintenance procedures
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W09-O
GMR-04
31
Maintenance procedures
Introduction
This chapter contains the maintenance procedures for the BSSC/BSSC2 cabinet.
Prerequisites
These procedures assume that field personnel are competent to work on Motorola
BSSC/BSSC2 equipment.
GSM-100-533 Air filter replacement
29 Aug 1997
32
GMR-04
68P02901W09-O
Air filter replacement
Introduction
As part of BSSC/BSSC2 cabinet maintenance, foam air filters should be replaced every
six months with new or previously washed filters.
Replacement
procedure
Follow the procedure detailed under Air filter replacement in chapter 4, to correctly
replace cabinet foam air filters.
Air filter cleaning
Air filters removed from BSSC/BSSC2 cabinets during air filter replacement must be
washed prior to storing for reuse. Follow the procedure detailed under Cleaning cabinet
air filters later in this chapter, to correctly clean used foam air filters.
GSM-100-533 Cleaning cabinet air filters
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W09-O
GMR-04
33
Cleaning cabinet air filters
Introduction
Follow these instructions to wash the foam air filters fitted to the cabinet after they have
been removed and taken to a location were they are to be cleaned.
Tools and
equipment
This procedure requires the following tools and equipment.
S A bucket, or similar container.
S A source of warm water.
S Mild soap, dishwashing soap or detergent.
Cleaning cabinet
air filters
To clean the cabinet air filters proceed as follows:
1. Wash the filter in warm soapy water.
2. Squeeze the water out of the filter gently, and allow the filter to dry.
Do not wring the filter. Wringing may tear the material.
CAUTION
3. Inspect the filter for splits and holes. If the filter is undamaged it should be stored
for reuse. Damaged filters are to be discarded in accordance with local
guidelines.
GSM-100-533 Performing a physical inspection
29 Aug 1997
34
GMR-04
68P02901W09-O
Performing a physical inspection
General
information
A physical inspection of all Motorola equipment should take place annually.
Motorola supplied computer equipment has a minimum environmental requirement. All
indoor equipment is to be installed in dry, cool, dust free conditions with adequate access
and lighting. Temperature control will be maintained with reference to the equipment heat
dissipation figures found in the relevant equipment documentation and the surrounding
environment.
Overall handling specifications:
S Storage:
Humidity 10 to 90% non-condensing relative
Temperature 40 to +70 degrees C
S Operate:
Humidity 20 to 80% non-condensing relative
Temperature 0 to +50 degrees C
S Dust: < 5 milligrams / 1000 cubic feet of air
Equipment cabinets and most modules supplied by Motorola are protected by a painted
finish. The surfaces of the cabinets are to be adequately protected from accidental
damage at all times.
An Annual physical inspection checklist is supplied later in this chapter.
Safety
Exhaust and ventilation vents are not to be obscured by installation of cabinets, particular
care should be taken not to divert or restrict air conditioning airflow to operating
equipment and any equipment present where the installation in progress may interfere or
hamper the airflow or generate adverse particulate matter.
Installation of any equipment must minimise the risk of personal injury, i.e. burrs
removed, cable tie excess tails cut flush, no loose cables, stable and secure cabinets
and racks, no exposed conductors etc.
Protective blanks, bungs and shields are to be complete and in position at all times other
than necessary for maintenance/installation.
Cable tray
Cable tray is to be of suitable size and specification for its intended purpose. There
should be sufficient free space on the tray to allow cables to flow around corners without
kinks or excessive bunching of the runs. Correct fixtures and fittings are to be used as
per manufacturers recommendations and as supplied by Motorola. Under floor or wall
tray is to be secured at a maximum of 1.5 metre intervals. Cable tray is to be grounded to
the MGB (Main Ground Bar) using a single ground cable and each section of tray is to be
bonded to its neighbour using the correct bonding leads. End plates and blanks are to be
used when cable tray ends are not to a terminated by a wall fixing.
Having equipment plumb and square increases the stability of units and reflects the
amount of care that has gone into planning the installation. Spirit levels and plumb lines
or similar tools should be used throughout. This directly demonstrates the quality and
workmanship of the installation teams.
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W09-O
GMR-04
35
Power System
All exposed terminals are to be covered using adequate insulation materials, that is,
heatshrink or blanks.
Equipment racks and stacks are to be securely bolted to the floor and if necessary
equipment racks are to be top supported.
All conductor surfaces, that is, busbars, terminals, and so, are to be protected against
corrosion by the application of an anti-oxidant compound.
Where a hazard to health exists, whether in the distribution, generation or storage stages
of the power system, it is to be clearly labelled as such. These warning labels are to be
located at the hazard point and on all access doors into any equipment room where such
a hazard is present.
Power system distribution interconnections are to be made using stainless steel fixings.
The use of any other fixing will introduce corrosion and reduce the efficiency and life of
the system.
Distribution busbars and cables are to be clearly labelled at both ends with the correct
colour coding and circuit identification.
Circuit breakers are to be of the correct rating and clearly labelled with the user unit
identification.
29 Aug 1997
36
GMR-04
68P02901W09-O
Cabling
All cables installed are to be of the correct size and specification for their intended use.
They are to be run on appropriate cable tray, in suitable conduit or trunking, observing
minimum bend radius restrictions and care is to be taken in the planning of routes to
avoid cables crossing each other or the run containing twists or kinks. Where cables are
run in conduit, care must be taken that the heat generated by the cable is below the
conduit/cable manufacturers max recommendations. Cables running in conduit or
trunking are not to be secured using cable ties for ease of maintenance. At intersections
runs should be as close as possible to 90 degrees to prevent high electrical energy being
induced from one cable to another. RF cables are to be run in neat square runs, divided
into Cells and cabinets, that is, cables representing Cell A Cabinet 1 run together, Cell B
Cabinet 2 together, and so on, dependent on individual configuration.
Precautions should be taken to avoid any damage to cables and where appropriate,
protective devices installed. Cables are not to be run over sharp edges or burrs. Where
cables pass through or around metal panels, grommets or edging is to be used to
prevent damage to the cable insulation.
All cables are to be labelled at both ends, these being descriptive, unambiguous and
permanent, indicating where the cable should be connected. They are to be run in
straight parallel runs with smooth flowing curves. Crossing, twisting and tangles are to be
avoided.
Cable ties are to be used to support the cable when mounted on cable tray. Uniformity is
to be observed throughout the installation, that is, all ties of the same type, colour and
fixed in identical style, sized accordingly. Ties are to have the excess tail cut flush with
the locking eye so as to prevent possible injury. Care is to be taken that no cable is
damaged or distorted by cable ties.
Cable lugs are, as far as possible, to be of the permanent compression type to minimize
the possibility of connections coming loose. Lugs and Crimps are to be taped with the
appropriate colour code but not as to obscure the inspection hole. All terminations are to
be tight.
Where cables enter or exit the equipment room they must be sealed to the wall.
Wire wrapping connections are to have a minimum of 5 turns and are not to be
connected to a previously soldered pin. Soldered connections are to be free from excess
solder, the finish to be clean and bright, vividly highlighting the outline of the connecting
conductor.
Punch block connections are to have a maximum of 2 mm of wire protruding beyond the
punch block cutter.
Shielded cables are to be bonded at one end only. The other end cut or tied back
sufficiently to avoid connection to ground. Screen foil is to be cut back far enough and
protected using heatshrink or self vulcanising tape to remove the risk of shorting signal
pins. Unused wires are not to be cut back, but folded back neatly and secured.
Where co-axial cable crimps/splices are used there should be no visible braid or frays on
the finished connector.
Under no circumstances are cables to be cut down to fit connectors of incorrect size.
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W09-O
GMR-04
37
Grounding
Grounding is to be completed in accordance with the Motorola Grounding Guideline.
Grounding of all equipment cabinets and racks reduces noise and circulating currents. In
the equipment room this revolves around the Main Ground Bar (MGB), complemented by
an External Ground Bar (EGB). The MGB is in turn bonded to the building ground,
lightning protection devices and feeders are to be bonded to the EGB where determined
necessary by equipment manufacturer. Ground bars are to be wall / under floor mounted
using insulated fixings.
Ground bars and connections to them are to be clean, free from corrosion and treated
with anti-oxidant compound. No more than one ground connection is to be made on the
same point of contact, each grounding connection to be made using stainless steel nuts,
bolts and split spring washers.
Each ground bar connection is to be labelled identifying the user equipment. The point at
which the bond is made is to be clean and free from paint, that is, to bare metal avoiding
contact with galvanised materials. Galvanized or plated finishes are to be removed at the
point of contact.
All equipment racks are to be individually bonded to the MGB, no daisy chains. The
minimum bend radii for ground is eight inches. #2 awg or larger. Stressed #6 or larger
cable is to be secured using two hole lugs at the Ground Bar.
Lightning arrester equipment is to be no more than three feet inside the building.
Each individual section of metal cable tray is to be bonded to its neighbour, and then one
ground run to the MGB. The bonding lead is to be made from minimum 35 square mm
cable and 15cm long. Connection to the tray is to be made using correct gauge
compression type lugs, stainless steel nuts, bolts and washers.
Antioxidant compound is to be used on all ground connections to prevent the risk of
corrosion.
GSM-100-533 Annual physical inspection checklist
29 Aug 1997
38
GMR-04
68P02901W09-O
Annual physical inspection checklist
Purpose of the
annual physical
inspection
The annual physical inspection is to reveal whether each point is in accordance with
Motorola Installation Standards (Pass) or not (Fail). Where the equipment installation has
been installed by the customer or party not under the control of Motorola it is to be
indicated by * (asterisk) in either the Pass or Fail column. If there in no such item then
indicate with N/A.
Using the
checklist
To perform the annual physical inspection, use the checklist in Table 3-1. Tick against
Pass or Fail for each item checked. See Performing a physical inspection in this
chapter for full details.
Table 3-1 Annual physical inspection checklist
Description of Check
1 Adequate clearance maintained for access, maintenance
and cooling
Pass Fail
2 Air conditioning is of adequate capacity and operating
correctly
Pass Fail
3 Burrs removed from all metalwork Pass Fail
4 Cabinets and racks are individually grounded to the MGB Pass Fail
5 Cable bridge grounded to external ground bar Pass Fail
6 Cable ends and terminations made up correctly with no
exposed braid or conductor
Pass Fail
7 Cable runs are neat and straight Pass Fail
8 Cable ties are cut flush with locking eye to prevent injury Pass Fail
9 Cable ties are neat, evenly spaced and of uniform type,
colour and style of attachment
Pass Fail
10 Cable ties do not compress, distort or damage any cables Pass Fail
11 Cable tray (internal) is grounded to MGB by single cable Pass Fail
12 Cable tray installed horizontal with respect to the floor Pass Fail
13 Cable tray is adequately supported to prevent movement Pass Fail
14 Cable tray is constructed and assembled using correct
fixings
Pass Fail
15 Cable tray is of adequate specification and size Pass Fail
16 Cable tray physically undamaged Pass Fail
17 Cable tray sections are to be bonded to their neighbour
section correctly
Pass Fail
18 Cables clearly labelled at both ends Pass Fail
19 Cables not cut down to fit. Pass Fail
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W09-O
GMR-04
39
Description of Check
20 Cables observe minimum bend radii Pass Fail
21 Cables of correct type and specification Pass Fail
22 Cables run to prevent injury or hazards Pass Fail
23 Circuit breakers correctly and clearly labelled Pass Fail
24 Circuit breakers of correct type and specification Pass Fail
25 DDF cable excess folded back and secured using
heatshrink
Pass Fail
26 End plates and blanks are used where necessary Pass Fail
27 Equipment clean and free from dust Pass Fail
28 Equipment physically undamaged Pass Fail
29 Equipment racks clearly labelled Pass Fail
30 Exposed metal conductor surfaces treated with anti
oxidant compound
Pass Fail
31 Ground bars are protected against corrosion using anti
oxidant compound
Pass Fail
32 Ground bars have only one connection per contact point Pass Fail
33 Ground cables correctly and individually labelled Pass Fail
34 Grounding connections to be made using stainless steel
fixings and anti oxidant compound
Pass Fail
35 Lightning arresters are of correct type and specification Pass Fail
36 No ground connection is made to galvanised or plated
surfaces
Pass Fail
37 Power cable lugs of correct type and size Pass Fail
38 Power cables are to be correctly colour coded at both
ends
Pass Fail
39 Power cables connections tight and secured using
stainless fixings
Pass Fail
40 Protective covers, edging and grommets are fitted to
protect cables
Pass Fail
41 Punch block cables to not protrude more that 2mm beyond
the cutter
Pass Fail
42 Shielded cables grounded at one end only (donor end) Pass Fail
43 Soldered connections are correctly made Pass Fail
44 Spare bungs and blanks are to be on site Pass Fail
45 Wire wrap connections have minimum 5 turns Pass Fail
46 Wire wrap connections not made to a previously soldered
pin
Pass Fail
29 Aug 1997
310
GMR-04
68P02901W09-O
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W09-O
GMR-04
i
Chapter 4
Replacement procedures
GSM-100-533
29 Aug 1997
ii
GMR-04
68P02901W09-O
GSM-100-533
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W09-O
GMR-04
iii
Chapter 4
Purpose 41 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description 41 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Illustrations 43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Illustration 45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing CLKXA 45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing CLKXB 46 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 47 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Illustration 47 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the fan 48 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 49 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Illustration 49 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 411 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Prerequisite 411 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Illustration 411 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conditions 411 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 413 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test equipment 413 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Commands 413 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Process 414 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 416 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Illustration 418 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GSM-100-533
29 Aug 1997
iv
GMR-04
68P02901W09-O
Overview 419 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Prerequisites 419 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Illustration 419 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure 420 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 421 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Prerequisites 421 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Illustration 421 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure 421 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 423 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Illustration 423 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LED indications 424 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 426 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure 426 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 427 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Prerequisites 427 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 429 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure 429 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 430 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Illustration 430 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure 431 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 432 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Illustration 432 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure 433 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 434 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Illustration 435 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure 435 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NVM replacement 437 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 437 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GSM-100-533
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W09-O
GMR-04
v
PIX replacement 439 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 439 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Illustration 439 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 440 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Applications 440 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Illustration 440 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GSM-100-533
29 Aug 1997
vi
GMR-04
68P02901W09-O
GSM-100-533 Replacement procedures
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W09-O
GMR-04
41
Replacement procedures
Purpose
This chapter contains procedures for replacing various components within the BSS
cabinets.
Description
The OMC-R can often diagnose problems at the BSS site. The OMC-R:
S Receives alarms and statistics from the system.
S Interprets the alarms and statistics to pinpoint the problem in the system.
S Uses MMI command to try to further diagnose and possibly repair the system.
Sometimes the only possible way to fix the problem is to send field personnel to the BSS
site to replace a component in the cabinet.
As the OMC-R tries to diagnose the cause of the problems at the site, it may also be able
to identify the specific component that needs replacement. In these cases further
diagnosis and testing may be unnecessary; all that is required is to replace the
component identified by the OMC-R.
The rest of this chapter contains instructions for replacing:
S The individual full size digital boards.
S The individual half size digital boards.
Chapter structure
The replacement procedures are listed alphabetically, by device name (for example,
CLKX, or GPROC/GPROC2).
If there are different procedures for replacing a redundant device and a similar
non-redundant device (such as redundant and non-redundant CLKX modules) the
instructions for replacing the redundant device are given first.
GSM-100-533 Air filter replacement
29 Aug 1997
42
GMR-04
68P02901W09-O
Air filter replacement
Introduction
Follow these instructions to replace the foam air filters in the BSSC cabinets.
The cabinet air filters should be replaced with new or clean filters every six months. It is
recommended that filters are not washed on site but replaced with new or previously
washed filters.
Tools and
equipment
This procedure requires the following tools and equipment.
S New or previously washed air filters.
Table 4-1 contains the details of the replacement air filter that can be ordered.
Table 4-1 Replacement air filters
Kit Number
(10 Filters):
Filter Part
Number:
Description: Approximate
Size:
SWEN4007A 3509601F03 BSSC/2 air filter 172mm x 610mm
Replacing the air
filter
To replace the cabinet air filters proceed as follows:
1. Open the cabinet door.
2. Lift the bar securing the filter and carefully lift it free.
3. Remove the filter.
Do not install a wet filter. A wet filter will damage the equipment.
CAUTION
4. Position the new or previously washed filter.
5. Refit the securing bar.
6. Repeat step 2 to step 5 for the second filter, as necessary.
7. Close and latch the cabinet door.
8. Filters can be washed off site using warm water and mild soap (dishwashing soap
or detergent) for later installation at a site.
GSM-100-533 Interface board replacement
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W09-O
GMR-04
43
Interface board replacement
Introduction
This section gives instructions for removing and replacing a balanced line interface board
(BIB) or a T43 interface board (T43). Since the procedure for both boards is the same,
this section refers to either board as an interface board.
All channel traffic associated with an interface board is lost during the
replacement procedure. If only one 2.048 Mbit/s link is affected by an
interface board fault, replacement of the interface board should be
performed during a period of low traffic so as not to interrupt service on the
other 2.048 Mbit/s links connected to the interface board.
CAUTION
Illustrations
Figure 4-1 shows a sample of the balanced line interconnect board (BIB).
J1
J0
Figure 4-1 Balanced-line Interconnect Board
Figure 4-2 shows a sample of the T43 interconnect board.
J1
J2
J5
J4
J7
J8
J10
J13 J11
J14
J16
J17
J0
Figure 4-2 Type 43 interconnect board
GSM-100-533 Interface board replacement
29 Aug 1997
44
GMR-04
68P02901W09-O
Replacing an
interface board
1. Enter the lock_device command to take the affected MMS device out-of-service
(OOS).
MMS is the software name for the 2.048 Mbit/s links.
2. Note the order that the 2.048 Mbit/s links are connected to the interface board.
3. Disconnect the 2.048 Mbit/s links from the interface board.
4. Remove the four screws that secure the interface board to the cabinet interconnect
panels.
5. Lift the interface board free to disconnect the 37-pin D connector.
6. Fit the replacement interface board to the 37-pin D connector on the cabinet
interconnect panel.
7. Secure the interface board to the interconnect panel using the four screws
removed in step 4.
8. Reconnect the 2.048 Mbit/s links to the replacement interface board.
9. Enter the unlock_device command to bring the MMS device back in-service
(INS).
GSM-100-533 Redundant clock extender (CLKX) module replacement
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W09-O
GMR-04
45
Redundant clock extender (CLKX) module replacement
Overview
This section contains instructions for removing and replacing redundant clock extender
modules (CLKX).
Illustration
Figure 4-3 shows a typical CLKX card.
Fibre optic
clock outputs to
local KSWX
s
Backplane
connector
Figure 4-3 Clock Extender (CLKX) module
Replacing
CLKXA
Follow these steps to replace CLKX A.
Replacing redundant CLKX modules may cause a system glitch when the
CLKXs are being switched.
NOTE
1. Pull the CLKX forward just enough to disconnect it from the module backplane.
This forces a changeover to CLKX B modules.
2. Disconnect the fibre optic cables from the CLKX A module to be replaced.
3. Remove the CLKX A module and insert the replacement CLKX.
4. Reconnect all the fibre optic cables.
Fibre optic cables used in conjunction with a CLKX board to transfer clock
signals from a parent shelf to remote shelves, must be of the same length to
maintain site synchronization integrity.
NOTE
GSM-100-533 Redundant clock extender (CLKX) module replacement
29 Aug 1997
46
GMR-04
68P02901W09-O
5. Push the CLKX back into the shelf until it connects to the backplane.
Replacing
CLKXB
Follow these steps to replace CLKX B.
1. Pull the CLKX forward just enough to disconnect it from the module backplane.
This forces a changeover to CLKX A modules.
2. Disconnect the fibre optic cables from the CLKX B module to be replaced.
3. Remove the CLKX B module and insert the replacement CLKX.
5. Push the CLKX back into the shelf until it connects to the backplane.
GSM-100-533 Non-redundant CLKX replacement
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W09-O
GMR-04
47
Non-redundant CLKX replacement
Overview
This section contains instructions for removing and replacing non-redundant clock
extender modules (CLKX)
Illustration
Figure 4-3 shows a typical CLKX card.
Replacing the
CLKX
Follow these instructions to remove and replace the CLKX.
Replacing stand-alone CLKX modules causes system down-time.
NOTE
1. Disconnect all the fibre optic cables from the CLKX to be replaced.
2. Remove the faulty CLKX.
3. Insert the replacement CLKX.
Fibre optic cables used in conjunction with a CLKX board to transfer clock
signals from a parent shelf to remote shelves, must be of the same length to
maintain site synchronization integrity.
NOTE
GSM-100-533 Replacing a fan unit
29 Aug 1997
48
GMR-04
68P02901W09-O
Replacing a fan unit
Removing the
fan
Follow these steps to replace a faulty fan:
1. Locate the faulty fan.
2. Use a flat-blade screwdriver to release the four quarter-turn fasteners which
secure the fan to the shelf assembly.
3. Grasp the fan and pull it outward away from the cabinet.
4. Disconnect the fan power cable connector and lift it free of the cabinet.
Installing the fan
Follow these steps to install a fan unit:
1. Connect the Fan Power cable connector to the new fan.
2. Install the new fan into the cabinet.
3. Using a flat blade screwdriver, tighten the four quarter-turn fasteners that secure
the fan to the shelf assembly.
4. Advise the OMC that the repair is complete and check that fuse and fan alarms at
the OMC are cleared.
GSM-100-533 Redundant GCLK module replacement
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W09-O
GMR-04
49
Redundant GCLK module replacement
Overview
This section contains instructions for replacing redundant generic clock (GCLK) modules.
Illustration
Figure 4-4 shows a GCLK board.
FREQUENCY
ADJUST
BACKPLANE
CONNECTOR
2.048 MHz In
16.384 MHz OUT
6.12 S OUT
ALARM LED (RED)
NORMALLY OFF
ACTIVE (GREEN) LED
MASTER = ON
125uS OUT
GROUND
60mS OUT
DOWN = DISABLE
LATER VERSIONS OF THE GCLK
DO NOT HAVE THE 6.12 S, 60mS
AND 4.24uS OUTPUTS ON THE
FRONT PANEL
TEST PORTS
Figure 4-4 GCLK board
Replacing a
redundant GCLK
Follow these steps to replace the GCLK module
1. Connect a local maintenance terminal (LMT) at the TTY port of the master
GPROC.
Refer to Connecting a local maintenance terminal (LMT), in Chapter 2 for
instructions.
Motorola recommends connecting the LMT to the TTY port of the master GPROC.
However, if the master is unavailable, an LMT can connect to any available
GPROC.
If an LMT is unavailable, the OMC must enter all MMI commands.
NOTE
GSM-100-533 Redundant GCLK module replacement
29 Aug 1997
410
GMR-04
68P02901W09-O
2. Determine which GCLK card needs replacement.
Use the following table to determine the next action to take.
If... Then...
the master GCLK card needs
replacement...
i. In a TTY window, enter the
swap_devices command to
tell the software to make the
redundant GCLK the
master.
ii. Continue on to step 3.
the stand-by GCLK card... Continue on to step 3.
3. In a TTY window, enter the lock_device command to take the faulty GCLK out
of service (OOS).
4. Disable the faulty GCLK using the front panel switch.
5. Remove the faulty GCLK.
6. Insert the replacement GCLK.
7. Ensure front panel switch is set for normal operation.
8. In a TTY window, enter the unlock_device command to bring the replacement
GCLK back in service (INS).
GSM-100-533 Non-redundant GCLK replacement
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W09-O
GMR-04
411
Non-redundant GCLK replacement
Overview
This section contains instructions for replacing non-redundant Generic Clock (GCLK)
modules.
Prerequisite
If one is not already connected, connect a local maintenance terminal (LMT) at the TTY
port of the master GPROC.
instructions.
However, if the master is unavailable, an LMT can connect to any available GPROC.
NOTE
Illustration
Figure 4-4 shows a GCLK board.
Conditions
There are two configurations that may require GCLK replacement. The following table
shows the two configurations and which instructions apply.
If the cabinet contains: Follow the steps in:
A single BSU shelf Replacing a Single Shelf Configuration GCLK in
this section
More than one BSU shelf Replacing a Multi-Shelf Configuration GCLK in
this section.
Follow the appropriate procedure.
GSM-100-533 Non-redundant GCLK replacement
29 Aug 1997
412
GMR-04
68P02901W09-O
Replacing a
single shelf
configuration
GCLK
Follow these steps to replace a GCLK in a single-shelf configuration cabinet.
If an LMT is unavailable, the OMC-R must enter all MMI commands.
NOTE
1. Insert the replacement GCLK into the empty GCLK slot.
2. In a TTY window, enter the equip_device command to equip the replacement
GCLK.
GCLK in-service (INS).
4. Wait at least 30 minutes for the GCLK to stabilize.
5. In a TTY window, enter the state command to verify the operational and
administrative state of the GCLK.
6. In a TTY window, enter the lock_device command to take the faulty GCLK
out-of-service (OOS).
7. Set the RESET/DISABLE switch down to the DISABLE position to disable the
faulty GCLK.
9. Secure a blanking plate to the empty GCLK slot..
Replacing a
multi-shelf
configuration
GCLK
Follow these steps to replace a GCLK in a multi-shelf configuration cabinet.
If the system is operational, module replacement will cause down-time for
the entire system.
CAUTION
1. In a TTY window, enter the lock_device command to take the faulty GCLK
2. Disable the faulty GCLK using the front panel switch.
4. Insert the replacement GCLK.
GCLK in-service (INS).
6. Wait at least 30 minutes for the GCLK to stabilize.
7. In a TTY window, enter the state command to verify the operational and
administrative state of the GCLK.
GSM-100-533 Calibrating the GCLK
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W09-O
GMR-04
413
Calibrating the GCLK
Introduction
Follow this procedure to calibrate the GCLK in the field. The GCLK must be calibrated
when more than one frame slip per hour is observed or when the GCLK is phase locked
to the E1/T1 serial data stream and the system requests calibration.
The GCLK must be calibrated only by fully trained GSM qualified staff. Do
not attempt this procedure under any circumstances unless the test
equipment listed below is available.
CAUTION
Test equipment
The following test equipment is required:
S An IBM-compatible personal computer (PC).
S An RS232 9 to 25-way cable.
S A Rubidium standard.
S Universal counter Hewlett Packard Model HP5385A or equivalent.
S Screened coaxial cable BNC to 2 mm multicontact AG connector.
S New calibration sticker(s).
S A non-ferrous tuning tool.
Commands
The following commands must be used to calibrate the GCLK:
Command Function
disp_equipment Displays the active equipment at a specified
site.
state Displays the status of specified devices or
functions.
chg_element
phase_lock_gclk <value>
<location>
Turns the phase lock function on or off, where
<value> is 0 for off and 1 for on, and <location>
is the site id.
disp_element
phase_lock_gclk
<location>
Shows the status of the phase lock function
<location> is the site id.
clear_gclk_avgs
<location> gclk_id>
Clears LTA values in memory for a specified
GCLK.
29 Aug 1997
414
GMR-04
68P02901W09-O
Process
To calibrate the GCLK follow procedures:
S Initial preparation.
S GCLK calibration.
Before attempting this process record the board serial number, date of last calibration
and present frequency on the calibration record shown at the end of this section, and
remove the old calibration stickers from the GCLK front panels.
Initial preparation
1. Connect the serial A port on the PC to a GPROC TTY port using the 9 to 25-way
RS232 cable.
2. At the PC start the terminal emulator program.
3. Connect the output from the 10 MHz standard to the reference input of the
frequency counter, select external standard.
4. Set the frequency gate time to 10 second and set the display to give 10 significant
digits.
5. To check to see if phase lock is on, at the CUST MMI prompt type:
disp_element phase_lock_gclk <location>
Where: <location> is: 0 or bsc, for a BSC
0 for an XCDR
This gives the status of phase lock at the site, 0 is shown for phase lock off and 1
is shown for phase lock on.
6. If phase lock is on, at the CUST MMI prompt type:
chg_element phase_lock_gclk 0 <location>
0 for an XCDR
This turns off the phase lock to the selected site.
7. At the CUST MMI prompt type:
disp_equip<site number>
This gives the device id of the GCLKs.
state<site number>GCLK<dev id><dev id><dev id>
This displays the status for the GCLK.
clear_gclk_avgs <location> <gclk_id>
0 for an XCDR
<gclk_id> 0 or 1
This clears the LTA values for the specified GCLK.
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W09-O
GMR-04
415
GCLK calibration
1. Connect the frequency counter to the front panel 16.384 MHz connection of the
GCLK.
2. Connect the cable to the input port of the frequency counter and the jack plug end
to the front panel of the GCLK 16.384 MHz output and ground respectively.
3. Using a non-ferrous tuning tool, adjust the potentiometer labelled FREQ ADJUST
on the GCLK to 16.384 MHz. The GSM specified tolerance is +/ 0.8 Hz, although
it is desirable (and should be possible) to adjust the frequency more accurately
than this. This reads as 16.384 000 00 on the frequency counter. Adjusting the
potentiometer clockwise increases the frequency and anticlockwise decreases the
frequency.
4. Repeat step 7 to step 3 if the other GCLK is to be calibrated.
5. If phase locking of the GCLK(S) at the site is required type:
chg_element phase_lock_gclk 1 <location>
This turns the phase lock on for the specified site.
6. Place a new calibration sticker, indicating the date of calibration, over the
potentiometer labelled FREQ ADJUST on each calibrated GCLK.
GCLK calibration
record form
The GCLK calibration record form is shown below:
SITE NAME ........................................
SITE ID ..............................................
SERIAL
NUMBER
OF
BOARD
DATE
DATE
OF
LAST
CALIBRATION
FREQUENCY
BEFORE
CALIBRATION
TESTERS NAMES
.....................................
.....................................
GSM-100-533 GPROC/GPROC2 replacement
29 Aug 1997
416
GMR-04
68P02901W09-O
GPROC/GPROC2 replacement
Overview
This section provides the procedure for replacing redundant and non-redundant General
Processor (GPROC) boards. The procedure for replacing the GPROC or GPROC2 is the
same, only the procedure for the GPROC is given.
Redundant
GPROC
considerations
If the processing capability of a GPROC in a redundant system fails, the redundant
GPROC should be loaded automatically with the appropriate code and enabled. The
system then takes the failed GPROC Out Of Service (OOS). Therefore, no ill effects
should be seen during GPROC replacement.
Nonredundant
GPROC
considerations
If a non-redundant system is still operational, GPROC replacement may cause a
temporary system glitch when GPROCs are switched.
Before going to
the site
The OMC must determine the following:
S Site number.
S Device ID.
S Cage number.
S Slot number.
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W09-O
GMR-04
417
Locating the
faulty GPROC
Use the information from the OMC together with the LED display on the GPROCs to
locate the faulty board.
The following table shows the various LED displays.
If the
Green
LED is...
And the
Red LED
is...
The board is... Additional action...
on... off... either:
S operating normally
S may be unequipped
no further action is
necessary.
S may be unequipped
Use the site command to
verify whether the board is
equipped or not.
flashing... off... waiting for code to download...
flashing... flashing... undergoing normal ROM
programming...
flashing... on... in an alarm condition... continue with Removing
th GPROC
off... on...
g
the GPROC.
on... on...
off... off... not receiving dc power...
Removing the
GPROC
Follow these steps to set up the GPROC replacement:
Do not exchange all GPROCs connected to one LAN simultaneously or all
DTE addresses will be lost.
CAUTION
1. Set up a local maintenance terminal (LMT) at the TTY port of a GPROC.
Refer to Connecting a local maintenance terminal (LMT), beginning in Chapter
2 for instructions.
GPROC.
If an LMT is unavailable the OMC must enter all the MMI commands.
NOTE
2. Enter the lock_device command to lock the faulty GPROC.
3. Set the RESET/DISABLE switch of the faulty GPROC to the down (DISABLE)
position and remove the faulty GPROC.
29 Aug 1997
418
GMR-04
68P02901W09-O
Installing the
GPROC
Follow these steps to replace the GPROC.
Replacing the master GPROC will cause a site outage.
CAUTION
1. Insert the replacement GPROC into the empty GPROC slot.
Make sure the GPROC locks firmly into the backplane.
2. Set the RESET/DISABLE switch of the replacement GPROC to the middle (normal
operation) position.
3. The DTE addresses of a replacement master GPROC must be checked to ensure
that it is correct for the site in which it is installed.
4. In a TTY window, enter the equip_device command to inform the software to
load code into the replacement GPROC.
GPROC back in-service (INS).
Illustration
Figure 4-5 shows a GPROC module.
ig.202.rh
ALARM LED (RED)
NORMALLY OFF
ACTIVE LED (GREEN)
NORMALLY ON
TTY CONNECTOR
DOWN = DISABLE
THIS OPTICALLY ISOLATED TEST PORT
ALLOWS CONTROL OF ON BOARD SELF
DIAGNOSTICS.
BACKPLANE
CONNECTOR
Figure 4-5 GPROC module
GSM-100-533 Redundant KSW/DSW2 replacement
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W09-O
GMR-04
419
Redundant KSW/DSW2 replacement
Overview
This section contains instructions for replacing redundant kiloport switches
(KSWs/DSW2s).
The procedures given in this chapter can be applied to both KSW and DSW2
module replacement. In the text, read KSW as DSW2 as appropriate.
NOTE
Prerequisites
Connect a local maintenance terminal (LMT) before performing this procedure.
Refer to Connecting a local maintenance terminal (LMT) in Chapter 2 for
instructions.
NOTE
Illustration
Figure 4-6 shows a sample KSW board.
ig.205.rh
ALARM LED (RED)
NORMALLY OFF
ACTIVE LED (GREEN)
NORMALLY ON
DOWN = DISABLE
BACKPLANE CONNECTOR
Figure 4-6 KSW board
GSM-100-533 Redundant KSW/DSW2 replacement
29 Aug 1997
420
GMR-04
68P02901W09-O
Procedure
Follow these steps to replace a redundant KSW.
Module replacement may cause system down time.
CAUTION
If an LMT is unavailable, the OMC must enter this command.
NOTE
1. In a TTY window, enter the swap_device command to tell the software to switch
to the replacement KSW (A/B).
2. In a TTY window, enter the lock_device command to take the faulty KSW
faulty KSW.
4. Remove the faulty KSW.
5. Insert the replacement KSW.
6. Set the RESET/DISABLE switch to the NORMAL OPERATION (middle) position.
KSW.
KSW in-service (INS).
GSM-100-533 Non-redundant KSW module replacement
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W09-O
GMR-04
421
Non-redundant KSW module replacement
Overview
This section contains instructions for replacing nonredundant kiloport switches
(KSWs/DSW2s).
The procedures given in this chapter can be applied to both KSW and DSW2
module replacement. In the text, read KSW as DSW2 as appropriate.
NOTE
Prerequisites
Connect a local maintenance terminal (LMT) before performing this procedure.
Motorola recommends connecting the LMT to the TTY port of the master
GPROC/GPROC2. However, if the master is unavailable, an LMT can connect to any
available GPROC/GPROC2.
NOTE
Illustration
Figure 4-6 shows a sample KSW board.
Procedure
Follow these steps to replace the KSW.
Module replacement may cause a short SITE outage when KSWs are
switched.
CAUTION
1. Insert the replacement KSW into an empty KSW slot.
If an LMT is unavailable, the OMC must enter the following commands.
NOTE
KSW.
KSW in-service (INS).
4. In a TTY window, enter the swap_device command to tell the software to switch
to the replacement KSW (A/B).
5. In a TTY window, enter the lock_device command to take the faulty KSW
faulty KSW.
GSM-100-533 Non-redundant KSW module replacement
29 Aug 1997
422
GMR-04
68P02901W09-O
7. Remove the faulty KSW.
GSM-100-533 Redundant KSWX module replacement
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W09-O
GMR-04
423
Redundant KSWX module replacement
Overview
This section contains instructions for replacing redundant kiloport switch and double
kiloport switch extender (KSWX and DSWX) modules
The procedures given in this chapter can be applied to both KSWX and DSWX
module replacement. In the text, read KSWX as DSWX as appropriate.
NOTE
Module replacement will cause the site to self-reset. It is recommended that
network appropriate action be implemented to minimize the effects of the
reset when the KSWXs are switched.
CAUTION
Illustration
Figure 4-7 shows a typical KSWX module.
LED (GREEN)
FIBRE OPTIC INPUT
FROM CLKX
FIBRE OPTIC OUTPUT
TO ANOTHER KSWX
FIBRE OPTIC INPUT
FROM ANOTHER KSWX
BACKPLANE
CONNECTOR
Figure 4-7 Kiloport switch extender (KSWX) module
29 Aug 1997
424
GMR-04
68P02901W09-O
LED indications
The indications for the redundant and non-redundant KSWX are shown in Table 4-2.
Table 4-2 LED indications
LED (Green) Action
Lit KSWX in local slot and
KSWX is master and
KSWX is receiving clocks from the fibre
port and
No GCLK alarms and
No TDM receive violations from the fibre
port and
KSW not present
or
KSWX in local slot and
KSWX is master and
port and
No GCLK alarms and
KSW is present
or
KSWX in remote or expansion slot and
No GCLK alarms and
port
Flashing KSWX in local slot and
KSWX is slave and
port and
No GCLK alarms and
port and
KSW not present
or
KSWX in local slot and
KSWX is slave and
port and
No GCLK alarms and
KSW is present
OFF When any of the lit or flashing criteria are
not present or no power to the card
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W09-O
GMR-04
425
Replacing KSWX
A and B
Follow these step to replace a KSWX A or KSWX B.
1. Take network appropriate actions to use KSWX B modules only or KSWX A
modules only. The set that do not contain the the faulty KSWX are to be used.
2. Disconnect the fibre optic cables from the faulty KSWX.
3. Remove the faulty KSWX.
4. Install the replacement KSWX in the slot from which the faulty KSWX was
removed.
5. Reconnect all fibre optic cables.
6. If required, take network appropriate actions to restore KSWX usage back to the
set from which the faulty module was removed.
The fibre optic cables used with the KSWX cards to extend/expand the TDM
highway, from one BSU/RXU to another BSU/RXU, must be of the same
length. This allows correct operation of the TDM highway to be maintained.
NOTE
GSM-100-533 Non-redundant KSWX module replacement
29 Aug 1997
426
GMR-04
68P02901W09-O
Non-redundant KSWX module replacement
Overview
This section contains instructions for replacing non-redundant kiloport switch and double
kiloport switch extender (KSWX and DSWX) modules
The procedures given in this chapter can be applied to both KSWX and DSWX
module replacement. In the text, read KSWX as DSWX as appropiate.
NOTE
Illustration and
indications
A board view of the redundant module is shown in Figure 4-7 and the LED indications in
Table 4-2
Procedure
Follow these steps to replace a non-redundant kiloport switch extender module.
1. Disconnect all fibre optic cables from the faulty KSWX.
2. Remove the faulty KSWX.
3. Install the replacement KSWX in the slot from which the fault KSWX was removed.
The fibre optic cables used with the KSWX cards to extend/expand the TDM
highway, from one BSU/RXU to another BSU/RXU, must be of the same
length. This allows correct operation of the TDM highway to be maintained.
NOTE
GSM-100-533 Redundant LANX replacement
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W09-O
GMR-04
427
Redundant LANX replacement
Overview
This section contains instructions for replacing redundant local area network extender
(LANX) cards.
There are two sets of instructions:
S Replacing the LANX associated with the active LAN.
S Replacing the LANX associated with the standby LAN.
Follow the instructions that fit the situation.
Prerequisites
Connect a local maintenance terminal (LMT) before replacing this module.
Refer to Connecting a local maintenance terminal (LMT) in Chapter 2 for instructions.
NOTE
Replacing the
LANX associated
with the active
LAN
Follow these steps to replace the LANX card for the active LAN.
Module replacement will cause system down time.
CAUTION
1. In a TTY window, enter the swap_device command to tell the software to use the
standby LAN.
2. Disconnect all fibre optic cables from the faulty LANX card.
3. Remove the LANX card.
4. Install the replacement LANX card in the slot from which the faulty LANX card was
removed.
6. Wait about 30 seconds.
7. Enter the state command to verify that one LAN device is busy and unlocked
(active) and one LAN is enabled and unlocked (standby).
8. Enter the swap_device command to swap the active LAN back to standby and
the replacement LAN to active.
GSM-100-533 Redundant LANX replacement
29 Aug 1997
428
GMR-04
68P02901W09-O
Replacing the
LANX associated
with the standby
LAN
Follow these steps to replace the LANX card for the standby LAN.
1. Disconnect all the fibre optic cables from the faulty LANX card.
2. Remove the LANX card.
removed.
5. Wait about 30 seconds.
6. Enter the state command to verify that one LAN device is busy and unlocked
(active) and one LAN is enabled and unlocked (standby)
It may take the system up to 30 seconds to bring the standby LAN back
in-service (INS).
NOTE
GSM-100-533 Non-redundant LANX replacement
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W09-O
GMR-04
429
Non-redundant LANX replacement
Overview
This section contains instructions for replacing non-redundant local area network
extender (LANX) cards.
LANA bus is controlled by the local area network extender module (LANX) module in
upper slot 20 of the digital module shelf. LANB bus is controlled by the LANX module in
upper slot 19 of the digital module shelf.
Procedure
Follow these steps to replace a non-redundant LANX module.
Module replacement will cause system down time.
CAUTION
1. Disconnect all fibre optic cables from the faulty LANX card.
2. Remove the faulty LANX card.
removed.
GSM-100-533 MSI and MSI-2 replacement
29 Aug 1997
430
GMR-04
68P02901W09-O
MSI and MSI-2 replacement
Overview
This section contains instructions for replacing the Multiple Serial Interface (MSI) module
and the Multiple Serial Interface 2 (MSI2) module.
The term MSI is used generically for MSI and MSI-2 modules, except where indicated.
Non-redundant
systems
The following table shows the effects of replacing MSI boards in non-redundant systems.
If the MSI being replaced... Then...
can still carry some channel
traffic
capacity for all associated 2.048/1.544 Mbit/s
links is lost during MSI replacement.
cannot carry any channel traffic no other ill effects will be noticed
Redundant
systems
MSI replacement should be transparent to the user in a redundant system.
Illustration
Figure 4-8 shows a typical MSI board.
ALARM LED (RED)
NORMALLY OFF
ACTIVE LED (GREEN)
NORMALLY ON
DOWN = DISABLE
BACKPLANE
CONNECTOR
Figure 4-8 Multiple serial interface (MSI) module
GSM-100-533 MSI and MSI-2 replacement
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W09-O
GMR-04
431
Procedure
Follow these steps to replace an MSI board.
1. Set up a local maintenance terminal (LMT) at the TTY port of a GPROC.
instructions.
GPROC.
If an LMT is unavailable the OMC must invoke all MMI commands.
NOTE
2. Enter the lock_device command to take the MSI out of service (OOS).
faulty MSI board.
4. Remove the faulty MSI board.
5. Install the replacement MSI board in the slot from which the faulty MSI board was
removed.
6. Set the RESET/DISABLE switch to reset, then back to the NORMAL OPERATION
position to bring the board into normal operating mode.
7. In a TTY window, enter the unlock_device command to bring the MSI board
back in-service (INS).
GSM-100-533 XCDR replacement
29 Aug 1997
432
GMR-04
68P02901W09-O
XCDR replacement
Overview
This section contains instructions for replacing a transcoder module (XCDR).
Non-redundant
Systems
The following table shows the effects of replacing XCDR boards in non-redundant
systems.
If the XCDR being replaced... Then...
traffic...
capacity for all E1/T links is lost during XCDR
replacement.
cannot carry any channel traffic... no other ill effects will be noticed
Redundant
Systems
XCDR replacement should be transparent to the system in a redundant system.
Illustration
Figure 4-9 shows a typical transcoder module.
ALARM LED (RED)
NORMALLY OFF
ACTIVE LED (GREEN)
NORMALLY ON
DOWN = DISABLE
BACKPLANE
CONNECTOR
Figure 4-9 XCDR module
GSM-100-533 XCDR replacement
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W09-O
GMR-04
433
Procedure
Follow these steps to replace a transcoder board.
1. Set up a local maintenance terminal (LMT) and connect it to the TTY port of a
GPROC.
instructions.
GPROC.
If an LMT is unavailable the OMC must invoke all MMI commands.
NOTE
2. In a TTY window, enter the lock_device command to take the XCDR card out of
service (OOS).
3. Set the front panel switch down to the DISABLE position to disable the faulty
XCDR card.
4. Remove the faulty XCDR card.
5. Install the replacement XCDR card in the slot from which the faulty XCDR card
was removed.
6. Set the front panel switch to the NORMAL OPERATION (middle) position.
7. In a TTY window, enter the unlock_device command to bring the XCDR back in
service (INS).
If replacing an XCDR module with a GDP module, as an upgrade, the OMC
requires command changes to recognize and use the different module.
Ensure the OMC has made these changes before upgrading an XCDR module
with a GDP module.
NOTE
GSM-100-533 GDP/GDP2 replacement
29 Aug 1997
434
GMR-04
68P02901W09-O
GDP/GDP2 replacement
Overview
This section contains instructions for replacing a Generic DSP Processor (GDP/GDP2)
module when used as an XCDR.
The procedures given in this section can be used for both GDP and GDP2
replacement. In the text, read GDP as GDP2 where appropriate.
NOTE
The GDP has two configured types, one for E1 serial line use and one for T1
serial line use. Each GDP type has a different framer/transceiver with
accompanying crystal oscillator, and two associated resistors. This means that
a GDP used for E1 serial line use cannot be used for T1, and a GDP used for
T1 serial line use cannot be used for E1.
If a GDP2 is retrospectively installed in a BSSC2 installation, it supports a
single E1 line interface.
NOTE
Non-redundant
Systems
The following table shows the effects of replacing GDP boards in non-redundant
systems.
If the GDP being replaced... Then...
traffic...
capacity for all E1/T1 links is lost during GDP
replacement.
cannot carry any channel traffic... no other ill effects will be noticed
Redundant
Systems
GDP replacement should be transparent to the system in a redundant system, as long as
all traffic has been routed away from the board to be replaced.
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W09-O
GMR-04
435
Illustration
Figure 4-10 shows a typical GDP module.
ALARM LED (RED)
NORMALLY OFF
ACTIVE LED (GREEN)
NORMALLY ON
DOWN = DISABLE
BACKPLANE
CONNECTOR
Figure 4-10 GDP module
Procedure
Follow these steps to replace a GDP transcoder module.
1. Set up a local maintenance terminal (LMT) and connect it to the TTY port of a
GPROC.
instructions.
GPROC.
If an LMT is unavailable the OMC-R must invoke all MMI commands.
NOTE
2. In a TTY window, enter the lock_device command to take the GDP card out of
service (OOS).
3. Set the front panel switch down to the DISABLE position to disable the faulty GDP
card.
4. Remove the faulty GDP card.
5. Install the replacement GDP card in the slot from which the faulty GDP card was
removed.
29 Aug 1997
436
GMR-04
68P02901W09-O
6. Set the front panel switch to the NORMAL OPERATION (middle) position.
GDP card in-service (INS).
If replacing an XCDR module with a GDP module, as an upgrade, the OMC
requires command changes to recognize and use the different module.
Ensure the OMC has made these changes before upgrading an XCDR module
with a GDP module.
NOTE
GSM-100-533 NVM replacement
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W09-O
GMR-04
437
NVM replacement
Overview
This section contains the information required to replace a faulty NVM board.
Do Not remove the PCMCIA card from faulty NVM boards being returned to
Motorola for repair. The returned unit must comprise the NVM board with
PCMCIA card installed.
CAUTION
Notify the OMC-R before carrying out the following replacement procedures.
NOTE
Diagnosing
faults on the
NVM board
Fault diagnosis is limited to viewing the front panel LEDs and ensuring that the switches
are set to the correct positions for normal operation.
Replacing the
NVM board
Carry out the following procedure to replace a faulty NVM board. This procedure
assumes that the BSC/RXCDR is already initialized.
The NVM board contains devices that are sensitive to static. A suitable earth
strap must be worn when handling the module.
CAUTION
1. Set the RESET/DISABLE switch to the DISABLE position.
2. When the red ALARM LED illuminates, remove the NVM board from the slot in the
cage.
3. Set the RESET/DISABLE switch on the new NVM board to DISABLE and then
insert the board into the slot, ensuring that it locks firmly into the backplane.
4. Move the RESET/DISABLE switch up to the RESET position and release. Once
the software recognizes the NVM board, the the red ALARM LED extinguishes and
the green ACTIVE LED illuminates to show that the NVM board is operational.
When the software recognizes the PCMCIA card in slot 1, the green CARD 1
STATUS LED illuminates to show that the PCMCIA card is operational.
The procedure for replacing the NVM board is now complete.
GSM-100-533 NVM replacement
29 Aug 1997
438
GMR-04
68P02901W09-O
Front panel
controls and
indicators
Figure 4-11 shows the detail of the front panel controls and indicators on the NVM board.
1. Do not use the PCMCIA
card eject button. This
feature is not currently
supported.
2. Do not use the PCMCIA
CARD SWAP switch. This
feature is not currently
supported.
NOTES
NVM BOARD
STATUS LEDs
NVM BOARD
RESET/DISABLE
SWITCH
PCMCIA CARD
STATUS LEDs
PCMCIA CARD
SWAP SWITCH
(See Note 2)
PCMCIA CARD
SLOTS
PCMCIA CARD EJECT
BUTTON
(See Note 1)
Figure 4-11 Front panel controls and indicators on the NVM board
GSM-100-533 PIX replacement
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W09-O
GMR-04
439
PIX replacement
Overview
This section contains instructions for replacing a parallel interface extender (PIX) board in
an external alarm system.
Illustration
Figure 4-12 shows a PIX board.
ig.240.rh
ALARM LED (GREEN)
ON = NO ALARMS
DETECTED
OFF = CUSTOMER ALARM
DETECTED
CONNECTOR IS CABLED
TO TOP OF CABINET FOR
CONNECTION TO
CUSTOMER SITE
EQUIPMENT
BACKPLANE
CONNECTOR
Figure 4-12 PIX board
Replacing the
PIX
Follow these steps to replace a PIX board.
Replacing this module may trigger false customer alarms.
CAUTION
1. Disconnect interconnect cable from the front of the faulty PIX card.
2. Remove the faulty PIX card.
3. Install the replacement PIX card in the slot from which the faulty PIX card was
removed.
4. Reconnect the interconnect cable to the front of the PIX card.
GSM-100-533 Power supply module replacement
29 Aug 1997
440
GMR-04
68P02901W09-O
Power supply module replacement
Overview
This section contains instructions for replacing power supply modules.
These are two sets of instructions:
S Replacing a non-redundant power supply module.
S Replacing a redundant power supply module.
Applications
This procedure applies to all of the various power supply modules used in Motorola BSC
cabinets, including:
S DPSMs.
S EPSMs.
S IPSMs.
Illustration
Figure 4-13 shows the DPSM:
ig.242.rh
ALARM LED (RED):
ON WHEN ONE OR MORE
ALARM CONDITIONS EXIST.
OFF WHEN NO ALARM
CONDITION EXISTS.
ACTIVE LED (GREEN):
ON WHEN ALL OUTPUT VOLTAGES
ARE PRESENT AND WITHIN
TOLERANCE.
25-PIN D-TYPE
CONNECTOR (FEMALE)
CGND (CHASSIS EARTH)
VINA (0 V INPUT)
VINA + (+27 V INPUT)
GND (EARTH FOR +5 V OUTPUT)
GND (EARTH FOR +5 V OUTPUT)
+5 V
+5 V
REAR VIEW
Figure 4-13 DPSM
The other power supply modules are very similar in outward appearance. LED position
may differ.
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W09-O
GMR-04
441
Replacing a
non-redundant
power supply
module
Follow these steps to replace a non-redundant power supply module
If the shelf served by the faulty power supply module is still operational,
module replacement should be transparent to the system.
NOTE
Do not mix power supply modules; for example, if a cabinet is equipped with
DPSMs, do not try to insert any other type of power supply module.
Always replace a power supply module with the same type of module!
CAUTION
1. Remove the air baffle from the unused slot.
2. Install the replacement power supply module in the empty slot.
3. Remove the faulty power supply module.
4. Re-install the air baffle in the slot from which the faulty power supply module was
removed.
Replacing a
redundant power
supply module
Follow these steps to replace a redundant power supply module:
If the shelf served by the faulty power supply module is still operational,
module replacement should be transparent to the system.
NOTE
1. Remove the faulty power supply module.
2. Install the replacement power supply module in the empty slot from which the fault
DPSM was removed in the previous step.
29 Aug 1997
442
GMR-04
68P02901W09-O
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W09-O
GMR-04
i
Chapter 5
Miscellaneous repair
GSM-100-533
29 Aug 1997
ii
GMR-04
68P02901W09-O
GSM-100-533
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W09-O
GMR-04
iii
Chapter 5
Introduction 51 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 52 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Indications 52 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 54 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conditions 54 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure 1 55 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure 2 56 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure 3 56 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure 4 58 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Redundant KSWs 58 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure 5 58 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 510 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Background 510 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Precautions 510 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 513 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Background 513 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Precautions 513 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PDB removal 514 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AIB removal 515 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 517 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Prerequisites 517 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose 523 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure 1 523 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure 2 524 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GSM-100-533
29 Aug 1997
iv
GMR-04
68P02901W09-O
GSM-100-533 Miscellaneous repair procedures
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W09-O
GMR-04
51
Miscellaneous repair procedures
Introduction
This chapter contains instructions for removing and replacing various components,
including:
S Circuit breakers.
S Bus terminator cards.
Failure of these items is unusual. Usually, replacement of any of these items is first
recommended by Motorola, through its local offices, and may recommend these
procedures. They also may require parts or supplies that are not part of the normal
repair equipment.
Obtaining
replacement
authorization
Several of these replacement procedures require authorization or special parts from
Motorola. The replaceable modules are not part of standard replacement kit.
Contact the local Motorola office BEFORE attempting to replace these modules.
GSM-100-533 Removing and replacing a circuit breaker
29 Aug 1997
52
GMR-04
68P02901W09-O
Removing and replacing a circuit breaker
Overview
This section contains instructions for:
S Removing a circuit breaker.
S Replacing a circuit breaker.
Indications
Circuit breakers are durable pieces of equipment. If a circuit breaker trips, it can usually
be reset by setting it up to the ON position.
However, sometimes a circuit breaker may not be able to be reset. That is, the circuit
breaker switch will not click into the ON position, or will not engage. In these cases the
circuit breaker is broken. The broken circuit breaker must be removed and a new one
installed in its place.
Removing a
circuit breaker
Follow these steps to remove a circuit breaker.
1. Reroute all traffic to an unaffected cabinet.
2. Switch off all dc power supplies to the cabinet before removing and replacing
circuit breakers.
The external dc power supplies must be OFF during circuit breaker removal or
installation.
WARNING
3. Open the cabinet door and locate the Power Distribution Unit (PDU) at the top of
the cabinet.
4. Open the PDU cover to expose the circuit breakers and the Distribution Alarm
Board (DAB).
The DAB is located on the right side of the PDU.
NOTE
5. Remove all four M4 x 8 screws, and remove the circuit breaker cover.
6. Grasp the faulty circuit breaker and pull it outward, away from the cabinet until the
circuit breaker disengages from the mounting buses.
GSM-100-533 Removing and replacing a circuit breaker
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W09-O
GMR-04
53
Installing a
circuit breaker
Follow these steps to install a circuit breaker.
1. Check the circuit breaker to make sure it is the correct type and rating.
2. Install the circuit breaker.
3. Verify the breaker engages the mounting buses correctly and push the circuit
breaker firmly into place.
4. Refit the circuit breaker cover.
Step Action
a. Install the four M4 x 8 screws that secure the circuit breaker
cover.
b. Torque the hex standoffs to 2.2 Nm.
5. Close the PDU cover.
6. Close the cabinet door.
7. Reconnect dc power to the cabinet if necessary.
8. Switch on all dc power supplies to the cabinet.
It may be necessary to re-initialized the site after installing new circuit breakers and
re-applying power to the cabinet. Refer to Resetting and re-initializing a site in
Chapter 2 for more information.
GSM-100-533 Replacing a bus terminator card (BTC)
29 Aug 1997
54
GMR-04
68P02901W09-O
Replacing a bus terminator card (BTC)
Overview
If DSW2 modules have been installed retrospectively in a BSSC installation,
read KSW, as DSW2 where appropriate throughout this section.
NOTE
There are only two bus terminator cards (BTC) fitted in a shelf. There are no redundant
BTCs to come into service when a BTC is removed. However, a BTC can be fitted into
the KSW cards position, which is adjacent to the faulty BTC, to maintain the bus.
Consequently BTC replacement procedures are split into two groups: non-redundant
KSWs and redundant KSWs.
Obtaining
replacement
authorization
These procedures require authorization or special parts from Motorola. The replaceable
modules are not part of standard replacement kit.
Contact the local Motorola office BEFORE attempting to replace this module.
Non-redundant
KSWs
Follow the appropriate procedure relating to, a particular situation with, conditions as
stipulated in the table.
Conditions
There are 5 sets of conditions producing variants of the procedure to replace a BTC in a
shelf with a non-redundant KSW. Follow the appropriate procedure relating to the
situation and conditions, from procedures 1 to 5 inclusive.
Procedure 5 lists the steps required to replace a BTC in a shelf with a redundant KSW.
If these conditions apply: Follow the steps in:
S Replacing BTC 0 (left side).
S KSW A is in the shelf.
S Spare KSW and BTC are available
Procedure 1.
S Replacing BTC 0 (left side).
S KSW B is in the shelf.
S A spare BTC is available.
Procedure 2.
S Replacing BTC 1 (right side).
S Spare KSW and BTC are available.
Procedure 3.
S Replacing BTC 1 (right side).
Procedure 4.
S Replacing BTC 0 or BTC 1.
S A redundant KSW is in the shelf.
Procedure 5.
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W09-O
GMR-04
55
Procedure 1
Follow these steps to replace BTC 0 when:
S A spare KSW and BTC are available.
This Procedure contains three sub-procedures:
S Preparing the cabinet
S Replacing the BTC
S Restoring the cabinet
Module replacement should be transparent to the system. The system
retains as much system functionality as possible.
NOTE
Preparing the cabinet
Follow these steps to prepare the cabinet for BTC replacement.
1. Insert a spare KSW into the empty slot 1 (KSW B).
2. Connect an LMT, if one is not already available.
instructions.
3. In a TTY window, enter the equip_device command to equip the spare KSW.
4. In a TTY window, enter the unlock_device command to bring the spare KSW
in-service (INS).
Replacing the BTC
Follow these steps to replace the BTC.
1. Enter the swap_device command to inform the software to switch to KSW B.
2. Disable KSW A in slot 27 using its front panel switch and remove KSW A.
3. Insert the spare BTC into slot 27.
4. Remove the covers from the module extractor tabs located on the front of BTC 0 in
slot 28 and remove BTC 0.
5. Insert the replacement BTC into slot 28 (BTC 0) and refit the extractor tabs.
29 Aug 1997
56
GMR-04
68P02901W09-O
Restoring the cabinet
1. Remove the spare BTC from slot 27.
2. Re-insert KSW A into slot 27.
3. In a TTY window, enter the unlock_device command to bring KSW A in-service
(INS).
4. In a TTY window, enter the swap_device command to inform the software to
switch back to KSW A.
5. Remove the spare KSW B from slot 1.
Procedure 2
NOTE
1. Insert a spare BTC into the empty slot 27 (KSW A).
Procedure 3
S A spare KSW and BTC are available.
This Procedure contains three sub-procedures:
S Preparing the cabinet.
S Replacing the BTC.
S Restoring the cabinet.
NOTE
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W09-O
GMR-04
57
Follow these steps to prepare the cabinet for BTC replacement.
1. Insert a spare KSW into the empty slot 27 (KSW A).
instructions.
3. In a TTY window, enter the equip_device command to equip the spare KSW.
4. In a TTY window, enter the unlock_device command to bring the spare KSW
in-service (INS).
Replacing the BTC
Follow these steps to replace the BTC.
1. Enter the swap_device command to inform the software to switch to KSW A.
2. In a TTY window, enter the lock_device command to take KSW B out-of-service
(OOS).
3. Disable KSW B in slot 1 using its front panel switch and remove KSW B.
4. Insert the spare BTC into slot 1.
2. Re-insert KSW B into slot 1.
3. In a TTY window, enter the unlock_device command to bring KSW B in-service
(INS).
4. In a TTY window, enter the swap_device command to inform the software to
switch back to KSW B.
5. Remove the spare KSW A from slot 27.
29 Aug 1997
58
GMR-04
68P02901W09-O
Procedure 4
NOTE
1. Insert a spare BTC into the empty slot 1 (KSW B).
Redundant KSWs
The following procedure details the steps to follow when replacing a faulty BTC, in a shelf
configured with a redundant KSW card.
Module replacement should be transparent to the system. The system retains
as much system functionality as possible.
NOTE
Procedure 5
Follow these steps to replace BTC 0 or BTC 1 when:
S Both KSW A and KSW B are installed and configured.
This procedure contains three sub-procedures:
S Preparing the cabinet.
S Replacing the BTC.
S Restoring the cabinet.
instructions.
2. If necessary, in a TTY window enter the swap_devices command to make the
KSW, adjacent to the faulty BTC card, redundant.
3. In a TTY window, enter the lock_devices command to take the redundant KSW
card out-of-service (OOS).
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W09-O
GMR-04
59
Replacing the BTC
1. Disable the redundant KSW card using its front panel switch and remove it from
the shelf.
2. Insert the spare BTC card into the vacant slot.
3. Remove the covers from the module extractor tabs located on the front of the
faulty BTC card and remove it from the shelf.
4. Insert the replacement BTC card and refit the extractor tabs.
5. Remove the spare BTC card installed in step 2.
6. Refit the KSW card removed in step 1, ensuring the front panel switch is set to the
NORMAL OPERATING position.
1. In a TTY window, enter the unlock_device command to bring the KSW
in-service (INS).
2. If necessary, enter the swap_devices command to make the refitted KSW the
master for the shelf.
3. Disconnect the LMT, connected in step 1 of Preparing the cabinet
subprocedure.
GSM-100-533 Replacing the alarm board (DAB/PAB)
29 Aug 1997
510
GMR-04
68P02901W09-O
Replacing the alarm board (DAB/PAB)
Introduction
This section explains how to replace a distribution alarm board (DAB). The removal and
replacement procedures are also applicable for replacing the power alarm board (PAB).
Background
Under some circumstances, the alarm board in a BSSC cabinet may fail. In these
circumstances it is necessary to replace the faulty board.
Although alarm boards can be replaced in the field, they are not considered field
replaceable boards.
Replacing an alarm board is an extraordinary action which requires consultation with and
authorization from the local Motorola office and the CNRC.
Contact the local Motorola office before attempting to replace a DAB/PAB!
Precautions
Follow these precautions when removing or replacing the DAB and PAB:
S Contact the local Motorola office for advice and authorization BEFORE attempting
this procedure.
Disconnect the external power supply from the cabinet before commencing
this procedure. Hazardous voltages may remain inside the cabinet after
power is disconnected. Remove all watches, rings and other jewelry before
commencing work.
WARNING
S Switch off all power to the cabinet. If possible, disconnect the power cables from
the top of the cabinet.
S Do not cross input cables.
Some of the cable links use similar connectors and it is possible to cross the
cables when reconnecting. Label the cables, if necessary, to prevent mistakes
during reconnection.
S Use care when connecting and disconnecting cables.
Some of the connectors are fragile. Note how the connectors fit, and pull or push
them gently.
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W09-O
GMR-04
511
Removing the
board
Follow these steps to remove a DAB or PAB:
1. Switch off the power to the cabinet.
commencing work.
WARNING
2. Disconnect the various connectors from the board.
There are several different types of cable connectors.
A PAB will have the same physical dimensions as a DAB, securing to the cabinet
in the same way and have similar connectors to remove.
A diagram of a PAB can be found in category 333 under PAB.
Figure 5-1 shows a DAB with cable connectors identified.
SCREW
DIP SWITCHES SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
Figure 5-1 Distribution alarm board
3. Loosen the screws that secure the board.
The alarm board is held in place by four black Phillips head captive screws
(screws which do not come out of the board).
4. Pull the board GENTLY away from the cabinet.
The board may be firmly anchored to the cabinet. Make sure all the screws have
been loosened fully.
Be careful when pulling on the alarm board. Try to pull from both ends,
rather than from the middle of the board. If possible, try to rock the board
free.
CAUTION
29 Aug 1997
512
GMR-04
68P02901W09-O
5. Place the removed board to one side.
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W09-O
GMR-04
513
Installing a new
board
Follow these steps to install the new alarm board:
1. Set the DIP switches on the new board to reflect the settings of the DIP switches
on the removed faulty board.
DIP switches are only present on a DAB. A PAB is configured with jumper
settings. The jumpers must be configured on the replacement PAB to reflect
the settings on the removed faulty PAB.
NOTE
2. Line up the 0 V and +27 V posts on the new board with the input ports in the
cabinet.
Make sure the various cables are not positioned behind the board or obstructing
the board.
0 V and +27 V posts are only found on the DAB.
NOTE
3. Press the board into the cabinet until it seats firmly into position.
4. Tighten the screws until they are firm, to secure the board in the cabinet.
5. Connect the cables removed in step 2 of Removing the board.
6. Restore power to the cabinet.
GSM-100-533 Replacement of PDB and AIB boards
29 Aug 1997
514
GMR-04
68P02901W09-O
Replacement of PDB and AIB boards
Introduction
This section explains how to remove and replace a power distribution board (PDB) and
an alarm interface board (AIB). Removal and replacement procedures are detailed
separately.
Background
Under some extraordinary circumstances, the PDB board and/or AIB board in a BSSC
cabinet may fail. In these circumstances it is necessary to replace the faulty board.
Although PDB and AIB boards can be replaced in the field, they are not considered field
replaceable boards.
Replacing PDB and AIB boards is an extraordinary action which requires consultation
with and authorization from the local Motorola office and the CNRC.
Contact the local Motorola office before attempting to replace a PDB or AIB board!
Precautions
Follow these precautions when replacing PDB and AIB boards:
S Contact the local Motorola office for advice and authorization BEFORE attempting
this procedure.
commencing work.
WARNING
S Switch off all power to the cabinet. If possible, disconnect the power cables from
the top of the cabinet.
S Do not cross input cables.
Some of the cable links use similar connectors and it is possible to cross the
cables when reconnecting. Label the cables, if necessary, to prevent mistakes
during reconnection.
S Use care when connecting and disconnecting cables.
Some of the connectors are fragile. Note how the connectors fit, and pull or push
them gently.
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W09-O
GMR-04
515
PDB removal
Follow these steps to remove a PDB board:
1. Switch off the power to the cabinet.
commencing work.
WARNING
2. Disconnect connectors PC1, PC3, PC5, PC6, PC7 and PC8.
There are several different types of cable connectors so correct reconnection is
ensured.
Figure 5-2 shows a PDB with cable connectors identified.
+ 27 V POSTS
GND POSTS
Figure 5-2 PDB board
3. Remove the plastic butterfly nuts from the + 27 V posts, and take off the plastic
safety cover and stand-offs.
The butterfly nuts attach to the stand-offs securing the plastic safety cover to the
board.
4. Loosen and remove the nuts that secure the board, and remove the metal
retaining bracket from GND posts.
The PDB board is held in place by six nuts secured on to six brass threaded posts.
The three uppermost posts provide the GND connection for the board, with the
three lower posts providing the + 27 V connection.
5. Remove the final two connectors, PC2 and PC4.
29 Aug 1997
516
GMR-04
68P02901W09-O
Be careful when pulling on the alarm board. Try to pull from both ends,
rather than from the middle of the board. If possible, try to rock the board
free.
CAUTION
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W09-O
GMR-04
517
PDB installation
Follow these steps to install a replacement PDB board:
1. Line up the GND and + 27 V positions with the threaded brass posts on the
cabinet.
2. Press the board into the cabinet until it seats firmly into position, being careful to
make sure no cables are positioned behind or are obstructing the board.
3. Fit connectors PC2 and PC4.
4. Position the metal retaining bracket over the brass GND posts, and fit and tighten
the six nuts on to the six brass posts, securing the board in to the cabinet.
5. Fit the plastic safety cover over the + 27 V posts using the stand-offs and butterfly
nuts to secure it.
6. Reconnect the connectors removed in step 2 of PDB removal (PC1, PC3, PC5,
PC6, PC7, PC8).
7. Restore power to the cabinet.
AIB removal
Follow these steps to remove the AIB board:
1. Switch off power to the cabinet.
Do not continue with this procedure until the cabinet power is off!
WARNING
2. Disconnect all the connectors from the board.
There are several different types of cable connectors.
Figure 5-3 shows an AIB board with cable connectors identified.
ig.249.rh
J
U
4
J
U
3
J
U
2
PC9
PC8
PC7
JU5
PC3
PC6
PC1
PC2
F2 F1
DS1
PC3
Serial
chip
J
U
1
Figure 5-3 Alarm interface board
3. Loosen the screws that secure the board.
The board is held in place by four Torx head screws.
29 Aug 1997
518
GMR-04
68P02901W09-O
The board may be firmly anchored to the cabinet. Make sure all the screws have
been loosened or removed.
AIB installation
Follow these steps to install a replacement AIB board:
1. Ensure jumpers JU1 to JU5 are set to match the jumper settings on the AIB board
removed in step 4 of AIB removal.
2. Align the board correctly with the screw holes for the four retaining screws and
press the board into the cabinet until it seats firmly into position.
Make sure the various cables are not positioned behind the board or are
obstructing the board.
3. Tighten the screws until they are firm, to secure the board in the cabinet.
4. Connect the cables removed in step 2 of AIB removal.
5. Restore the power to the cabinet.
GSM-100-533 Replacing the BSU digital cage
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W09-O
GMR-04
519
Replacing the BSU digital cage
Introduction
Under certain extraordinary circumstances, it may be necessary to replace the entire
BSU cage/backplane assembly within a cabinet. This procedure explains how to replace
the digital cage.
The procedure takes the cabinet out of service for about four hours. Motorola
recommends performing this procedure during hours of low traffic if possible.
Prerequisites
Contact Motorola with any questions about this procedure.
NOTE
Replacing a cage is an extraordinary action. Therefore, these instructions assume the
person(s) performing this procedure are experienced in all aspects of site maintenance.
Motorola recommends reading through the entire procedure, including the various related
texts and references, before attempting to perform it.
Tools and
equipment
The following tools and equipment are necessary to remove and replace the backplane:
S Torx drivers.
S Antistatic mat.
S Antistatic bags, or other containers suitable for storing digital boards, in quantities
sufficient to store all the boards in the cages(s).
S An approved earth strap.
S Labels and marking pens.
29 Aug 1997
520
GMR-04
68P02901W09-O
Obtaining
replacement
authorization
The digital cage is very reliable. Replacement is only necessary in certain limited
circumstances.
Therefore, the Customer Network Resolution Centre (CNRC) Swindon must issue a
Service Request (SR) before Motorola will accept a cage or backplane for return. The
SR shows that CNRC agreed to the backplane replacement.
Do not attempt to remove or replace a cage until CNRC authorizes such
action.
NOTE
Procedure
Follow these steps to obtain an SR number:
1. Call the CNRC on +44 (0)1793 565444.
This is a British telephone number (44 is the country code for the United Kingdom).
Prefix this number with the international access code if you are calling from outside
the United Kingdom.
2. Describe the problem to the CNRC representative, and explain why cage
replacement is indicated.
Be prepared to describe:
What alarms/events/SWFMs accompanied the problem.
What diagnostic actions , if any, were taken, and the result of those actions.
What repair actions, if any, were taken, and the result of those actions.
CNRC review
The CNRC will review the problem and the steps taken so far. Depending on this review,
the CNRC may either:
S Suggest further tests or procedures before authorizing the cage replacement.
S Authorize replacing the cage, and issue an SR number.
Do not attempt to remove or replace a cage until CNRC authorizes such
action.
NOTE
If CNRC issues an SR number authorizing the cage replacement:
S Write the number down.
S Quote the SR number, in addition to the normal returns number, in any
communications with Motorola.
Motorola will not accept returned digital cages without an CNRC authorization.
NOTE
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W09-O
GMR-04
521
Removing the
cage
Overview
This section contains three separate procedures:
S Preparing the cabinet explains how to set up the cabinet so that it is safe to work
on the digital cage.
S Disassembling the cage explains how to take the digital cage apart.
S Removing the cage explains how to take the cage out of the cabinet.
Perform these procedures in order, beginning with Preparing the cabinet.
Follow these steps to prepare the cabinet for cage replacement.
1. Determine which cage(s) need replacing.
It is probable that only one cage has a faulty backplane. Use the following table to
determine the appropriate actions.
If the faulty cage... Then:
does not contain the
BSP...
continue with step 2.
contains the BSP...
i. Reset the BSC.
* CAUTION
Resetting the site stops call processing.
Determine whether call processing is occurring
before deciding to reset the site. Disable call
processing at the site before continuing with this
procedure.
ii. Continue with step 2.
2. Use the circuit breakers to disconnect power to the cage(s).
Hazardous voltages exist inside a powered cabinet and may remain present
after power is disconnected.. Exercise caution when working on the
equipment and remove all watches, rings and other jewellery before
commencing work.
WARNING
If both cages in a BSSC cabinet require replacement, proceed with step 3.
If only one cage of a BSSC cabinet requires backplane replacement, leave the
power connected to the other cage, and proceed with Disassembling the cage.
Disabling one cage lets call processing continue, providing the second cage is
independent of the first. However, it also means dc power is still present in the
cabinet.
3. Remove the supply voltage from the cabinet.
The cage is ready for disassembly.
29 Aug 1997
522
GMR-04
68P02901W09-O
Disassembling the cage
Follow these steps to disassemble the cage.
Wear an approved earth strap when handling digital modules.
Use the antistatic mat and antistatic containers to store the digital modules.
CAUTION
1. Remove all the power supply modules in the cage.
Follow the procedure in Power supply module replacement in Chapter 4.
2. Remove all digital full and half size modules from the cage.
Put the digital modules into suitable antistatic packaging or storage containers.
These modules will go back into the new backplane.
3. Disconnect the dc supply to the fan assembly that corresponds to the cage being
replaced.
Follow the procedure beginning in Chapter 4.
4. Unscrew the fan assembly and remove it from the BSU cage.
5. Disconnect the dc supply at the bottom of the BSU cage.
6. Disconnect the MSI and Alarm board cables, and label the cables so they can be
reconnected properly.
The cables are at the top of the BSU cage.
Do not drop any of the nuts or washers into the lower BSU cage. Loose
nuts or washers can damage the cage and the components if the cage is still
powered up.
CAUTION
7. Note their respective positions and disconnect any fibre optic cables fitted to the
cages.
The cage is ready for removal.
Removing the cage
Follow these steps to remove the cage.
1. Remove the eight front screws which attach the cage to the cabinet.
2. Lift the BSU cage out and set it aside.
The cage is heavy!
S Lift the cage carefully, to avoid physical injury.
S Set the cage down carefully, to avoid further damage to the cage, or
any damage to the site.
WARNING
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W09-O
GMR-04
523
Installing the
cage
Replacing the cage
Follow these steps to replace the cage.
The cage is heavy.
S When heavy equipment is to be lifted, a responsible person must
ensure that adequate lifting facilities are available. Do not attempt to lift
heavy equipment on your own.
S Set the cage down carefully, to avoid damage to the cage or site.
WARNING
1. Lift the new cage / backplane assembly into the cabinet.
2. Secure the cage in place with the eight front screws
Equipping the cage
Follow these steps to equip the new cage with power and digital modules.
1. Connect the MSI and Alarm board cables.
The cables are at the top of the BSU cage.
2. Reconnect any fibre optic cables if the cage is extended or expanded to to other
cages.
3. Connect the dc supply at the bottom of the BSU cage.
4. Insert the fan assembly, and secure it to the cabinet with the front four screws.
5. Connect the dc supply to the fan assembly.
6. Choose an action from the following table:
If... Then...
The upper cage is being
replaced...
secure the front cover plate below the
fan assembly, and continue with step 7.
The lower cage is being
replaced...
7. Insert all the digital full size and half size modules.
8. Insert the power supply modules.
29 Aug 1997
524
GMR-04
68P02901W09-O
Restoring power
Follow these steps to restore dc power to the cabinet.
1. Connect the power supply to the top of the cabinet.
2. Restore power to the cage(s) by resetting the circuit breakers.
3. Observe the LEDs on all the power supply modules, and choose an action from
the following table.
Valid Input Default
the green LED is lit on all the power
supply modules...
the red LED is lit on all the power
supply modules...
use Power supply module
replacement in Chapter 4 to diagnose
and correct the problem.
the red LED is lit on any power
supply module...
Continue with step 4 when all the green
LEDs are lit.
4. Hard reset all the digital cards.
IMPORTANT
S Reset the GPROCs last.
S Reset the GPROC in slot 20 last of all.
Step Action: Result:
a. Flip the switch on each digital
card up to the RESET position.
The board is taken out of service
(OOS).
b. Release the switch. The card resets automatically.
Checking connections
Follow these steps to check the connections between the new backplane and the rest of
the system.
1. Connect a Local Maintenance Terminal (LMT) to the TTY port on the master
GPROC.
2. Verify the connection to the OMC.
The site will take about one hour to code load and initialize.
NOTE
3. Verify that all site Message Transfer Links (MTLs) and Operations and
Maintenance Links (OMLs) are operational.
To verify the MTLs, type:
state 0 MTL x 0 0,
where x is the MTL identifier.
To verify the OML, type:
state 0 OML x y 0,
where x and y are the OML identifiers.
The status for the MTL and the OML should be <busy, unlocked>. If it is not,
further diagnosis is necessary.
GSM-100-533 Fan replacement procedure
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W09-O
GMR-04
525
Fan replacement procedure
Purpose
This section explains how to replace the BSU/RXU cage fans.
Procedure 1 details the steps to replace older type fans (5901694E01) with the new
(5902872W01) type fans.
The old type fans are not available as replacement parts.
NOTE
This procedure should only be used to replace an old style fan with the new style fan.
Procedure 2 details the steps to replace a BSU/RXU fan where only new type fans are
involved.
Old fan assemblies can be identified as they have grey painted aluminium grills and four
nickel plated quarter-turn captive screws fitted in the corners of the grill.
New fan assemblies have plastic grilles and four black plastic quarter-turn fixings.
Table 5-1 lists the new fan assembly components.
Table 5-1 Fan assembly components
Item Quantity Part number
Fan guard front 1 1502392W01
Fan and rear guard 1 5902872W01
Screw 4 0310907C72
Tools and
equipment
The following tools and equipment are required:
S A T20 Torx driver.
S A cross head screwdriver.
S A flat blade screwdriver.
Procedure 1
Follow these steps to replace the older type fan unit, with the new fan unit:
Preparation
2. Identify and remove the correct fuse for the faulty fan (a chart on the inside of the
PDU door identifies the fuses).
29 Aug 1997
526
GMR-04
68P02901W09-O
Fan removal
1. Use a cross head screwdriver to release the four quarter-turn fasteners that secure
the fan to the shelf assembly.
3. Disconnect the fan power cable and remove the fan from the cabinet.
4. Unscrew and remove the four M4 star head screws securing the grill onto the fan.
A T20 Torx driver is required.
5. Discard the old fan.
Fan replacement
1. Unscrew and remove the two M4 star head screws securing the plastic grill onto
the new fan.
2. Retain the fan, but discard the plastic grill and the fixing screws.
3. Fit the metal grill to the new fan using the original screws.
4. Connect the power cable to the new fan.
5. Install the new fan in the cabinet.
6. Using the cross head screwdriver, tighten the four quarter-turn fasteners that
secure the fan to the shelf assembly.
Restoration
1. Insert the fuse removed in step 2 and check the fan works correctly.
Procedure 2
Follow these steps to replace the new type fan unit:
Preparation
2. Identify and remove the correct fuse for the faulty fan (a chart on the inside of the
DAB door identifies the fuses).
Fan removal
1. Use a flat blade screwdriver to release the four black plastic quarter-turn fasteners
that secure the fan to the shelf assembly.
3. Disconnect the fan power cable and remove the fan from the cabinet.
4. Discard the old fan.
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W09-O
GMR-04
527
Fan replacement
1. Connect the power cable to the new fan.
2. Install the new fan in the cabinet.
3. Using the flat blade screwdriver, tighten the four black plastic quarter-turn
fasteners that secure the fan to the shelf assembly.
Restoration
1. Insert the fuse removed in step 2 and check the fan works correctly.
29 Aug 1997
528
GMR-04
68P02901W09-O
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W38-O
GMR-04
I1
Index
GSM-100-030
29 Aug 1997 I2
GMR-04
68P02901W38-O
GSM-100-030
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W38-O
GMR-04
I3
A
air deflector
installing in BSSC, 26
installing in BSSC2, 26
air filter
cleaning procedure, 33
replacement procedure, 32, 42
alarm interface board (AIB), 322
arriving at a site, 110
B
backplane, replacement procedure, 517
installing the cage, 521
obtaining authorization, 518
removing the cage, 519
tools and equipment, 517
backplane connections
BIB, 233
T43, 228
backup power, consumption, 22, 17
balanced line interconnect board (BIB), 331
base station unit shelf
BSSC2, 18
slot assignment, 22
battery backup board (BBBX), 269
BBBX, installing, 219
before visiting a site, 110
bend radius, optical fibres, 19
BIB, backplane connections, 233
BSSC
cabinet
dimensions, 14
external view, 13
internal view, 15
cabling diagrams
PAB type PDU, 133
PDB/AIB type PDU, 136
configuration, 12
decommissioning, 32
differences from BSSC2, 132
interconnect panel, 327
BSSC2
base station unit shelf, 18
cabinet
external view, 13
internal view, 16
labelling, 124
cabling diagrams, 127
configuration, 12
fan cooling system, 119
interconnect panel, 120, 328
location, 12, 12
overview, 11, 11
power distribution unit, 118
remote transcoder unit shelf, 113
types, 11, 11
BSU, module plan, 220
BTC, replacement procedures, nonredundant cards,
54
bus terminator card (BTC), 28
GSM-100-030
29 Aug 1997 I4
GMR-04
68P02901W38-O
C
cabinets
BSSC
cabling diagrams (PAB type PDU), 133
cabling diagrams (PDB/AIB type PDU), 136
configuration, 12
differences from BSSC2, 132
dimensions, 14
external view, 13
interconnect panel, 327
internal view, 15
BSSC2
cabling diagrams, 127
configuration, 12
external view, 13
fan cooling system, 119, 325
interconnect panel, 120, 328
internal view, 16
location, 12, 12
overview, 11, 11
power distribution unit, 118
types, 11, 11
BTS6, fan cooling system, 325
delivery, 21
dimensions, 15
environmental limitations, 15
labelling
BSSC, 122
BSSC2, 124
lifting, 22, 31
overcurrent protection, 22, 17
packaging, 22
power requirements, 32
torque values, 11, 23
types covered, 21
weights, 22
cables
BBBX, 219
control signal, 225
earth, 214
power, 214
cabling diagrams
BSSC
PAB type PDU, 133
PDB/AIB type PDU, 136
BSSC2, 127
calibrating, GCLK, 413
record form, 415
catering, on site, 110
checklist, annual physical inspection, 38
circuit breakers, 324
removing and replacing, 52
cleaning, optical fibres, 18
cleaning procedure, air filters, 33
clock extender (CLKX), 271
configurations
BSSC, 12
BSSC2, 12
connecting, power cables
negative earth cabinets, 215
positive earth cabinets, 215
control signal cabling, installing, 225
D
DAB, replacement procedure, 510
decommissioning
BSSC, 32
checklist, 34
prerequisite, 31
digital cage
replacement, authorization procedure, 518
replacement procedure, 517
digital modules
BSU shelf slot assignments, 22
double kiloport switch, 29
factory installed, 218
front panels, 25
full size
BTC, 28
DSW2, 29
GCLK, 216
GDP, 260
GDP2, 220
GPROC, 226
GPROC2, 232
KSW, 237
MSI, 244
MSI2, 249
NVM, 266
overview, 27
XCDR, 255
half size
BBBX, 269
CLKX, 271
DSWX, 273
KSWX, 273, 277
overview, 268
PIX, 285
installing BBBXs, 219
RXU shelf slot assignments, 23
GSM-100-030
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W38-O
GMR-04
I5
digital power supply module (DPSM), 33
distribution alarm board (DAB), 313
double kiloport switch extender, 273
DPSM
installing, 217
nonredundant modules, 441
redundant modules, 441
DSW2, 29
double rate TDM bus, 214
expansion TDM highways, 212
local highway, 211
purpose, 29
remote TDM highway, 211
standard rate TDM bus, 214
DSWX, 273
expansion, 274
local, 275
remote, 274
requirements, 273
E
earthing
cable sizes, 214
site, 22
enhanced power supply module (EPSM), 36
EPSM
installing, 217
external equipment, power cabling
to DRAM backup battery, 213
to external multicoupler, 213
to external RTC, 213
eyebolts, inserting, 22, 31
F
fan cooling system
BSSC2, 119
FPCU, 325
overview, 325
fan power converter unit (FPCU), 325
Fan replacement procedure, 523
full size digital modules
BTC, 28
GCLK, 216
GDP, 260
GPROC, 226
GPROC2, 232
KSW, 237
MSI, 244
MSI2, 249
overview, 27
XCDR, 255
G
GCLK, calibrating, 413
record form, 415
GDP
technical description, 260
GDP2
CRC error checking, 224
MCAP interface, 224
purpose, 220
general procedures, 21
generic clock (GCLK), 216
generic processor (GPROC), 226
generic processor2 (GPROC2), 232
GPROC/GPROC2, replacement, 416
H
half size digital modules
BBBX, 269
CLKX, 271
KSWX, 273, 277
overview, 268
PIX, 285
GSM-100-030
29 Aug 1997 I6
GMR-04
68P02901W38-O
handling, optical fibres, 18
I
installing
air deflector
in BSSC,, 26
in BSSC2, 26
control signal cabling
for E1/T1 line connections, 225
for end user I/O devices, 226
for inter cabinet fibre optics, 225
DPSM, 217
EPSM, 217
eyebolts, 22
IPSM, 217
PIX, 226
tool kits for, 12
integrated power supply module (IPSM), 39
interconnect panel
BIB, 331
BSSC, 327
negative earth, 211
positive earth, 212
BSSC2, 120, 328, 210
overview, 326
T43, 329
IPSM
installing, 217
K
kiloport switch extender (KSWX), 273, 277
kiloport switch (KSW), 237
KSW, replacement procedure
KSWX, replacement procedure
L
labelling, BSSC, 122
LANX, replacement procedure
leaving a site, 111
M
maintenance
annual physical inspection checklist, 38
cleaning cabinet air filters, 33
perfoming a physical inspection, 34
procedures, 31
miscellaneous repair procedures, 51
module plan
BSU, 220
RXU, 221
MSI, replacement procedure, 430
multiple serial interface (MSI), 244
multiple serial interface (MSI2), 249
N
NPSM, replacement procedure, 440
NVM
BSC installation, 222
fault diagnosis, 437
front panel, 438
functional desription, 267
installation, 222
installation procedure, 224
interrogating the board, 267
mechanical design, 266
replacement, 437
RXCDR installation, 223
O
obtaining authorization, 518
MCSC review, 518
optical fibre, bend radius, 19
optical fibres
cleaning, 18
connection, 18
handling, 18
protection, 18
P
parallel interface extender (PIX), 285
periodic maintenance, air filters, 32, 42
GSM-100-030
29 Aug 1997
68P02901W38-O
GMR-04
I7
Physical inspection, performing, 34
PIX
connector, 226
definition, 439
installing, 226
power
BBBX connections, 219
BSSC connections
negative earth, 211
positive earth, 212
BSSC2 connections, 210
cable sizes, 214
connecting external equipment, 213
connecting to main source, 216
consumption
backup, 22, 17
negative earth BSSC, 22, 17
positive earth BSSC, 22, 17
DAB setup, 29
input limits, 28
PAB setup, 29
preparing to connect, 28
supply modules, installing, 217
terminal sizes, 28
power alarm board, PAB, 317
power distribution board (PDB), 322
power distribution unit
AIB, 322
BSSC2, 118
DAB, 313
overview, 312
PAB, 317
PDB, 322
power requirements, 32
power supply module, replacement procedure, 440
power supply modules
DPSM, 33
EPSM, 36
IPSM, 39
overview, 32
protecting, optical fibres, 18
R
remote transcoder unit shelf
BSSC2, 113
slot assignments, 23
replacement procedure
GCLK, redundant, 49
redundant GCLK, 49
replacement procedures, 41
air filters, 32, 42
backplane replacement, 517
digital cage, obtaining authorization, 518
digital cage replacement, 517
fans, 48
GCLK
multishelf configuration, 412
nonredundant, 411
single shelf configuration, 412
GDP, 434
GPROC/GPROC2, 416
interface boards, 43
MSI, 430
nonredundant BTC, 54
nonredundant CLKX, 47
nonredundant GCLK, 411
multishelf configuration, 412
single shelf configuration, 412
nonredundant KSW, 421
nonredundant KSWX, 426
nonredundant LANX, 429
PIX, 439
redundant CLKX, 45
redundant KSW, 419
redundant KSWX, 423
redundant LANX, 427
replacing an DAB, 510
XCDR, 432
replacing digital cages, authorization procedure, 518
rubbish, disposal on site, 111
rural sites, visiting, 111
RXU, module plan, 221
GSM-100-030
29 Aug 1997 I8
GMR-04
68P02901W38-O
S
safety
cabinet weights, 22
connecting mains power, 216
delivery, 21
earth cable sizes, 214
on site, 112
overcurrent protection, 22, 17
power cable sizes, 214
site earthing, 22
transient and lightning protection, 23
site requirements
dimensions, 15
environmental, 15
structural, 15
specification, specification, 21
systems covered, 11
T
T43, backplane connections, 228
T43 interconnect board, 329
tool kits, installation
one, 12
two, 14
torque values, 11, 23
transcoder (GDP), 260
transcoder (XCDR), 255
transient and lightning protection, 23
transportation panel fillers, removing, 217
U
unpacking, cabinets, 24
V
visiting sites
arriving, 110
before, 110
catering facilities, 110
leaving, 111
rubbish, 111
rural sites, 111
safety, 112
X
XCDR

Service Manual BSC-TRAU PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Service Manual BSC-TRAU PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

C

You might also like